Home

Brother PT-3600 Printer User Manual

1. 97 Appendix Symbols IO A fal RRO nera Category 29 EN eene at VEHICLES U01 U13 ui Pn TRIES sans gt o D o gt lt 98 Appendix Special barcode characters gt p 49 The following special characters can only be added to barcodes created using protocols CODE39 or CODABAR The following special characters can only be added to barcodes created using protocols EAN128 and CODE128 Fonts gt p 54 The following fonts are available HELSINKI BRUNEI BOLD 2s o D o o t ts Letter Gothic L GOTHIC is a fixed pitch font all characters use a fixed amount of space as opposed to all of the other fonts which are proportional characters use different amounts of space 99 gt Ke Lo D gt 2 gt lt Appendix Sizes and widths gt p 54 amp 56 Samples of some available text sizes and widths are shown below ABC ABC ABC ABC AB C ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC HC 40 points 28 points 24 pins S Bmw m ABC AC QC CAB MC ABO M ABO O Mo ABO o J NM mo ABO e J x ase a e e me ow oe o EE RN ERR NC CN ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC Po 5 ARA
2. Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 x Brother PT 9600 was correctly added Click Finish to quit setup Setup has finished copying files to your computer Before you can use the program you must restart Windows or your computer C No will restart my computer later Remove any disks from their drives and then click Finish to complete setup If a dialog box appears indicating that the installa tion is finished and explaining that the computer should be restarted select the option for restarting the computer click the Finish button to restart the computer and then remove the CD ROM from the computer With Windows XP In the dialog box that appears allowing you to select whether the P touch will be connected with a USB cable or an RS 232C cable select USB cable and then click the OK button A dialog box appears informing you that the PT 9600 3600 printer driver will be installed Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 The following driver will be set up Brother PT 9600 connect or turn on the Brother PT 9600 until ed to ue click Next To contin Setup will begin 17 E o jmd E jmd QD O em E lt b O Q D gt le o mp Dd Im e D oa Ch 2 Getting Started 18 Click the Next button A dialog box appears instructing you to connect the P touch to the computer Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 Preparat
3. Pulse ER para aplicar la configuraci n Para aplicar varios ajustes de formato al mismo tiempo contin e pulsando O para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse O para seleccionar el ajuste que desee Pulse s lo despu s de configurar las funciones New Block necesarias Text Rotation Funci n ROTATE El bloque de texto al que se aplica la funci n Text Rotation gira 90 en sentido contrario a las agujas del reloj Si se selecciona el ajuste amp REPEAT el texto se imprimir varias veces en la longitud del bloque de texto ABCD EFG OFF HIJK CE Mo ON t Ww hetsehelselaslst amp REPEAT IALAIIA 51 Si se ha seleccionado otro ajuste que no sea OFF para el texto en la posici n actual del cursor aparecer el indicador Text Rotation en la parte superior de la pantalla Para cambiar el ajuste de la funci n Text Rotation Global Block O Mantenga pulsada y pulse 0 8 Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de formato Pulse O hasta que se visualice ROTATE El ajuste para el texto en la posici n actual del cursor se muestra en el lado izquierdo de la pantalla y en el lado derecho se puede ver una muestra O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado ts Sj aparece como el ajuste la funci n Text Rotation ya se ha aplicado a un bloque del texto actual si se ha establecido la funci n
4. En un PC Macintosh O Haga doble clic en el icono P touch Quick Editor en la carpeta P touch Quick Editor instalada en el PC Cuando se inicie P touch Quick Editor se visualizar la ventana siguiente 1 Length 1 1 in zx e Width 1 in Barra de herramientas Vista Label Para ver la ayuda de la versi n Mac de P touch Quick Editor haga doble clic en Help html en la carpeta P touch Quick Editor instalada en el PC Especificaci n del tama o de una etiqueta Antes de escribir el texto deber establecer el tamafio de la etiqueta Dispone de una selecci n de tama os de composici n predefinidos para distintas necesidades NOTA Aunque las pantallas que se muestran en las explicaciones siguientes son para Windows 98 98 SE y Me las operaciones para Windows 2000 y XP y para Macintosh son las mismas excepto donde se indique espec ficamente 26 Para especificar el tama o de la etiqueta O Haga clic en la flecha junto al bot n Properties para visualizar el men desplegable Haga clic en Tape Settings para ver los distintos ajustes del formato de etiqueta Tape Settings tambi n se puede visualizar si se selecciona View Properties y se hace clic en Tape Settings del men emergente o si se hace clic con el bot n derecho Windows o se mantiene pulsada la tecla de control y se hace clic Macintosh en la vista de etiqueta Length 1 03 Width 1
5. Hold down and press This step may be skipped if settings for several Setup functions are being applied at the same time Press or until HALF CUTTER is dis played 06 07 4 HALF CUTTER O 3 Length Margin Font Width Size O Press or until the desired setting is displayed NOTE t To cut less deep select a lower value To cut deeper select a higher value c Adjust the setting in small steps t To return the function to its default setting 0 press the space bar O Press to apply the setting To apply several Setup settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function then pressing 4 or to select the desired setting p 8 8 only after the necessary functions have Press been set 82 To change the USB ID SELECTION setting This function allows you to specify a unique identification number for each P touch con nected to a computer in order to print through the USB connection Normally for easy setup of multiple P touch machines connected to a com puter all PT 9600 3600s will be set to 000000001 indicating that the data will be printed on all connected P touch machines at the same time Hold down and press This step may be skipped if settings for several Setup functions are being applied at the same time Press or until USB ID SELECTION is displayed 07 07 4 USB ID SELECTION 000000001 Length Margin Font Wi
6. Symbol List In the Symbol Font list select the desired symbol font Q In the Symbol List view select the desired symbol O Click the OK button The selected symbol is added to the left of the text NOTE If a symbol has already been added to the text it will be replaced by the newly selected symbol To remove a symbol that has been added click the arrow beside the Symbol button and then click Delete in the drop down menu that appears Entering text As the text is typed in its size is automatically adjusted so that all of the text fits within the print area O Click in the label view and then type in the text 34 To create anew line of text press the Enter key on the keyboard To import text from a different application select the desired text in the other application and then either press the designated shortcut keys or drag the text from the other application The shortcut keys for importing text can be specified by right clicking in the P touch AV Editor window then clicking Options in the menu that appears Ten of the most recently printed texts are automati cally stored for future use To use text from the Text History list click Text History button and then click the desired text Formatting text The entire text can easily be formatted by changing the font style and alignment O Inthe Text Properties select the desired text formats Printing Before AV
7. se visualiza el tercer s mbolo de la categor a GARDENING Accent Funci n 2 La funci n Accent se usa para afiadir caracteres acentuados en el texto La mayor a de estos caracteres tambi n se encuentran en las teclas y se escriben mediante a consulte la p gina 39 Las caracteres acentuados se agrupan en funci n de la let ra may scula o min scula con la cual combinan La tabla siguiente muestra los caracteres disponibles Caracteres acentuados co eO Q Para a adir un car cter acentuado al texto O Mantenga pulsada y pulse sm El mensaje ACCENT a y A U PRESS THE REQUIRED CHARACTER aparecer en la pantalla NOTA Para volver al texto en cualquier momento pulse O mantenga pulsada y pulse gta O Pulse la tecla de la letra del car cter acentuado que necesite O pulse f Para escribir un car cter acentuado en may sculas mantenga pulsada O pulse cs para entrar en el modo Caps antes de pulsar la tecla de la letra O Pulse O para seleccionar la letra del car cter acentuado que necesite y a continuaci n pulse O hasta que el car cter acentuado aparezca aumentado en el marco del centro de la pantalla Pulse de El car cter acentuado se a adir al texto 41 Para escribir una serie de caracteres acentuados mantenga pulsada antes de pulsar al Despu s para continuar afiadiendo caracteres acentuados selecci nelos como se
8. 02 13 4 SIZE C3 2 AUTO AUTO 1 10 HELSINKI Length Margin Font ALA AUTO Width Size O Press or until the desired setting is displayed vs Jf appears as a setting the Size function has already been applied to either a line in the current text block if the Block Format or the Global Format function is being set or a block in the current text if the Global Format function is being set Changing the setting will cancel the setting that was previously applied To return the function to its default setting AUTO press the space bar To return to the text without changing the for matting press OR hold down and Global Block Line press or O Press to apply the setting To apply several format settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function then pressing or to select the desired setting Only after the necessary functions have Press been set 56 Width function WIDTH The Width function can be used with any of the text sizes to make the size of the characters wider or more narrow For samples of the avail able Width settings refer to page 100 The width of the text at the cursor s current position is shown at the bottom of the display lt lt lt P touch gt gt gt ce 1 AUTO 1 10 HELSINKI Length Margin Font Width Size To change the setting for the Width function Hold down and press Global Block ne
9. Pulse las teclas de las letras o s mbolos correspondientes Para salir del modo Caps en cualquier momento pulse s El indicador Caps desaparece Alt Modo ar Los caracteres acentuados o los signos de puntuaci n especiales del lado derecho de las teclas se pueden a adir al texto mediante el modo Alt Para entrar o salir del modo Alt pulse ar Aparecer el indicador Alt en el lado izquierdo de la pantalla mientras se pulsa m Para a adir en el texto un car cter acentuado o signos de puntuaci n especiales escritos en color O Mantenga pulsada Aparecer el indicador Alt 39 Pulse la tecla del car cter correspondiente Para salir del modo Alt en cualquier momento suelte El indicador Alt desaparece Tecla Return zh Como en una m quina de escribir o un w de esta Ww Block procesador de textos la tecla Return m quina se usa para terminar una l nea de texto y empezar otra Cuando haya acabado de escribir una l nea pulse la tecla de retorno para crear una l nea nueva y desplazar el cursor hasta ella Un bloque de texto s lo puede contener un m ximo de 16 l neas de texto Si ya se ha escrito el n mero m ximo de l neas de texto cuando se pulse zd aparecer el mensaje de error 16 LINE LIMIT El n mero de l neas de texto que se pueden imprimir var a en funci n de la anchura de la cinta Para las cintas TZ M ximo n mero de l neas que
10. This function allows you to shift the printing up or down within the tape This function does not adjust printing on 1 1 2 36 mm wide tape O Hold down and press Press Or until HEAD ADJUSTMENT is displayed 05 07 4 HEAD ADJUSTMENT s o Length Margin Font Width Size O Press or until the desired setting is displayed NOTE t To return the function to its default setting 0 press the space bar t To shift the printing down select a lower value To shift the printing up select a higher value O Press to apply the setting To apply several Setup settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function then pressing or to select the desired setting Press Only after the necessary functions have been set 81 o me em b jmd a po t E E om o 5 O 2 D gt 2 c o pe 3 D p o Ch 4 Machine Adjustments To change the HALF CUTTER setting This function allows you to adjust how deep a half cut is cut with laminated tape for example if the tape is cut too much or not enough Nor mally it is only necessary to change the setting by one If the half cut is still either too deep or not deep enough change the setting by one again If the tape is still not cut correctly even after this set ting has been continuously adjusted the cutter may be dull Contact your service representative
11. Frame function FRAME With the Frame function you can choose from a variety of frames and highlights for emphasizing certain parts or all of the text in your label For samples of the available frame settings refer to page 104 When any setting other than OFF is selected for the text at the cursor s current posi tion the Frame indicator at the top of the dis play comes on The lines on the right side of the indicator starting from the top show if the Frame setting is applied to the entire text the block or the line lt lt lt P touch gt gt gt i AUTO 1 10 HELSINKI Length Margin Font gt E 4 o Width Size To change the setting for the Frame function Global Block Line O Hold down and press or Press or until FRAME is displayed The setting for the text at the cursor s cur rent position is shown on the left side of the display and a sample can be seen on the right side 07 13 FRAME OFF AUTO 1 10 gt E o HELSINKI Length Margin Font Width Size Q Press or until the desired setting is displayed 59 Ch 3 Functions NOTE t Even if a frame setting has already been applied to either a line in the current text block if the Block Format or the Global Format Frame func tion is being set or a block in the current text if the Global Format Frame function is being set all frames will be applied and printed t To return the functi
12. IBM and PC DOS son marcas comerciales de International Business Machines Inc Microsoft y Windows Unidos y otros pa ses son marcas comerciales registradas de Microsoft Corp en Estados Macintosh es una marca comercial registrada de Apple Computer Inc Todos los dem s nombres de productos y software aqu mencionados son marcas comerciales o marcas registradas de sus respectivas empresas Partes del software de filtro de los gr ficos se basan en el trabajo del grupo Independent JPEG Conexi n del adaptador de CA e 0o000000000090009 09090900909 fF P touch se puede usar en cualquier lugar donde haya disponible una toma el ctrica est ndar O Inserte el enchufe del cable del adaptador en el conector del adaptador de CA en el lado derecho de la P touch O Inserte el enchufe dentado del otro extremo del cable del adaptador en la toma el ctrica est ndar m s cercana t Utilice exclusivamente el adaptador de CA dise ado para esta m quina t Si no va a usar la m quina durante un per odo largo de tiempo desconecte el adaptador de CA Encendido y apagado de la P touch e 0o0000000000909009 09090900909 La tecla de encendido est situada en la esquina superior derecha del teclado de la m quina Si la P touch ha permanecido enchufada se visualizar el texto de la sesi n anterior cuando se vuelva a encender Esta opci n permite dejar el trabajo de una etiqueta apagar la m quina y
13. Minimal from the Feature Set list to open it and then click the Next button to start install Drctoueh ator 32 ing just the P touch Editor 3 2 application 22 Ch 2 Getting Started P touch Editor 3 2 P touch Editor 3 2 Choose Product Components Pre Installation Summary nmn i remm m i l i ri A Introduction Feature Set Minimal UN Introduction Please Review the Following Before Continuing M Choose Product Features Choose Product Features dg ns a FA P touch Editor 3 2 Choose Alias Folder F Fonts US A Prezinstallation Summary hora ha tolder Mac 06 h k e P touch Editor 3 2 in the folder Mac on the dis o Auto Format Templates a Macintosh HD a LJ Clip Art a ias Folder Desktop in the folder mward on the disk Macintosh HD Description Disk Space Information for Installation Target Required 58 672 177 bytes Available 1 590 501 376 bytes Previous GD gt Ceo E 9 Check that the installation will be per formed as desired and then click the Install If certain options such as the Auto Format Tem button After P touch Editor is installed a plates and the Clip Art are not installed some dialog box appears indicating that the P touch Editor functions may not be available installation is finished P touch Editor 3 2 O For a custom installation Install Complete E o jmd E jmd QD O em E lt b O Se ect Cuy st
14. Para desplazar el cursor varios caracteres a la izquierda O Mantenga pulsada hasta que el cursor se mueva a la posici n que desee Para desplazar el cursor al principio de la l nea de texto actual O Mantenga pulsada y pulse Para desplazar el cursor al principio del bloque de texto actual O Mantenga pulsada y pulse Si el cursor ya est al principio del bloque de texto cuando se pulsen estas teclas el cursor se mover al principio del bloque anterior tecla de flecha derecha Para desplazar el cursor un car cter a la derecha O Pulse una vez Si se pulsa esta tecla cuando el cursor est al final de una l nea seguida de otra el cursor se desplazar hasta el principio de la l nea siguiente Para desplazar el cursor varios caracteres a la derecha O Mantenga pulsada gt hasta que el cursor se mueva a la posici n que desee Para desplazar el cursor al final de la l nea de texto actual O Mantenga pulsada y pulse Para desplazar el cursor al principio del bloque de texto siguiente O Mantenga pulsada y pulse Si el cursor ya est al principio del ltimo bloque de texto cuando se pulsen estas teclas el cursor se mover al final del texto tecla de flecha arriba Para desplazar el cursor hasta la l nea anterior O Pulse una vez Home Si se pulsa esta tecla cuando el cursor est en la primer l nea de texto el cursor se desplazar
15. Q Haga doble clic en el icono del instalador de P touch Editor 3 2 en la carpeta que aparecer Se iniciar el instalador y aparecer el cuadro de di logo de introducci n Introduction A Introduction InstallAnywhere will guide you through the installation of P touch e Editor 3 2 It is strongly recommended that you quit all programs before continuing with this installation Click the Next button to proceed to the next screen If you want to change something on a previous screen click the Previous button You may cancel this installation at any time by clicking the Cancel button quum Cancel Cuando se pulsa el bot n Next aparece un mensaje que avisa de que ya hay instalada una versi n anterior del software Desinstale la versi n anterior del software antes de instalar la nueva Para obtener m s informaci n sobre la desinstalaci n del software consulte Para desinstalar el software P touch Editor 3 2 en la p gina 33 O Haga clic en el bot n Next Aparecer el cuadro de Choose Product Components di logo P touch Editor 3 2 Choose Product Components Introduction Feature Set Typical A Choose Product Features v P touch Editor 3 2 Y Fonts US Y Auto Format Templates M Clip Art Description qum P oct aen aminan S Cancel Previous Next gt 17 Q Seleccione el m todo de instalaci n O Para una instalaci n t pica Haga clic en el bot n Next par
16. en cualquier momento El medio corte s lo se puede usar para cortar cinta laminada 57 Impresi n Funci n Layout Preview Layout Preview cese ls P La funci n Layout Preview permite ver una presentaci n general del texto dentro de la anchura de la cinta instalada actualmente La longitud de la etiqueta actual se indica en la esquina inferior izquierda de la pantalla Para previsualizar la etiqueta Layout Preview e Mantenga pulsada y pulse t Para desplazarse hacia delante y hacia detr s por la etiqueta pulse o z t Para volver al texto en cualquier momento pulse O mantenga pulsada y pulse Preview A Cut Auto Cut Funci n cose 5 Todos los ajustes de la funci n Auto Cut constan de valores para tres m todos de corte diferentes corte completo que se usa para separar totalmente la etiqueta medio corte que se usa para cortar la cinta laminada sin cortar la parte posterior de la etiqueta lo cual facilita la extracci n del papel posterior e impresi n en cadena en la que no se separa la ltima copia para reducir la cantidad de cinta que se pierde La impresi n en cadena es una funci n econ mica que se ha dise ado para ayudar a eliminar cinta que se pierde al principio de las etiquetas Sin la impresi n en cadena normalmente la cinta restante de la sesi n de impresi n anterior se pierde para el uso antes de que se imprima la primera
17. ii E Jor e This step may be skipped if settings for several for mat functions are being applied at the same time Press or until WIDTH is displayed The setting for the text at the cursor s cur rent position is shown on the left side of the display and a sample can be seen on the right side 03 13 9 WIDTH A G3 NORMAL gt 4 o AUTO 1 10 Length Margin Font HELSINKI A Width Size O Press or until the desired setting is displayed NOTE re f appears as a setting the Width func tion has already been applied to either a line in the current text block if the Block Format or the Global Format function is being set or a block in the current text if the Global Format function is being set Changing the setting will cancel the setting that was previously applied To return the function to its default setting NORMAL press the space bar To return to the text without changing the for matting press OR hold down and Global Block Line press or g O Press to apply the setting To apply several format settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function then pressing or to select the desired setting only after the necessary functions have Press se Block been set Style1 function STYLE1 With the Style1 function 5 other text styles are available allowing you to create more personal ized labels For sa
18. t f you do not intend to use this machine for an extended period of time disconnect the AC adaptor Turning on off the P touch The power key amp is located in the upper right corner of the machine s keyboard If the P touch has remained plugged in the previous session s text is displayed when you turn it on again This feature allows you to stop work on a label turn off the machine and return to it later without having to re enter the text If the PT 9600 is being operated from its rechargeable battery the machine will automat ically turn off if no key is pressed or no opera tion is performed for 5 minutes Ch 2 Getting Started NOTE t Do not unplug the AC adaptor if the P touch is plugged in and turned on otherwise the data being edited will be erased Be sure to turn off the P touch before unplugging the AC adaptor t A PT 9600 operating from its rechargeable bat tery will automatically turn off if no key is pressed or no operation is performed for 5 min utes However if the PT 9600 is in Transfer mode or Interface mode it will automatically turn off if no operation is performed for 30 min utes rz f the PT 9600 is connected to a computer through a serial RS 232C interface cable or is printing data from the computer it will not automatically turn off t f the P touch is connected to a computer through a USB interface cable and is printing data from the computer the P touch will not
19. 13 LINES MAXIMUM on 24 mm tape 10 LINES MAXIMUM on 18 mm tape 6 LINES MAXIMUM on 12 mm tape 4 LINES MAXIMUM on 9 mm tape 3 LINES MAXIMUM on 6 mm tape This message appears if you try to store a text file after the maxi mum number of characters has already been stored in the memory This message appears if less than the minimum four digits are entered as the barcode data This message appears if no files are stored in the memory when you try to recall delete or print one This message appears if no tape cassette is installed when you try to feed the tape print or use the Layout Preview function This message appears when the installed Ni MH battery is about to run out or when the battery has reached a high voltage lines or install a wider tape Delete an unwanted file to make space for the new one Enter a minimum of four digits before pressing Store a text file before try ing to recall delete or print one Install a tape cassette and try again Replace the battery or use the AC adaptor ERROR MESSAGE LIST ERROR MESSAGE EA PAPA APP CAUSE SOLUTION SET SET 1 4 TAPE TAPE SET 6mm TAPE SET 3 8 TAPE SET 9mm TAPE SET 1 2 TAPE SET 12mm TAPE SET 3 4 TAPE SET 18mm TAPE SET 1 TAPE SET 24mm TAPE SET 1 1 2 TAPE SET 36mm TAPE SET AV1789 TAPE SET AV1957 TAPE SET AV2067 TAPE le This message appears if a 1 4 me
20. AUTO 1 10 Length Margin Font gt omm 4 o Width Size Letter Gothic L GOTHIC is a fixed pitch font all characters use a fixed amount of space as opposed to all of the other fonts which are proportional characters use different amounts of space To change the setting for the Font function Global Block Line O Hold down and press jor This step may be skipped if settings for several for mat functions are being applied at the same time Press or until FONT is displayed The setting for the text at the cursor s cur rent position is shown on the left side of the display and a sample can be seen on the right side 01 13 4 FONT GS HELSINKI AUTO 1 10 Length Margin Font O Press or until the desired setting is displayed A HELSINKI A Width Size gt c 4 o 54 NOTE IS f appears as a setting the Font function has already been applied to part of the current text either a line in the current block if the Block Format or the Global Format function is being set or a block in the text if the Global For mat function is being set Changing the setting will cancel the setting that was previously applied t To return the function to its default setting HEL SINKI press the space bar t To return to the text without changing the for matting press OR hold down and Global Block Line press ii 2 joris D O Press to apply the set
21. Operational Assistance For technical and operational assistance you may call Brother Customer Service at Voice 1 877 4 PTouch or Fax 1 901 379 1210 Assistance on the Internet For product information and downloading the latest drivers http www brother com For purchasing accessories and certain Brother products http www brothermall com Accessories and Supplies To order Brother accessories or supplies by Visa MasterCard Discover or American Express you may call toll tree 1 888 879 3232 or complete the order form in your user s guide and fax both sides of the form to 1 800 947 1445 For purchasing accessories on the Internet http www brothermall com To order by mail or pay by check please complete the accessory order form and mail it along with payment to Brother International Corporation Attn Consumer Accessory Division P O Box 341332 Bartlett TN 38133 1332 Fax Back System Brother Customer Service has installed an easy to use Fax Back System so you can get instant answers to common technical questions and product information for all Brother products This system is available 24 hours a day 7 days a week You can use the system to send the information to any fax machine not just the one you are calling from Please call 1 800 521 2846 and follow the voice prompts to receive faxed instructions on how to use the system and an index of Fax Back subjects Save Time Register On Line Don t stand in line at the
22. PT 9600 only ra Sm c me dp o gt lt b pun o m aa Handle Tape exit slot LCD display y AAR AAAABA lt E E yhd E gt lt lt lt P touch gt gt gt 1 10 HELSINKI A Width Size SOS gt E O Tape width indicator gt p 8 Mirror Printing setting indicator gt p 65 Caps indicator gt p 46 Alt indicator gt p 47 Insert mode indicator gt p 46 Rotate setting indicator gt p 61 Auto Cut setting indicator gt p 68 Tape Length setting gt p 63 Line Effects setting indicator gt p 58 Tape Margin setting gt p 62 Font setting gt p 54 Character width setting gt p 56 Frame setting gt p 59 Style1 setting indicators gt p 57 Style2 setting indicators gt p 58 Character size setting gt p 54 amp e o eoccodo Text Alignment setting indicators gt p 60 Character size setting indicator gt p 54 000000000 French Caps indicator gt p 46 Uy M h o 99 S c o gun od m Ch 1 Before You Start Keyboard OO P touch 9600 Mirror A Cut e e o Format Block 9 IA Out Clear La m Number GEMA TINE al m Global Block Line _ P touch 3600 Mirror AV TZ 3 Labels Tape o Format Lay Global Block Line a Number TY PON Line Out Clear Arrow keys gt p 44 Power key p 7
23. Screen backlight key PT 9600 only gt Refer to the Advanced Functions booklet Macro key PT 9600 only gt Refer to the Advanced Functions booklet PF keys PT 9600 only Interface key PT 9600 only gt Refer to the Advanced Functions booklet gt Refer to the Advanced Functions booklet Space bar gt p 46 Return key 9 p 45 O Backspace key c p 51 9 Chapter 2 Getting Started Q D gt lo o r Q m 1 Q Ch 2 Getting Started PRECAUTIONS Use only Brother TZ tapes or Brother Avery AV labels with this machine Do not use tapes that do not have the or mark Do not pull on the tape being fed from the P touch otherwise the tape cassette may be dam aged Avoid using the machine in extremely dusty places Keep it out of both direct sunlight and rain Do not expose the machine to extremely high temperatures or high humidity Never leave it on the dashboard or in the back of your car Do not store tape cassettes where they would be exposed to direct sunlight high humidity or dust Do not leave any rubber or vinyl on the machine for an extended period of time otherwise the machine may be stained Do not clean the machine with alcohol or other organic solvents Only use a soft dry cloth Do not put any foreign objects into or heavy objects on the machine To avoid injuries do not touch the cutter s edge Use only the AC adaptor de
24. USP4839742 USP4976558 USP5009530 USP5120147 USP4927278 USP4983058 USP5069557 NDICES PRECAUCIONES scszerssysvecaccesens secosstenstcescessanseaae un tensucceveasseconeseeesees 1 C nexiondeladaptador de Asse cette m Ee Rau AAA AA 2 Encendido y apagado de la P touch sees eene nnns Z Instalaci n sustituci n del casete de cinta eese z Conekonde POUCH Wn FO A A AS 3 Instalaci n del software y el controlador de la impresora 3 Lectura Ge Manual uel usuario HA 23 Uso de P touch Editor 3 2 Stops ED E pu E A 23 USodestouch OMCKE QILOF a 25 Usode PIOHCA AM LAOT lt A E 29 Desinstalaci n del software y del controlador de la impresora 31 Facon de las CHOU CIOS is 34 Montaje de sellos alada dio 35 Ejecucion deoperaciones DASICGS A NE 37 IntVOdUuGCclOn ACTO ie 39 EdIGIOnsie LENO a ie RU 435 a A A A ORASE 44 IDTE SO A A dase teeucetarenae veer inccteye spe 56 Almacenamiento y activaci n de archivos eese eene 61 Ajustes de AMAN e tr ti o HU Ep HE E UEM epi ets 65 SOLUCION DE PROBLEMAS eon sd te sa ey een eee EUR FU eap gRPO Co REEL ees 69 ESPECIFICACIONES DE LA MAQUINA eee eee ee eee eene nue 73 T PRECAUCIONES Con esta m quina utilice exclusivamente cintas Brother TZ o etiquetas Brother Avery AV No utilice cintas que no tengan la marca O No tire de la cinta mientras se alimenta desde la P to
25. e Read this User s Guide before you start using your P touch e Keep this User s Guide in a handy place for future reference e Antes de usar su equipo por primera vez lea cuidadosamente esta Gu a de Usuario e Guarde esta Gu a de Usuario para futuras referencias PREFACE Thank you for purchasing this P touch With your new P touch you can create labels for any purpose Select from a variety of frames fonts and character styles to design beautiful custom labels In addition the many pre formatted templates available make label making quick and easy In addition three types of AV label cassettes can be used to create easy to peel off pre sized address and filing labels AV2067 3 4 x 2 5 8 20 mm x 67 mm address labels AV1957 3 4 x 2 1 4 19 mm x 57 mm return address labels and AV1789 5 8 x 3 1 2 17 mm x 89 mm file folder labels You can print professional looking labels in no time The quality and performance of this P touch make it an extremely practical machine to meet all your labelling needs Although this P touch is easy to use we suggest that you read this User s Guide carefully before starting Keep this manual nearby for future reference The P touch will make a noise when it is turned on or while it is printing however this does not indicate a malfunction Federal Communications Commission FCC Declaration of Conformity For USA Only Responsible Party Brother International Corporation 100 Somers
26. el cuadro de di logo de bienvenida Welcome x Welcome to the P touch Quick Editor Setup program This program will install P touch Quick Editor on your computer Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Nextto continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion ofit may resultin severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law NOTA t Para instalar s lo el controlador de la impresora haga clic en el bot n inferior Driver Con Windows XP aparecer un mensaje inform ndole de que el controlador de impresora ha pasado las pruebas de compatibilidad y que debe hacer clic sobre el bot n Continue Anyway si aparece un mensaje de aviso Haga clic sobre el bot n OK IMPORTANT This printer driver has passed compatibility tests IF your hardware wizard inue Anyway to complete the displays a warning message please select Conti software installation Aparecer el primer cuadro de di logo de Driver Setup que le permitir seleccionar si la P touch estar conectada en el puerto USB o en el puerto RS 232C Contin e con el procedimiento en Instalaci n del controlador de
27. inform ndole de que el controlador de impresora ha pasado las pruebas de compatibilidad y que debe hacer clic sobre el bot n Continue Anyway si aparece un mensaje de aviso Haga clic sobre el bot n OK river has passed compatibility tests If your hardware wizard a warning message please select Continue Anyway to complete the software installation Aparecer el primer cuadro de di logo de Driver Setup que le permitir seleccionar si la P touch estar conectada en el puerto USB o en el puerto RS 232C Contin e con el procedimiento en Instalaci n del controlador de impresora USB en la p gina 11 Para instalar el controlador de impresora en serie consulte para instalar el controlador de impresora en serie consulte el manual de Funciones avanzadas Si el controlador de la impresora ya est instalado haga clic en el bot n No Aparecer el cuadro de di logo que informa de que la instalaci n ya ha terminado Seleccione Yes want to restart my computer now S deseo reiniciar mi equipo ahora haga clic en el bot n Finish para reiniciar el PC y extraiga el CD ROM de la unidad de CD ROM Setup Complete Setup has finished copying files to your computer Before you can use the program you must restart Windows or your computer C No will restart my computer later Remove any disks from their drives and then click Finish to complete setup Instalaci n del software P touch AV Edi
28. sible for all labor charges associated with repairs made after the first 90 days from original purchase After 90 days from the original purchase date accompanying Con sumable and Accessory Items are no longer covered by this warranty If the Machine and or accompanying Con sumable and Accessory Item s are not covered by this warranty either stage you will be charged for shipping the Machine and or accompanying Consumable and Accesso ry Item s back to you The foregoing are your sole i e only and exclusive remedies under this warranty What happens when Brother elects to replace your Machine If you have delivered the Machine to an Authorized Service Center the Authorized Service Center will provide you with a replacement Machine after receiving one from Brother If you are dealing directly with Brother Brother will send to you a replacement Machine with the understanding that you will after receipt of the replacement Machine supply the required proof of purchase information together with the Machine that Brother agreed to replace You are then expected to pack the Machine that Brother agreed to replace in the package from the replacement Machine and return it to Brother using the air bill supplied by Brother in accordance with the instructions provided by Brother Since you will be in possession of two machines Brother will require that you provide a valid major credit card number Brother will issue a hold against t
29. Aparecer el primer cuadro de di logo de Driver Setup que le permitir seleccionar si la P touch estar conectada en el puerto USB o en el puerto RS 232C Contin e con el procedimiento en Instalaci n del controlador de impresora USB en la p gina 11 Para instalar el controlador de impresora en serie consulte para instalar el controlador de impresora en serie consulte el manual de Funciones avanzadas Driver will be installed Selecttype of connection cable Connection Cable uy Serial cable dS 2 10101 C USB cable Para instalar el software P touch Editor 3 2 haga clic en el bot n superior P touch Editor Contin e con el procedimiento en Instalaci n de P touch Editor 3 2 software en la p gina 4 Welcome to the P touch Editor Setup program This program will install P touch Editor on your computer Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Nextto continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law ck Editor haga clic sobre segundo bot n desde la parte superior P touch Quick Editor y a continuaci n
30. Becker JABC Impo Length Margin Font Width Size O Repeat steps and until Y appears to the right of all files to be deleted Files marked with Y will be deleted 75 Ch 3 Functions Printing stored text and Auto Format templates Multiple stored text or Auto Format templates can be printed immediately without first being recalled To print stored text files O Hold down and press a The MEM ORY screen appears Press or until Y moves beside PRINT 04 04 CLEAR MEMORY VPRINT Length Margin Font Width Size Q Press s The PRINT screen appears in the display with the currently selected file num ber To quit the Memory Print function without printing any text press OR hold down and press Memory E PRINT FILELOO NAMETAG v gt R Becker ABC Tran Length Margin Font Width Size O Press or until the file number con taining the text that you wish to print is dis played The file name is shown beside the file number and the text stored under the selected file number is shown in the bottom line NOTE To see other parts of the selected text file press or E 76 Press the space bar so that Y appears to the right of the file name PRINT FILELOO NAMETAG M gt R BeckeryABC Tran Length Margin Font Width Size Repeat steps and until Y appears to the right of all files to be printed Files marked with v will be printed t f multiple
31. Global Format Si se cambia el ajuste se cancelar el que se aplic previamente t Para devolver el valor predeterminado a la funci n OFF pulse la barra de espacio t Para volver al texto sin cambiar el formato pulse O mantenga pulsada y pulse Global Block Oe Para aplicar varios ajustes de formato al mismo tiempo contin e pulsando O para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse O para seleccionar el ajuste que desee Pulse S lo despu s de configurar las funciones Block necesarias 52 Funci n Tape Margin T MARGIN La funci n Tape Margin permite ajustar el tamafio de m rgenes izquierdo y derecho del texto Los m rgenes de la etiqueta se pueden ajustar a una anchura entre 0 08 y 4 00 pulgadas 0 2 cm y 9 9 cm En la parte inferior de la pantalla se muestra el ajuste actual de Tape Margin El ajuste Tape Margin solamente se aplica a etiquetas impresas en cinta TZ Los m rgenes de cinta de las etiquetas AV se han fijado a 0 20 pulgadas 0 5 cm y no se pueden ajustar incluso aunque se cambie este valor Para cambiar el valor de la funci n Tape Margin Global O Mantenga pulsada y pulse Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de Global Format Pulse O hasta que se visualice T MARGIN El ajuste actual se muestra en el lado izquierdo de la pantalla O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el ajuste que desee o ut
32. Home Clear Cada vez que se pulse s se borrar un car cter Para borrar una secuencia de caracteres O Pulses 2 O t para situar el cursor debajo del car cter inmediatamente a la derecha del car cter que desee borrar Clear Mantenga pulsada hasta que todos los caracteres que desee borrar se hayan suprimido 4 Home Line Out Tecla Delete p Line Out La tecla Delete p permite suprimir el car cter que est encima del cursor Despu s de borrar el car cter el texto restante a la derecha se mueve un lugar a la izquierda Cada vez que se pulsa p se borra un car cter Para suprimir un car cter O Pulses 2 O 1 para situar el cursor debajo del car cter que desee eliminar Line Out O Pulse una vez 4 Home Para borrar una secuencia de caracteres O Pulse O t para situar el cursor debajo del car cter que desee eliminar Line Out Mantenga pulsada hasta que todos los caracteres que desee eliminar se supriman 4 Home Line Out Funci n Line out c e Con la funci n Line Out se puede suprimir f cilmente toda una l nea de texto Para borrar una l nea de texto y O Pulse Ot para situar el cursor en la l nea de texto que desea eliminar 4 Home 43 Line Out Mantenga pulsada y pulse una Vez Line Out Cada vez que se pulse mientras se ma
33. If enough hard disk space is available click the Install button O For a custom installation Clicking the Custom Install button dis plays a dialog box that allows you to select which options to install HHT HE PE HE RTH RH RH HHH EH H FE P touch itor 3 2 FE HE HE HE PE HE E HE HE TE HE E H HE RTH RTE P touch Editor is an application that gives you a variety of designing possibilities for creating labels and stamps 2 P touch Editor 3 2 w PT 9600 Driver MM Fonts 4 Auto Format Templates M Clip Art Mac 05 9 Mac OS X Installation Start up the installer and then follow the messages that appear Install on System Requirements Computer Macintosh Power Macintosh or iMac E Macintosh HD Installation requires 189 5 MB Available on volume 1131 5 MB Operating system Mac OS 8 6 or later Available memory Minimum 32MB Available hard disk space Minimum 20MB This software is only compatible with Mac OS X classic Q Double click the Mac OS 9 folder to open it Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc O 3 Mac OS 9 3 items 1 10 GB availabe Only the options with a check mark beside them are installed Select the options that you wish to install and then click the Install button NOTE t n order to print from the P touch 9600 3600 PT 9600 3600 Driver must be selected for installation Q Double click t
34. Length Margin Font Width Size CLEAR AV2067 T AV OO ADDRESS1 R Becker ABC Impo Length Margin Font Width Size 74 Ch 3 Functions Q Press i Or until the file number con taining the text that you wish to delete is NOTE displayed The file name is shown beside the file number and the text stored under t f multiple files are to be deleted follow steps O and to mark them with Y If only one file the selected file number is shown in the is to be deleted steps and can be bottom line capped t To select all files in the memory hold down t To see other parts of the selected text file press and press the space bar ori te To remove a file from those that are to be rs Auto Format template files of the same tape deleted select the file and then press the space width are displayed grouped together bar to remove the V from the right side of the file name O Press the space bar so that v appears to the right of the file name Q Press B The message OK TO CLEAR For a text file appears CLEAR FILE OO NAMETAG v R BeckerJABC Tran Length Margin Font Width Size OK TO CLEAR CLEAR 3 4 TZE0O VIDEO lv D FAVORITE SONGS Length Margin Font Width Size Q Press Js The text stored in the selected file Length Margin Font Width Size numbers is deleted To go back and select different files to be deleted press cance CLEAR AV2067 T AV OO ADDRESSI1 V aS R
35. The dialog boxes shown in the procedures below are for the installation of the software for the PT 9600 When installing the software for the PT 3600 the dialog boxes may be slightly different from those shown To install the USB printer driver With Windows 98 98 SE Me or 2000 In the dialog box that appears allowing you to select whether the P touch will be con nected with a USB cable or an RS 232C cable select USB cable and then click the OK button A dialog box appears informing you that the PT 9600 3600 printer driver will be installed Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 xi The following driver will be setup Brother PT 9600 Warning Do not connect or turn on the Brother PT 9600 until you are directed to AGA o E To continue click Next Setup will begin Click the Next button A dialog box appears instructing you to connect the P touch to the computer Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 E x Preparation for setup is finished Install the printer Connect Brother PT 9600 and then turn it on Wait until itis automatically added Ca o E When the printer can be added the next Driver Setup page automatically appears Ch 2 Getting Started Q Connect the P touch to the computer using the enclosed USB interface cable as described on page 9 and then turn on the P touch A dialog box appears indicating that the printer driver has been installed
36. fma T gt lel Q En la lista Format haga clic en el formato de etiqueta que desee NOTA t El tama o de la composici n de la etiqueta tambi n se puede ajustar mediante los ajustes espec ficos de Length y Width o si se arrastran los bordes de la vista de etiqueta hasta que la composici n tenga el tamafio que desee formatos de Dispone de tres predefinidos para etiquetas AV que le permiten crear f cilmente etiquetas de direcci n o de carpetas de archivos s lo con seleccionar el formato y escribir el texto etiqueta Introducci n de texto Todo el texto se puede formatear r pidamente mediante la especificaci n de la fuente el tamafio el estilo y la alineaci n Adem s se puede dibujar un marco alrededor del texto Para escribir el texto O Haga clic en la flecha junto al bot n Properties aF para visualizar el men desplegable Haga clic en Text Settings para ver los distintos ajustes de formato de texto NOTA Text Settings tambi n se visualizar si se selecciona View Properties y despu s se hace clic en Text Settings del men emergente si se hace clic con el bot n derecho Windows o se mantiene pulsada la tecla de control y se hace clic Macintosh en la vista de etiqueta Length 1 03 Width 1 y Ay P eE sj Aria O En Text Settings Properties seleccione los formatos de texto que desee O Haga clic en la vista de etiqueta y escriba o importe el
37. matically appears allowing you to select what to install Brother Setup Selectthe components that you want to install m P touch Editor P touch Editor Ver 3 2 the printer driver and the manual will be installed m P touch Quick Editor P touch Quick Editor and the printer driver will be installed m P touch AV Editor P touch AV Editor and the printer driver will be installed r Driver The printer driver will be installed If the dialog box does not automatically appear double click My Computer on the desktop and then double click the CD ROM drive containing the CD ROM For Windows XP click My Com puter in the Start menu and then double click the CD ROM drive containing the CD ROM Next double click Setup exe to display the dialog box Click the lower button Driver Windows xP only A message appears informing you that the printer driver has passed compatibility tests and that the Continue Anyway button should be pressed if a warning message appears Click the OK button RTANT his printer driver has passed compatibility tests IF your hardware wizard lisplays a warning message please select Continue Anyway to complete the software installation A Driver Setup dialog box appears allow ing you to select whether to replace add or delete the PT 9600 3600 printer driver Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 xi Brother PT 9600 is currently insta
38. n Add La PT 9600 3600 aparecer en la Printer List O Salga del Print Center Lectura del Manual del usuario Para visualizar el Manual del usuario de P touch Editor inserte el CD ROM en la unidad de disco cada vez que desee consultarlo o inst lelo en el PC para que est disponible r pidamente en cualquier momento Como el Manual del usuario es un documento en HTML se necesita un navegador para leerlo En un PC que ejecute Windows Para ver el Manual del usuario desde el CD ROM Inicie el Explorador de Windows Seleccione la unidad de CD ROM Haga doble clic en la carpeta P touch Haga doble clic en la carpeta Manual Haga doble clic en Main htm Para ver el Manual del usuario instalado en el disco duro O Haga clic en el bot n Inicio de la barra de tareas para ver el men Inicio Seleccione Programs Programas Seleccione P touch Editor 3 2 Haga clic en The User s Guide P touch Editor 3 2 Manual del usuario de P touch Editor 3 2 En un PC Macintosh Para ver el Manual del usuario desde el CD ROM O Haga doble clic en Main htm en la carpeta User s Guide que est dentro de la carpeta P touch Editor 3 2 en el CD ROM Para ver el Manual del usuario instalado en el disco duro O Haga doble clic en Main htm en la carpeta User s Guide que est dentro de la carpeta P touch Editor 3 2 instalada en el PC Uso de P touch Editor 3 2 e 0o000000000000009009090900909
39. 3 El texto se imprime sobre cinta rayada e Se ha llegado al final de la cinta en el casete Sustit yalo con uno nuevo 69 SOLUCI N DE PROBLEMAS Problema 4 La P touch no funciona correctamente 5 La m quina se ha bloqueado es decir no pasa nada cuando se pulsa una tecla 6 El corte del medio es demasiado profundo o no lo suficiente 70 Soluci n Para reiniciar la P touch ap guela y mientras mantiene pulsada Y EX vuelva a encenderla x Todos los ajustes se reiniciar n con sus valores predeterminados y todo el contenido de la memoria se borrar Si necesita conservar los ajustes actuales y los archivos almacenados haga una copia de seguridad en el PC mediante el programa de gesti n de copias de seguridad P touch Backup Manager Antes de instalar o extraer el casete de cinta debe reiniciar la P touch Para reiniciar la m quina PT 3600 desenchufe el adaptador de CA d jelo desenchufado un minuto y a continuaci n ench felo otra vez s lo PT 9600 pulse el bot n de reinicio que est en el compartimento de las pilas en la parte inferior de la m quina ts Se borrar n el texto y los formatos de la pantalla y todos los archivos de texto almacenados en la memoria Antes de instalar o extraer el casete de cinta debe reiniciar la P touch Siga el procedimiento en las p ginas 67 para ajustar la profundidad del corte de la cinta laminada SOLUCI N DE P
40. 4 18 mm wide tape to make a label for an L size stamp Pm m D L Mirror La q Q Press rn to print out the identification label After the label is cut off affix it to the end of the holder so that its bottom edge is on the same side of the stamp holder as the raised brother logo Q Fit the frame over the stamp film and then push the frame down into place 40 Ch 2 Getting Started Stamping Since the length of time and amount of pressure that the stamp holder should be held down depends on the amount of ink in the holder first practise stamping on a piece of scrap paper E jmd E a jmd dp O em E O You can expect to use a stamp film holder approximately 300 to 500 times although some ink is lost when the stamp film is changed The actual life of the stamp film holder will vary depending on the size and thickness of the char acters whether a shading pattern is used etc c After stamping wait until the ink has com pletely dried before touching it in order to pre vent smearing If the stamp holder is not pressed straight down the stamp may be blurred Do not press the stamp holder down too force fully Do not stamp on wet sticky rough or uneven surfaces Only stamp on paper The ink will not dry on plastic overhead projector transparen cies and other ink impermeable objects If a stamp made with a new stamp film is faint or incomplete even after fo
41. 52 Text automatically 66 Text blocks 53 Frame function 59 Framing 59 Functions Accent 48 Auto Cut 68 Auto Format 66 Barcode 49 Block Format 53 Block Length 64 Block Margin 63 Clear 51 Font 54 Frame 59 Global Format 52 Layout Preview 68 Line Effects 58 Line Out 51 Mirror Printing 65 New Block 47 Numbering 70 Repeat Printing 70 Size 54 Stamp 65 Style 1 57 Style 2 58 Symbol 48 Tape Length 63 Tape Margin 62 Text Alignment 60 Text Rotation 61 Width 56 Global Format functions 52 Grip 2 Handle 2 Hardware specifications 94 Highlighting 59 Incremental printing 70 Indicators Alt 47 Auto Cut 69 113 Caps 46 Font 54 Frame 59 Ins 46 Line Effects 58 Size 54 Style 57 58 Tape Length 63 Tape Margin 62 Text Alignment 60 Text Rotation 61 Width 56 Ink stamps 39 Ins indicator 46 Insert key 46 Insert mode 46 Inserting text 46 Installing P touch Editor 10 Tape cassette 7 Ironing garments with labels 39 Iron on transfer tape 38 Italic text style 58 J Justify text 60 K Keyboard 2 4 L Label attaching 38 Laminated tape 38 Layout Preview function 68 LCD display 2 3 Left alignment 60 Line Effects function 58 Line Out function 51 Lines of text 47 Lowercase letters 46 M Macintosh operating systems 20 Maximum Memory 72 Number of blocks 48 Number of characters in memory 72 Number of lines 47 Text size 55 Memory functions 72 114 Mirror Printing function 65 Modes
42. 8 29 South Main St 20 mm x 67 mm Los Angeles CA 88888 AV 2067 Mr R Becker 2067 ADDRESS 5 3 4 x 2 5 8 A MAN al 20 mm x 67 mm Los Angeles CA 88888 AV 2067 Mr R Becker 2067 ADDRESS 6 3 4 x 2 5 8 er 20 mm x 67 mm Los Angeles CA 88888 AV2067 Mr R Becker Overseas Sales Div 2067 ADDRESS 7 3 4 x 2 5 8 ABC Import Export 29 Main SI 20 mm x 67 mm Los Angeles CA 88888 gt Le Lo D gt e gt lt AV1957 R Becker 1957 RETURN 1 3 4 x 2 1 4 29 South Main St 19 mm x 57 mm Los Angeles CA 88888 AV 1957 R Becker 1957 RETURN 2 3 4 x 2 1 4 29 South Main St 19 mm x 57 mm Los Angeles CA 88888 108 Appendix Template 1957 RETURN 3 1957 RETURN 4 NT D 1789 FILING 2 1789 FILING 3 1789 FILING 4 AV1957 3 4 x 2 1 4 19 mm x 57 mm AV1957 3 4 x 2 1 4 19 mm x 57 mm AV1789 5 8 x 3 1 2 17 mm x 89 mm AV1789 5 8 x 3 1 2 17 mm x 89 mm AV1789 5 8 x 3 1 2 17 mm x 89 mm AV1789 5 8 x 3 1 2 17 mm x 89 mm R Becker ABC Import Export 29 Main St Los Angeles CA 88888 R Becker ABC Import Export 29 Main St Los Angeles CA 88888 Sales Report August Sales Report August Sales Report Overseas Saies Div August Sales Report Overseas Sales Div X o D o o t 109 gt Le Lo D gt 2 Appendix Template text styles gt p 66 Samples of the available template text styl
43. 901 379 1210 fax Automated Faxback 800 521 2846 World Wide Web www brother com Supplies Accessories www brothermall com or 888 879 3232 BROTHER INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION 100 SOMERSET CORPORATE BLVD BRIDGEWATER NEW JERSEY 08807 0911 Please record your model and serial number and your date and location of Purchase below for your records Keep this information with your proof of purchase bill of sale in case your Product requires service Model Serial Date of purchase Store where purchased Location of store Important We recommend that you keep all original packing materials in the event you ship this product Save Time Register On Line Don t stand in line at the post office or worry about lost mail Visit us on line at www registermybrother com Your product will immediately be registered in our database and you can be on your way Also while you re there look for contests and other exciting information Vi Chapter 1 Before You Start Uy D o D S c o e fo Ch 1 Before You Start Top view P touch 9600 P touch 3600 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Tape compartment cover Recharging indicator LCD display Cover release button AC adaptor connector RS 232C port USB port Keyboard Tape compartment cover LCD display Cover release button AC adaptor connector Keyboard Ch 1 Before You Start Bottom view Battery compartment cover
44. Black on White 3 8 9mm Black on White 1 2 12mm 18 99 TZ S241 Black on White 3 4 18mm 21 99 TZ S251 Black on White 1 24mm 25 99 TZ S261 Black on White 11 2 36mm 32 99 TZ S611 Black on Yellow 1 4 6mm 15 99 TZ S621 17 99 TZ S631 Black on Yellow 3 8 9mm Black on Yellow 1 2 12mm 18 99 TZ S641 Black on Yellow 3 4 18mm 21 99 TZ S651 Black on Yellow 1 24mm 25 99 TZ S661 Black on Yellow 11 2 36mm 32 99 TZ S941 Black on Matte Silver 3 4 18mm 25 99 TZ S951 Black on Matte Silver 1 24mm 27 99 TZ S961 Black on Matte Silver 11 2 36mm 35 99 Flexible ID Tapes Special Adhesive for Bending Wrapping amp Flagging TZ FX231 Black on White 1 2 12mm 18 99 TZ FX241 Black on White 3 4 18mm 21 99 TZ FX251 Black on White 1 24mm 25 99 TZ FX261 Black on White 11 2 36mm 32 99 Tamper Evident Tapes Security Pattern Appears If Removed TZ SEA 3 4 18mm Black on White Security tamper evident Tape leaves a checkerboard pattern when removed 29 99 Fabric Iron On Tapes TZ FA3 1 2 12mm Navy Blue on White Fabric Iron on Tape 9 8ft tape length 24 99 Print Head Cleaning Cassette TZ CL6 StockNo 11 2 36mm Print head cassette approx 100uses Descripti
45. Cada uno de los estilos de texto disponibles con la funci n Style1 se puede combinar con cada uno de los estilos disponibles en la funci n Style2 Consulte Style2 Funci n STYLE2 a continuaci n Para cambiar el valor de la funci n Style1 Global Block O Mantenga pulsada y pulse O 4 NOTA Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de formato Pulse O hasta que se visualice STYLE1 El ajuste para el texto en la posici n actual del cursor se muestra en el lado izquierdo de la pantalla y en el lado derecho se puede ver una muestra O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado yg Sj aparece como el ajuste la funci n Style1 ya se ha aplicado a una l nea del bloque de texto actual si se han establecido las funciones Block Format o Global Format o al bloque en el texto actual si se ha establecido la funci n Global Format Si se cambia el ajuste se cancelar el que se aplic previamente Para devolver a la funci n su ajuste predeteminado NORMAL pulse la barra de espacio Para volver al texto sin cambiar el formato pulse O mantenga pulsada y pulse Global Block Line fiy Jol p Pulse Je para aplicar la configuraci n Para aplicar varios ajustes de formato al mismo contin e pulsando para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse tiempo O sd para seleccionar el ajuste que desee Pulse s
46. DD 104 Pre set templates gt p 66 Appendix Samples of the available TZ tape templates are shown below Template Tape Label Name Width Length 1 3 2 24 mm 80 mm 1 a 24 mm 78 mm 1 4 1 24 mm 104 mm 1 1 2 3 4 36 mm 86 mm 1 3 3 T 1 2 7 3 36 mm 186 mm ic 4 0 18mm 102 mm 1 1 2 3 9 36 mm 98 mm 3 4 4 0 18 mm 102 mm ADDRESS 1 ADDRESS 2 ADDRESS 3 ADDRESS 4 WALLPLATE NAMEBADGE 1 NAMEBADGE 2 NAMEBADGE 3 11 2 SALE G6 mam AUTO ABC Import Export 29 Main Street Monterey CA 12345 Tel 012 345 6789 ABC Import Export 29 Main Street Monterey CA 12345 Robert Becker a eee a al ABC Import Export 29 Main Street Monterey CA 12345 Robert Becker ABC Import Export 29 Main Street Monterey CA 12345 Tel 012 345 6789 ABC Import Export Division Il AA 1250205400 4 STUDIO 3 4 Robert Becker ABC ImportExoort ABC Import Export Division Il Robert Becker Robert Becker ABC mport Exoort WINTER SALE 50 OFF Appendix gt v SS M A e Template Name Tape Label compl Width Length HEN CAMERA 1 2 2 PRICE 1 24 mm 57 mm f G G GG T 4 3 CAMERA SALE PRICE 2 24 mm 110 mm 7 G SIGN 11 2 45 D A N G R mem 900 V N Go ABC Import Export Robert Becker qu 2 8 Robert Becker FLOPPY 2 10 12 02 24 mm 70 mm Divisi
47. Deleting text TOR Deleting one line of text 1 4 su Clearing all of the text der gt t Or t to select TEXT amp FORMAT gt y ES S Clearing only the text Clear s RO s pa or to select TEXT ONLY gt Formatting text Changing formats for lo or i or entire text Changing formats for a block of text cl n Or a to select tex block code i 7 gt or to select function gt or to select setting gt es i p e OF 4 to select text line gt code x gt or 5 to select function t or 4 to select setting gt Changing the font code i fe ES or gt or z to select FONT gt or to select setting gt Changing the character code o or gt or to select SIZE or t to select size Changing formats for a line of text setting i the character code F e ori x or 5 to select WIDTH gt or to wiat select setting gt n bal e nun the character f oa z or z or to select STYLE1 or STYLE2 gt style i to select gt sona Changing the line effects 7 e ori lz or to select LINE EFFECTS gt or to select M gt n End Changing the frame code 1 e or or to select FRAME gt to select pon gt Tue Changing the text align Code e or or
48. ES 2 oko instil the printer driver No Para instalar el controlador de la impresora haga clic en Yes Windows XP solamente Aparecer un mensaje inform ndole de que el controlador de impresora ha pasado las pruebas de compatibilidad y que debe hacer clic sobre el bot n Continue Anyway si aparece un mensaje de aviso Haga clic sobre el bot n OK IMPORTANT This printer driver has passed compatibility tests IF your hardware wizard displays a warning message please select Continue Anyway to complete the software installation Aparecer el primer cuadro de di logo de Driver Setup que le permitir seleccionar si la P touch estar conectada en el puerto USB o en el puerto RS 232C Contin e con el procedimiento en Instalaci n del controlador de impresora USB en la p gina 11 Para instalar el controlador de impresora en serie consulte para instalar el controlador de impresora en serie consulte el manual de Funciones avanzadas NOTA Si el controlador de la impresora ya est instalado haga clic en el bot n No Aparecer el cuadro de di logo que informa de que la instalaci n ya ha terminado Seleccione Yes want to restart my computer now S deseo reiniciar mi equipo ahora haga clic en el bot n Finish para reiniciar el PC y extraiga el CD ROM de la unidad de CD ROM Setup Complete Setup has finished copying files to your computer Before you can use
49. Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware Printers has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway STOP Installation Q Haga clic en el bot n Continue Anyway para continuar con la instalaci n Aparecer el cuadro de di logo Found New Hardware Wizard que indicar que este asistente ha terminado la instalaci n del software para la PT 9600 3600 Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for Brother PT 9600 Click Finish to close the wizard O Haga clic en el bot n Finish Aparecer el cuadro de di logo Driver Setup que indica que el controlador de la impresora se ha instalado Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 Brother PT 9600 was correctly added In order for the changes to become effective the computer must be restarted No restart later Click Finish to quit setup Seleccione Yes restart immediately S reiniciar inmediatamente haga clic en el bot n Finish para reiniciar el PC y
50. Ltd Is this registration information correct No Haga clic en el bot n Yes para registrar la informaci n especificada Para cambiar la informaci n de registro haga clic en el bot n No y vuelva al paso Aparecer el cuadro de di logo Choose Destination Location Choose Destination Location x Setup will install P touch Av Editor in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder You can choose notto install P touch AV Editor by clicking Cancel to exit Setup m Destination Folder C Program Files Brother AV Editor Browse a Cancel Q Haga clic en el bot n Next para empezar la instalaci n Para cambiar la ubicaci n donde se va a instalar P touch AV Editor haga clic en el bot n Browse y a continuaci n seleccione la carpeta de instalaci n en el cuadro de di logo Choose Folder que aparecer Haga clic en el bot n OK Cuando P touch AV Editor ya se ha instalado aparece un cuadro de di logo que permite seleccionar d nde se afiadir n los accesos directos de P touch AV Editor Add shortcut xi Startup menu Quick launch bar Cancel Seleccione las ubicaciones que desee para los accesos directos y haga clic en el bot n Next Aparecer un cuadro de di logo que permite seleccionar si se instala el controlador de la impresora Question
51. Quick Editor para eliminar el software P touch Quick Editor o P touch AV Editor para eliminar el software P touch AV Editor y a continuaci n haga clic sobre el bot n Add Remove bot n Change Remove en Windows XP Q Aparecer un mensaje que solicitar si desea borrar la aplicaci n seleccionada Haga clic en el bot n Yes para borrar la aplicaci n NOTA Si no quiere borrar la aplicaci n haga clic en el bot n No Q En el cuadro de di logo que aparecer que indicar que la aplicaci n se ha borrado haga clic en el bot n OK 31 Desinstalaci n del controlador de la Impresora La desinstalaci n el controlador de la impresora PT 9600 3600 desde un PC se describe a continuaci n Para desinstalar el controlador de la Impresora O Apague la P touch 9600 3600 y descon ctela del PC Q Inserte el disco CD ROM que se incluye en la unidad de CD ROM del PC Aparecer autom ticamente un cuadro de di logo que le permitir seleccionar lo que quiera instalar Selectthe components that you wantto install m P touch Editor P touch Editor Ver 3 2 the printer driver and the manual will be installed ay m P touch Quick Editor P touch Quick Editor and the printer driver will be installed m P touch AV Editor P touch AV Editor and the printer driver will be installed m Driver The printer driver will be installed Cancel Si el cuadro de di lo
52. User Settings Macintosh from the Background Color sub menu create the desired color in the dialog box that appears and then click the OK button OZ Viewing the text Layouts that are too long to fit in the screen can be scrolled by clicking the Arrange button f to view the left the center then the right side of the layout with each click of the button NOTE If the label view or text box has been moved away from the tool bar it will be docked before scrolling Printing Before printing labels certain print options can be selected To print a label Click the arrow beside the Print button UN to display a drop down menu Click Print Options The Print dialog box appears O Select the desired print settings Auto Cut This option allows you to select whether or not to automatically cut off the label after it is printed When printing multiple copies of AV labels with the Auto Cut check box selected each label is cut off after it is printed If the Auto Cut check box is cleared the string of labels are cut off only after they have all been printed Mirror Printing for TZ tape only This option allows you to print the text in reverse so that it is perfect for attaching to the inside of windows Copies This option allows you to enter the number of copies to be printed O Windows Click the OK button to start printing Macintosh Click the Print button The lay ou
53. added In order for the changes to become effective the computer must be restarted No restart later Click Finish to quit setup Select Yes restart immediately click the Finish button to restart the computer and then remove the CD ROM from the com puter On a Macintosh Computer The Mac version of the software is for a Macin tosh with an English operating system If the software is installed on a Macintosh with an operating system in a different language the software may not run properly Before installation Check that your system configuration meets the following requirements Computer Macintosh with Power PC processor Operating system Mac OS 8 6 to 9 X or OS X 10 1 to 10 2 3 Hard disk free space At least 20 MB 100 MB for a full installation Up to 100 MB of hard disk free space may be needed when printing long labels or large amounts of data Ch 2 Getting Started Memory At least 32 MB Q USB port installed as standard equipment CD ROM drive Double click the P touch Editor 3 2 Installer icon in the folder that appears The installer starts up RHR RTH RHE RH HHH HR i 2 Installing the P touch Editor 3 2 soft ware touch Editor 3 EE TE HE HE E HE AE HE ARTA RRR RH H P touch Editor is an application that gives u a variety of designing possibilities for creating labels and stamps Installation Start up the installer and then follow the The P touch Editor 3
54. alineaci n O Seleccione en Text Properties los forma tos de texto deseados ABCIMPORTEXPORT lt DD gt KE m BR R Becker i S AV li 29 South Main St i 99 9 Los Angeles CA 89899 AN j E AV i ae AV1957 Return Address ML dr d Z adar hs u sls Para imprimir Antes de imprimir etiquetas AV se pueden selec cionar varias opciones de impresi n O Haga clic sobre la flecha al lado de Ed bot n de impresi n para visualizar un men desplegable Haga clic sobre Print Options Aparecer el cuadro de di logo Print O Seleccione los ajustes de impresi n deseados Auto Cut Esta opci n le permite seleccio nar si quiere o no cortar autom ticamente la etiqueta despu s de imprimirla Cuando imprima m ltiples copias de etiquetas AV con la casilla Auto Cut marcada se cortar cada etiqueta despu s de imprimirse Si la casilla Auto Cut no est marcada se cortar una tira de etiquetas solamente despu s de haberse impreso todas ellas Mirror Printing Esta opci n le permite imprimir texto en reverso lo cual resulta per fecto para colocarlo en ventanas por dentro Copies Esta opci n le permite introducir el n mero de copias a imprimir O Haga clic sobre el bot n OK empezar a imprimir CLONE x Options Iv Auto Cut I Mirror Printing para m Copies Number omen Si quiere empezar a imprimir sin cambiar las opciones de impresi n simp
55. and then release the key when the desired setting is displayed t The tape length is displayed in the currently selected unit of measurement inches or centi meters The unit of measurement can be changed with the Setup functions Refer to page 80 t To return to the text without changing the for matting press OR hold down and press O Press to apply the setting To apply several format settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function then pressing 1 or to select the desired setting only after the necessary functions have Press r Block been set Block Margin function B MARGIN The width of the margins between text blocks can be set between 0 00 and 12 00 0 0 cm and 30 0 cm The left and right margins for each text block will have a width that is the specified setting If the AUTO setting is selected the block margins will be 0 00 0 0 cm if only one text block has been created and 0 13 0 3 cm if multiple text blocks have been created To change the setting for the Block Margin function Global Hold down and press This step may be skipped if settings for several for mat functions are being applied at the same time O Press or until B MARGIN is dis played The current setting is shown on the left side of the display 63 Ch 3 Functions 11 13 4 B MARGIN GS AUTO AUTO 1 10 HELSINKI Length Margin Font Width Size
56. contin e con el procedimiento nstalaci n del software P touch Quick Editor de la p gina 7 x Welcome to the P touch Quick Editor Setup program Y This program will install Ptouch Quick Editor on your computer Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Nextto continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law Lea atentamente el contenido del cuadro de di logo de bienvenida y haga clic en el bot n Next para continuar Aparecer el cuadro de di logo User Information User Information E x Type your name below You must also type the name ofthe company you work for Company Brother Co Ltd caa owes Escriba la informaci n requerida en las casillas correspondientes si la informaci n ya se ha registrado en Windows aparecer autom ticamente y haga clic en el bot n Next Aparecer un cuadro de di logo que solicitar confirmaci n de la informaci n que ha especificado Registration Confirmation E Y ou have provided the following registration information Name M Smith Company Brother Co
57. de cinta y eliminar lo que sobre Conexi n de P touch a un PC Esta m quina est equipada con un puerto USB lo cual permite usar un cable USB para conectar la P touch a un PC que ejecute Windows o Mac OS e imprimir etiquetas creadas mediante el software Editor de la P touch No conecte la P touch al PC antes de instalar el software P touch Editor porque no se instalar a correctamente Siga el procedimiento de instalaci n de p ginas 3 hasta 23 para instalar el software P touch Editor y el controlador de la impresora y conecte la P touch al PC cuando se le indique que lo haga Para conectar un PC a la P touch mediante el puerto USB O Inserte el conector plano A del cable USB en el puerto USB del PC O Inserte el conector cuadrado B del cable USB en el puerto USB situado en el lado derecho de la P touch Encienda la P touch Despu s de conectar la P touch al PC mediante el cable USB la P touch entra en modo Interface cuando se le env an datos desde el PC ts Para salir del modo Interface con una conexi n USB y volver al texto pulse cualquier tecla t La P touch no puede entrar en el modo Interface con una conexi n USB mientras est imprimiendo alimentando la cinta o en modo Interface con una conexi n RS 232C s lo PT 9600 o mientras se asigna una macro a una tecla PF s lo PT 9600 Instalaci n del software y el controlador de la impresora e 0o0000000000000090909 09009
58. de disco duro disponible para empezar la instalaci n Para instalar todas las opciones son necesarias unas 100 MB de espacio de disco duro disponible Si hay suficiente espacio de disco duro disponible haga clic en el bot n Install O Para una instalaci n personalizada Si se hace clic en el bot n Custom Install se visualiza un cuadro de di logo que permite seleccionar las opciones que se van a instalar EE TE EE HE HE HE HE HE HE FE RTT RRR H RH LLLI P touch Editor 3 2 EE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE FE HE HE HE HE FE HE HE E HE RH RH RT P touch Editor is an application that gives you a variety of designing possibilities for P touch Editor 3 2 M PT 9600 Driver creating labels and stamps MM Fonts Installation Y Auto Format Templates Z Clip Art Start up the installer and then follow the messages that appear Install on System Requirements Computer Macintosh Power Macintosh or iMac E Macintosh HD Installation requires 189 5 MB Available on volume 1131 5 MB tec Operating system Mac OS 8 6 or later Available memory Minimum 32MB Available hard disk space Minimum 20MB This software is only compatible with Mac OS X classic Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc S lo se instalar n las opciones con una marca de verificaci n Seleccione las opciones que desee instalar y haga clic en el bot n Install Para poder imprimir desde la P touch
59. de historial de texto Bot n de s mbolos l Bot n de salir Vista de etiqueta Propiedades de texto Bot n de etiquetas de direcciones AV2067 Bot n de etiquetas de direcciones de remitente AV1957 Bot n de etiquetas para carpetas de archivos AV1789 Tama o de etiqueta actual 29 Selecci n de un tama o de etiqueta AV Con el P touch AV Editor hay disponibles tres formatos de etiquetas AV predefinidos para crear etiquetas de direc ciones AV2067 etiquetas de direcciones de remitente AV1957 y etiquetas para carpetas de archivos AV1789 O Haga clic sobre el bot n para elegir el tama o de etiqueta deseado La visualizaci n de la etiqueta cambiar al formato correspondiente al tama o selec cionado E E 9S E av AV1957 Return Address Ed x ade Para afiadir un s mbolo Se puede a adir un s mbolo en el lado izquierdo de la etiqueta de entre las distintas fuentes s mbolos instaladas O Haga clic sobre k bot n de s mbolos Aparecer el cuadro de di logo Input Symbol Symbol Font Symbol List En la lista Symbol Font seleccione la fuente de s mbolos deseada Q En la visualizaci n de Symbol list selec cione el s mbolo deseado O Haga clic sobre el bot n OK El s mbolo selec cionado ser afiadido a la izquierda del texto NOTA Si ya ha sido afiadido un s mbolo al texto ese s mbolo ser reemplazado con el nuevo s mbolo selec
60. de pa o situado entre la etiqueta y la plancha Puesto que la etiqueta transferida no se puede extraer cuando ya se ha aplicado realice todas las transferencias con cuidado Lavado Las prendas con etiquetas transferidas se pueden lavar m s de 20 veces si la etiqueta se ha transferido correctamente Se pueden usar detergentes de uso dom stico normales biol gicos y no biol gicos La etiqueta puede decolorarse si la prenda se pone en lej a durante mucho tiempo Durante el lavado procure que los objetos duros como hebillas o botones no entren en contacto con la etiqueta No lave en seco la prenda en la que se han aplicado etiquetas transferidas Secado La prenda con etiquetas transferidas se puede secar desde dentro o desde fuera No utilice secadora Las etiquetas transferidas se despegar n y se enganchar n en otras prendas Planchado Planche las prendas con etiquetas transferidas con un ajuste de temperatura normal Sit e un trozo de tela entre la plancha y la etiqueta para evitar que se pegue a la plancha Las etiquetas no son t xicas sin embargo mantenga las precauciones habituales como no met rselas en la boca etc Cinta de tela La cinta de tela se utiliza para fijar mediante la plancha un trozo de tela impresa con un texto en las prendas Despu s de imprimir el texto en la cinta de tela y recortar la etiqueta mediante unas tijeras sit e la etiqueta sobre la prenda planchada en el lugar don
61. donde desee a adir el car cter especial O Pulse zz Pulse 4 0 hasta que se visualice el car cter especial que desee a adir Pulse a El caracter especial seleccionado se a ade a los datos del c digo de barras Para salir de la funci n Barcode sin a adir un c digo de barras O pulse en cualquier momento mantenga pulsada y pulse sz Para a adir el c digo de barras al texto D Pulse J Para borrar un c digo de barras desplace el cursor detr s de la marca del c digo de barras IIl o debajo de la mitad derecha de la marca y pulse Clear O desplace el cursor debajo de una de las mitades de la marca del c digo de barras IIl y Line Out pulse Cuando aparezca el mensaje OK TO J CLEAR lll pulse Para volver al texto sin eliminar el c digo de barras pulse cx Edici n de texto Backspace Tecla Us La tecla Backspace a permite suprimir los caracteres a la izquierda de la posici n actual del cursor Es diferente de la tecla de cursor izquierda 7 que s lo mueve el cursor sin borrar los caracteres NOTA Si el cursor es al principio de una l nea o bloque Clear cuando se pulsa s la l nea o el bloque de texto actuales se unen al anterior Para suprimir un car cter O Pulse O para situar el cursor debajo del car cter inmediatamente a la derecha del car cter que desee borrar Pulse una vez Y End 4
62. el disco duro Memoria Como m nimo 64 MB Monitor VGA o tarjeta de gr ficos superior Puerto USB Unidad de CD ROM Instalaci n de P touch Editor 3 2 software El software P touch Editor 3 2 incluye varias funciones m s complejas para imprimir c digos de barras e im genes lo cual le permitir dise ar cualquier etiqueta que pueda imaginar Instale el software P touch Editor 3 2 en el PC como se describe a continuaci n No conecte la P touch al PC antes de instalar el software de lo contrario ste podr a no instalarse correctamente Conecte la P touch s lo cuando se le solicite que lo haga Para instalar el software P touch Editor 3 2 O Inserte el disco CD ROM que se incluye en la unidad de CD ROM del PC Aparecer autom ticamente un cuadro de di logo que le permitir seleccionar lo que quiera instalar Selectthe components that you wantto install m P touch Editor P touch Editor Ver 3 2 the printer driver and the manual will be installed m P touch Quick Editor P touch Quick Editor and the printer driver will be installed r P touch AV Editor P touch AV Editor and the printer driver will be installed m Driver The printer driver will be installed Cancel Si el cuadro de di logo no aparece autom ticamente haga doble clic en My Computer Mi PC en el escritorio y despu s haga doble clic en la unidad de CD ROM que contiene el CD ROM Para
63. el formato pulse Block O mantenga pulsada y pulse Funciones de formato Line code 8 Las funciones de Line Format le permiten destacar una sola l nea del texto al imprimirla con un ajuste de Font Size Width Style1 Style2 Line Effects subrayado tachado Frame o Text Alignment que es diferente del resto del texto S lo se puede seleccionar el ajuste de marco cuadrado 1 para la funci n Frame en el formato de l nea Robert Becker ABCImport Export Division II Para cambiar las funciones de Line Format O Pulses 2 O t para situar el cursor en la l nea que tendr un formato diferente Mantenga pulsada y pulse Seleccione FONT SIZE WIDTH STYLE1 STYLE2 LINE EFFECTS FRAME o ALIGNMENT y el ajuste que desee como se describe en las p ginas 45 a 51 El ajuste seleccionado s lo se aplicar a la l nea de texto en la que el cursor est situado 4 Home Para volver al texto sin cambiar el formato pulse Line O mantenga pulsada y pulse Font Funci n FONT Con la funci n Font podr cambiar la fuente del texto a otra de las muchas que se encuentran disponibles La fuente del texto en la posici n actual del cursor se muestra en la parte inferior de la pantalla Letter Gothic L GOTHIC es una fuente M ae fijo todos los caracteres utilizan una cantidad fija de espacio a diferencia de todas las dem s fuentes que son proporcionales los
64. en la funci n Auto Format O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el Pulse O hasta que Y se desplace junto a RECALL Q Pulse Aparecer la pantalla RECALL en el visor con el n mero de archivo actualmente seleccionado Para salir de la funci n Recall sin recuperar el texto pulse O mantenga pulsada y Memory pulse 3 O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el n mero de archivo que contenga el texto que desea recuperar El nombre del archivo se muestra junto al n mero de archivo y el texto almacenado en el n mero de archivo seleccionado se muestra en la parte inferior de la pantalla t Para ver otras partes del archivo de texto seleccionado pulse o t Los archivos de plantilla Auto Format con la misma anchura de cinta se visualizan agrupados Q Pulse El texto que se haya escrito previamente desaparece de la pantalla y se muestra el texto almacenado bajo el n mero de archivo seleccionado 62 n mero de archivo que contenga el texto que desea borrar El nombre de archivo se muestra junto al n mero de archivo y el texto almacenado bajo el n mero de archivo seleccionado se muestra en la l nea inferior t Para ver otras partes del archivo de texto seleccionado pulse 7 o Los archivos de plantilla Auto Format con la misma anchura de cinta se visualizan agrupados Pulse la barra de espacio para que Y aparezca a la derecha del nombre de archivo Repita los pasos Q y
65. entered and formatted for AV labels Install the P touch AV Editor software onto a PC as described below Do not connect the P touch to the computer before installing the software otherwise it may not be installed correctly Be sure to connect the P touch only when you are instructed to do so To install the P touch AV Editor software O Insert the enclosed CD ROM into the com puter s CD ROM drive A dialog box auto matically appears allowing you to select what to install Selectthe components that you wantto install m P touch Editor P touch Editor Ver 3 2 the printer driver and the manual will PT be installed E m P touch Quick Editor P touch Quick Editor and the printer driver will be installed P m P touch AV Editor P touch AV Editor and the printer driver will be installed Driver The printer driver will be installed If the dialog box does not automatically appear double click My Computer on the desktop and then double click the CD ROM drive containing the CD ROM For Windows XP click My Com puter in the Start menu and then double click the CD ROM drive containing the CD ROM Next double click Setup exe to display the dialog box Click the third button from the top P touch AV Editor The InstallShield wizard for installing the P touch AV Editor software starts up and then the Welcome dialog box appears Welcome xi Welcom
66. etiqueta de la sesi n actual No obstante si se selecciona el ajuste Auto Cut para la impresi n en cadena la ltima etiqueta de la sesi n anterior permanece en la m quina no se alimenta de manera que la etiqueta siguiente se imprimir sin perder ning n trozo de cinta 58 A Cut Cuando se imprima la ltima etiqueta pulse para alimentar la cadena de etiquetas y cortarla Cuando se seleccionan los ajustes 1 2 3 o 4 se activar el indicador Auto Cut en la esquina superior derecha de la pantalla para indicar que las etiquetas se cortar n despu s de que se imprima la ltima etiqueta de la cadena t as etiquetas AV siempre se cortan despu s de la impresi n independientemente del ajuste Auto Cut actual t Si se seleccionan los ajustes 5 6 7 o 8 el indicador Auto Cut no aparecer Est n disponible los ajustes siguientes de Auto Cut 1 um los dos cortes completo y la medio sin impresi n en cadena 2 0 480 ABc s lo cortes completos X E sin medios cortes y sin impresi n en cadena 3 ABC ABC s lo medios cortes sin A cortes completos y sin impresi n en cadena 4 ABC ABC E sin cortes completos medios ni impresi n en cadena 5 cortes completos medios e impresi n en cadena 6 cortes completos e impresi n en cadena sin medios cortes E 7 ABC o medios cortes e impresi n en cadena sin cortes completos 8 ABC mEn impresi n en cad
67. exit Caps mode by pressing c When the P touch is in Caps mode the Caps indicator on the left side of the display comes on t When a number key is pressed while the P touch is in Caps mode the number not the symbol above it is typed in unless Or is held down t To type lowercase letters while the P touch is in Caps mode hold down or while press ing the key of the desired character To type in many uppercase letters O Press The Caps indicator comes on I lt lt lt P touch gt gt gt i AUTO 1 10 Length Margin Font HELSINKI A Width Size gt o Q Press the keys for the desired letters or sym bols NOTE To exit Caps mode at any time press The Caps indicator goes off Alt mode an Accented characters or special punctuation marks on the right hand side of the keys can be added to the text using the Alt mode Enter or exit Alt mode by pressing The Alt indica tor on the left side of the display comes on while is held down To add an accented character or a special punctuation mark written in color to the text O Hold down a The Alt indicator comes on lt lt lt P touch gt gt gt E AUTO 1 10 Length Margin Font HELSINKI A Width Size gt c 4 o Q Press the key for the desired character NOTE To exit Alt mode at any time release m The Alt indicator goes off Return key C Like on a typewriter or w
68. explica en el paso y mantenga pulsada mientras pulsa x Pulse y despu s de seleccionar el ltimo car cter acentuado de la serie Barcode Tecla cose rer La funci n Barcode que permite que los c digos de barras se impriman como parte de las etiquetas es una de las opciones m s avanzadas de esta m quina L 30 mm D5mm x1234x t Esta secci n explicar c mo se introduce un c digo de barras en el texto No pretende ser una introducci n exhaustiva al concepto de c digo de barras Para obtener informaci n m s detallada consulte uno de los muchos libros de consulta disponibles Como esta m quina no se ha dise ado espec ficamente para la creaci n de etiquetas de c digos de barras especiales algunos lectores de c digo de barras quiz no puedan leer las etiquetas Los c digos de barras deben imprimirse en etiquetas blancas con tinta negra Los distintos par metros de c digo de barras le permitir n crear c digos de barras m s personalizados Par metro CODE 39 1 2 5 EAN13 EAN8 UPC A UPC E COVER EAN128 CODE128 PROTOCOL WIDTH anchura de la barra LARGE MEDIUM SMALL EXTRA SMALL UNDER los n meros se imprimen debajo del c digo de barras CHECK DIGIT OFF ON 42 Los valores predeterminados son CODE 39 PROTOCOL MEDIUM WIDTH UNDER establecido en ON y CHECK DIGIT establecido en OFF t Se recomienda imprimir los
69. extraiga el CD ROM del PC En un PC Macintosh La versi n Mac del software es para un Mac con sistema operativo en ingl s Si el software se instala en un Mac con un sistema operativo en un idioma diferente al ingl s el software podr a no funcionar correctamente Antes de la instalaci n Compruebe que la configuraci n de su sistema satisface los siguientes requisitos PC Macintosh con procesador Power PC Sistema operativo Mac OS 8 6 a 9 X u OS X 10 1a 10 2 3 Espacio libre en el disco duro Como m nimo 20 MB 100 MB para una instalaci n completa Cuando se impriman etiquetas largas o grandes cantidades de datos podr n requerirse hasta 100 MB de espacio libre en el disco duro 15 Memoria Como m nimo 32 MB Puerto USB instalado como equipo de f brica Unidad de CD ROM Instalaci n del software P touch Editor 3 2 El software P touch Editor 3 2 incluye varias funciones m s complejas para imprimir c digos de barras e im genes lo cual le permitir dise ar cualquier etiqueta que pueda imaginar Instale el software P touch Editor 3 2 en un Macintosh como se indica a continuaci n Para instalar el software P touch Editor 3 2 Con un Mac OS anterior a OS X O Con la P touch y el Macintosh apagados conecte la P touch al PC mediante el cable de interfaz USB que se incluye como se describe en la p gina 3 Deje la P touch apagada Encienda el Macintosh Inserte el disco CD ROM que se incluye en
70. hasta el principio de la l nea Para desplazar el cursor varias l neas arriba O Mantenga pulsada hasta que el cursor se mueva a la posici n que desee 37 Para desplazar el cursor al principio de todo el texto e Mantenga pulsada y pulse fr tecla de flecha abajo Para desplazar el cursor hasta la l nea siguiente e Pulse una vez Si se pulsa la tecla cuando el cursor est en la ltima l nea de texto el cursor se mueve hasta el final de la l nea Para desplazar el cursor varias l neas hacia abajo e Mantenga pulsada hasta que el cursor se mueva a la posici n que desee Para desplazar el cursor hasta el final de todo el texto e Mantenga pulsada y pulse Tecla Code code Para utilizar una funci n impresa en color o en una tecla e Mantenga pulsada y pulse la tecla de la funci n deseada Tecla Return zh La tecla de retorno se puede usar para seleccionar una opci n en una lista por ejemplo cuando se a ade un s mbolo o un car cter acentuado al texto o para aplicar el ajuste seleccionado En la pantalla LCD pueden aparecer preguntas que solicitar n que confirme un comando especialmente cuando la funci n seleccionada vaya a borrar o afectar a los archivos En esos casos pulsar es como contestar si 38 Para responder no pulse ane Consulte tecla Cancel a continuaci n Para seleccionar una opci n en una lista o para apli
71. hasta que Y aparezca a la derecha de todos los archivos que quiera borrar Los archivos marcados con V se borrar n ts Si tiene que suprimir varios archivos siga los pasos y para marcarlos con Y Si s lo va a suprimir un archivo puede omitir los pasos 9 y O Para seleccionar todos los archivos de la memoria mantenga pulsada y pulse la barra de espacio Para quitar un archivo del grupo de los que se van a borrar seleccione el archivo y a continuaci n pulse la barra de espacio para quitar Y que aparece a la derecha del nombre de archivo Pulse ae Aparecera el mensaje OK TO CLEAR NOTA Si se han seleccionado todos los archivos almacenados aparecer el mensaje CLEAR ALL Q Pulse de El texto almacenado en los n meros de archivo seleccionados se borra NOTA Para retroceder y seleccionar otros archivos que se quieran borrar pulse cance Impresi n del texto almacenado y plantillas de Auto Format Puede imprimir inmediatamente varios textos o plantillas de Auto Format almacenados sin necesidad de recuperarlos primero Para imprimir los archivos de texto almacenados Memory O Mantenga pulsada y pulse 5j Aparecer la pantalla MEMORY Pulse O hasta que Y se desplace junto a PRINT Q Pulse La pantalla PRINT aparece en el visor con el n mero de archivo actualmente seleccionado NOTA Para salir de la funci n Memory Print sin imprimir el texto pulse O manteng
72. icon in the folder that appears The installer starts up and then a dialog box appears stating that the administrator password is required in order to install software Authorization You need an Administrator password to install the software C Click the lock to make changes Click 8 The Authenticate dialog box appears Install PT 9600 Driver Authorization You need an Administrator password to install the software Authenticate You need an administrator name and password or phrase to make changes in Installer Name user Password or phrase fr caps lock on Cancel Fox gt fi Click the lock to make changes Type the administrator name and password into the appropriate boxes and then click the OK button The Introduction dialog box appears e Install PT 9600 Driver Welcome to the PT 9600 Driver Installer Int ti e racar ian Welcome to the Brother PT 9600 Driver Installation Program You will be guided through the steps necessary to install this software Y er oran Continue Click the Continue button A dialog box describing the system requirements appears NOTE When the Continue button is pressed a message may appear warning that an older version of the printer driver is installed Be sure to uninstall the older version of the printer driver before try ing to install the new driver For details on uninstalling the
73. immediately wash it with fresh water for several minutes and consult a doctor Keep ink off skin clothes and important papers Immediately use soap to wash skin that has come in contact with ink Even washing may not remove all ink Q With the glossy side of the stamp film facing up align one end of the stamp film with the slit in the side of the stamp holder 39 E jmd E a jmd dp O em E O Ch 2 Getting Started Glossy side Q Hold the end of the stamp film in place with your thumb and then pass the stamp film through the guides while pulling it tight O Insert the stamp holder straight into the cap Q D y gt lo o mes Q m 1 ol t Be sure that the cap correctly covers the stamp in order to prevent ink spills t When the stamp is not being used firmly cover it with the cap and always store it standing up with the stamp facing downward Do not leave the stamp laying on its side or leaning Store stamp film holders and stamp film cas settes in a location where they are not exposed to high temperatures high humidity or direct sunlight Fold the other end of the stamp film over DEEP the other side of the stamp holder and hold Attaching the identification label it in place with your finger O Insert a TZ tape cassette into the tape com partment Guides Use 1 2 12 mm wide tape to make an identifica tion label for an M size stamp and use 3
74. impresora USB en la p gina 11 Para instalar el controlador de impresora en serie consulte para instalar el controlador de impresora en serie consulte el manual de Funciones avanzadas Driver will be installed Selecttype of connection cable Connection Cable Ne Serial cable gt 10101 e C USB cable e X Para instalar el software P touch Editor 3 2 haga clic en el bot n superior P touch Editor Contin e con el procedimiento en nstalaci n de P touch Editor 3 2 software en la p gina 4 Welcome i xi Welcome to the P touch Editor Setup program This program will install P touch Editor on your computer Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Nextto continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law E Cancel Para instalar el software P touch AV Editor haga clic sobre el tercer bot n desde la parte superior P touch AV Editor Contin e con el procedimiento Instalaci n del software P touch AV Editor de la p gina 9 Welcome xi Welcome to the P touch AV Editor Setup program Thi
75. labels are printed certain printing options can be selected O Click the arrow beside fF E Print button to display a drop down menu Click Print Options The Print dialog box appears Q Select the desired print settings Auto Cut This option allows you to select whether or not to automatically cut off the label after it is printed When printing multiple copies of AV labels with the Auto Cut check box selected each label is cut off after it is printed If the Auto Cut check box is cleared the string of labels are cut off only after they have all been printed Mirror Printing This option allows you to print the text in reverse so that it is perfect for attacing to the inside of windows Copies This option allows you to enter the number of copies to be printed O Click the OK button to start printing Options Mirror Printing Copies Number If you want to start printing without changing the print options simply click Ed Print button or click the arrow beside the Print button and click Print Quitting P touch AV Editor Do either of the following O Click the Exit button O Right click in the P touch AV Editor win dow and then click Exit in the menu that appears Ch 2 Getting Started Uninstalling the Software amp Printer Driver eee eoeoeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeee i On a Computer Running Win dows Uninstalling the software Uninstall the P touch Edit
76. las funciones necesarias Para cambiar el ajuste LANGUAGE La funci n LANGUAGE le permite seleccionar si los men s ajustes y mensajes aparecer n en ingl s o en franc s O Mantenga pulsada y pulse Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de Configuraci n Pulse O hasta que se visualice LANGUAGE 65 O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado Para devolver el valor predeterminado a la funci n ENGLISH pulse la barra de espacio Pulse al para aplicar la configuraci n Para aplicar varios ajustes de Configuraci n al mismo tiempo contin e pulsando O para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse fs o para seleccionar el ajuste que se desee Pulse He s lo despu s de configurar las funciones necesarias Para cambiar el ajuste CONTRAST La funci n CONTRAST le permite ver la pantalla LCD m s clara o m s oscura O Mantenga pulsada y pulse Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios funciones de Configuraci n Pulse O hasta que se visualice CONTRAST O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado ajustes de NOTA Para devolver el valor predeterminado a la funci n 0 pulse la barra de espacio Pulse e para aplicar la configuraci n Para aplicar varios ajustes de Configuraci n al mismo tiempo contin e pulsando O para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci
77. mode in other words the text that you type is inserted into any existing text at the cursor s position However by exiting Insert mode the text that you type replaces any existing text at the cur sor s position When the P touch is in Insert mode the Ins indicator on the left side of the display comes on To enter Insert mode e Press car The Ins indicator comes on lt lt lt P touch gt gt gt gt s La AUTO 1 10 HELSINKI A Length Margin Font Width Size gt 4 o To exit Insert mode e Press 5 The Ins indicator goes off Space bar The space bar lets you add blank spaces between characters in your text It is different from the right arrow key gt which just moves the cursor without adding blank spaces To add a blank space to the text Press the space bar Shift key sn or Lowercase letters can entered simply pressing their keys However like on a typewriter or a computer to enter uppercase letters or the sym bols in the top half of certain keys the Shift key should be pressed 46 NOTE If the P touch is in Caps mode holding down or while pressing a letter key will enter a lower case letter To type a capital letter or a symbol printed on the top half of certain keys e Hold down or and press the key of the desired letter or symbol Caps key cs Caps mode allows you to type uppercase letters continuously without holding down or d Enter or
78. n Numbering cow La funci n Numbering se puede usar para imprimir copias del mismo texto incrementando determinados caracteres letras n meros o datos del c digo de barras cuando se imprime cada etiqueta Este tipo de incremento autom tico es muy til cuando se imprimen etiquetas de n mero de serie de control de producci n u otras etiquetas que necesitan c digos que vayan aumentando Las letras y los n meros aumentan como se muestra a continuaci n 02 1 gt 9 gt 0 gt A gt B gt 7 gt A gt a gt b gt z gt a AO gt A12 A9 gt BO 2 Los espacios que se muestran como _ de subrayado en los ejemplos siguientes se usan para ajustar el espacio entre los caracteres o para controlar el n mero de d gitos que se imprime Z A 2Z2 gt A gt 9 gt 10 gt 99 gt 0 gt 199 20 gt 99 gt 0 gt gt t En cada texto s lo se puede seleccionar un campo de numeraci n Si se incluyen caracteres que no son alfanum ricos en el campo de numeraci n como un s mbolo s lo se incrementar n las letras y los n meros cuando se impriman las etiquetas o s lo se imprimir una etiqueta si el campo s lo contiene un car cter que no es alfanum rico Si se selecciona un c digo de barras en el campo de numeraci n s lo se incrementar n los n meros de los datos del c digo Para imprimir las etiquetas mediante la funci n Numbering Number Mantenga pulsada y
79. n del controlador de impresora USB en la p gina 11 Para instalar el controlador de impresora en serie consulte para instalar el controlador de impresora en serie consulte el manual de Funciones avanzadas NOTA Si el controlador de la impresora ya est instalado haga clic en el bot n No Q Cuando se ha terminado la instalaci n del P touch Editor aparecer un cuadro de di logo que le permitir actualizar el P touch Editor 3 2 para que sea compatible con Access 2000 A 9 Update P touch Editor so that it is compatible with Access 2000 2 Click Yes to make P touch Editor compatible with Access 2000 Click No to leave P touch Editor compatible with Access 97 Para actualizar el P touch Editor 3 2 para Access 2000 haga clic en el bot n Yes y siga las instrucciones Si no quiere actualizar el P touch Editor 3 2 para Access 2000 haga clic en el bot n No Si aparece un cuadro de di logo que indica que la instalaci n ha terminado y explica que debe reiniciar el PC seleccione la opci n de reiniciar el PC haga clic en el bot n Finish para reiniciar y extraiga el CD ROM del PC Instalaci n del software P touch Quick Editor El software P touch Quick Editor ofrece un acceso r pido a las opciones de dise o de etiquetas m s sencillas para facilitar la introducci n de los textos y la impresi n instant nea de las etiquetas Instale el software P touch Quick Editor en el PC como se describe a con
80. o Operating system Mac OS 8 6 or later Available on volume 1076 1 MB SSS c Available hard disk space Minimum 30MB D This software is only compatible with RER EHE 1 With the P touch and the Macintosh turned pple and Macintosh are registered AA off connect the P touch to the computer using the enclosed USB interface cable as Q Select the installation method described on page 9 Be sure to leave the O For a basic installation P touch turned off Clicking the Install button immediately amp Turn on the Macintosh starts installing the most basic options O Insert the enclosed CD ROM into the com puter s CD ROM drive eo0 P touch wis M T w A Back View d Computer Home Favorites Applications About 20 MB of available hard disk space is needed to begin installation If enough hard disk space is available click the Install button e 4 Mac OS 9 Mac OS X O For a custom installation Clicking the Custom Install button dis plays a dialog box that allows you to select which options to install FE EE TE HE HE TE AAA RARA RAR HH eT TT P touch Quick Editor FERRE RRR RRR RH RH ET P touch Quick Editor is an application that P touch Quick Editor allows you to create labels quickly and i easily 4 PT 9600 Driver Installation Start up the installer and then follow the messages that appear Install on System Requirements Computer Macintosh Power Macintosh or iMac Q Double click the
81. only with protocols CODE39 or CODE1 28 Press or until the cursor is below the character immediately to the right of where you want to add the special character O Press sm 01 02 gt SYMBOL 1 C3 xx Length Margin Font Width Size 9 Press Or until the special character that you want to add is displayed NOTE Refer to page 99 for tables of the special characters that are available Press ZR The selected special character is added to the barcode data t To quit the Barcode function without adding a barcode OR press at any time hold down and press ps To add the barcode to the text D Press m To delete a barcode move the cursor either imme diately after the barcode mark Ill or below the right half of the mark and press OR move the cursor below either half of the barcode mark III and press E When the message OK TO CLEAR III appears press gt To return to the text with out deleting the barcode press canci Editing text Backspace key es Clea The backspace key s allows you to remove characters to the left of the cursor s current posi tion It differs from the left cursor key which only moves the cursor without deleting any characters If the cursor is at the beginning of a line or a block when is pressed the current text line or block is joined with the previous one To remove one character O Press 2 or to posi
82. post office or worry about lost mail Visit us on line at www registermybrother com Your product will immediately be registered in our database and you can be on your way Also while you re there look for contests and other exciting information 120 P TOUCH ACCESSORY ORDER FORM tor usa only Dear Customer This order form is provided for your convenience should your retailer not stock the item s needed To order by mail send this completed form along with proper payment to the address below OR credit card holders call toll free 1 888 879 3232 fax completed order form to 1 800 947 1445 or visit our web site at http www brothermall com Please refer to the Accessories listing in your User s Guide for stock no and price To complete the Order Form k 2 3 Review the reverse side of this form and select the desired items Complete the form above indicating the quantity of each item Total the columns and enter the total on the Supply Accessory Subtotal line Add the appropriate Sales Tax and Shipping Handling Charge Clearly print your name and address in the space below Place your order a Call toll free anytime 1 888 879 3232 b Order on line at www brothermall com c Fax completed form to 1 800 947 1445 d Mail completed form along with proper payment to BROTHER INTERNATIONAL CORP Attn Consumer Accessory Div P O Box 341332 Bartlett TN 38184 1332 Supply Accessory Sub
83. press OR hold down and Global Block Line press ori O Press to apply the setting To apply several format settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function then pressing or to select the desired setting Only after the necessary functions have Press been set 57 Ch 3 Functions Style2 function STYLE2 Two more text styles are available with the Style2 function ITALIC and VERTICAL Either of these styles can be combined with each of the text styles available with the Stylel function See Style1 function STYLE1 on page 57 For samples of the available style settings refer to page 102 The style indicators at the top of the display show the style of the text at the cursor s current position when any setting other than NORMAL is selected lt lt lt P touch gt gt gt Gi AUTO 1 10 Length Margin Font HELSINKI A Width Size gt o The VERTICAL style setting which rotates each character 90 counterclockwise and prints the text vertically along the length of the label is different from the Text Rotation function page 61 which rotates each text block 90 counterclockwise and prints the text horizon tally along the length of the label To change the setting for the Style2 function Global Block Line Hold down and press jor NOTE This step may be skipped if settings for several for mat functions a
84. se pueden imprimir Anchura de la cinta 1 4 pulgadas 3 8 pulgadas 1 2 pulgadas 3 4 pulgadas 1 pulgada 1 1 2 pulgadas 36 mm Sello 3 4 pulgadas 18 mm Sello 1 de pulgada 24 mm 40 Para etiquetas AV M ximo n mero de l neas que se pueden imprimir Tama os de etiquetas Etiquetas de direcciones AV 20067 3 4 de pulgada x 2 5 8 pulgadas 20 mm x 67 mm Etiquetas de direcciones de remitente AV1957 3 4 de pulgada x 2 1 4 pulgadas 19 mm x 57 mm Etiquetas de carpetas de archivos AV1789 5 8 de pulgada x 3 1 2 pulgadas 17 mm x 89 mm Para crear una l nea nueva e Pulse es La marca de retorno 41 aparece al final de la l nea New Block Funci n cos J Para que una secci n del texto tenga un n mero de l neas diferente que otras secciones del texto o para aplicar un formato diferente a una secci n del texto consulte Funciones de formato de bloque en la p gina 45 se tiene que crear un bloque de texto nuevo mediante la funci n New Block t Una etiqueta s lo puede contener un m ximo de cincuenta bloques de texto Si ya se ha introducido el n mero m ximo de bloques de texto cuando se mantiene pulsada y se pulsa dEl aparece el mensaje de error 50 LINE LIMIT REACHED Para dividir un bloque de texto en dos sit e el cursor debajo del car cter que quiere que empiece el bloque siguiente y a continuaci n mantenga pulsada y pulse 1s Para crear un
85. solamente Con todas estas tres aplicaciones habr que instalar tambi n el controlador de impresora para poder imprimir etiquetas desde la P touch 2600 2610 O Pulse el bot n de desbloqueo de la tapa y levante la tapa del compartimento de la cinta Si ya hay instalado un casete de cinta y desea sustituirlo tire de l recto hacia arriba para extraerlo Q Si la cinta entintada est suelta en el casete de cinta que va a instalar enrolle la rueda dentada con el dedo en la direcci n que indica la flecha en el casete hasta que la cinta ya no est floja Asimismo compruebe que el extremo de la cinta queda debajo de las gu as t Para los casetes de sellos y etiquetas AV el tensado de la cinta entintada no es necesario porque no tienen cinta entintada ts Si est utilizando un casete de cinta nuevo provisto de ret n cerci rese de extraer ste O Inserte el casete de cinta con fuerza en el compartimento de la cinta y compruebe que toda la parte posterior del casete toca la parte inferior del compartimiento Cuando inserte el casete de cinta compruebe que la cinta interior no se engancha en la esquina de la gu a met lica Q Cierre la tapa del compartimento y a continuaci n pulse para encender la m quina si est apagada La anchura de la cinta actualmente instalada se muestra en el indicador de anchura de la cinta del lado izquierdo de la pantalla Q Pulse una vez para eliminar el trozo suelto
86. starts when the computer is started up If a shortcut was added to the desktop O Double click the P touch AV Editor icon on the desktop If a shortcut was added to the Quick Launch toolbar O Double click the P touch AV Editor icon in the Quick Launch toolbar If no shortcuts were added Q Click the Start button in the taskbar to dis play the Start menu Select Programs Click P touch AV Editor When P touch AV Editor is started the follow ing window is displayed Label view Print button Text History button Symbol button Exit button ES Text Properties AV2067 Address Label button AV1957 Return Address Label button AV1789 File Folder Label button Current label size 33 E o jmd E jmd QD O em E lt b O Q D gt le o r Dd m 1 o B Ch 2 Getting Started Selecting an AV label size With P touch AV Editor three preset label for mats for AV labels are available for creating AV 20067 address labels AV1957 return address labels or AV1789 file folder labels O Click the button for the desired label size The label view changes to the format for the selected size us aad re gt 1 E AD AV1957 Return Addre Ed iS x Adding a symbol A symbol from the various installed symbol fonts can added at the left side of the label O Click X Symbol button The Input Symbol dialog box appears xi Symbol Font
87. texto Si se escribe en la vista de etiqueta el texto se ve como aparecer cuando se imprima No obstante si se hace clic en el bot n Change View Gi el texto se visualiza en el cuadro de texto y proporciona una vista m s clara del texto que se ha escrito C mo importar texto El texto que se haya escrito en otra aplicaci n se puede importar f cilmente a la etiqueta Para importar un texto O Seleccione el texto que desee en la otra aplicaci n Q Para importar el texto en la composici n de la etiqueta pulse las teclas de acceso directo asignadas s lo Windows o arr strelo desde la otra aplicaci n NOTA S lo Windows Para especificar las teclas de acceso directo que se usan para importar texto haga clic con el bot n derecho en la vista de etiqueta o en el cuadro de texto y haga clic en Options en el men que aparecer En el cuadro de di logo Options que aparecer seleccione las teclas de acceso directo que desee para importar el texto Uso de la lista Text History Los 10 textos que se han impreso m s recientemente se almacenan de modo autom tico para un uso futuro Para usar un texto de la lista Text History para ver la lista Text History Haga clic en el texto que desee El texto seleccionado en la lista Text History sustituir todo el texto que se haya escrito en la composici n Adici n de un s mbolo Se puede a adir en el lado izquier
88. the style of the text before storing the template Storing text and Auto Format templates To save a text file O Hold down and press a The MEM ORY screen appears 12 01 04 MEMORY STORE a RECALL Length Margin Font Width Size Press or until Y moves beside STORE O Press aa The STORE screen appears in the display with the currently selected file num ber The type of file is also indicated FILE for normal text files TZ for TZ tape tem plates or AV for AV label templates rs f the maximum number of characters has already been stored the error message MEM ORY FULL appears in the display If this occurs an existing text file must be deleted before the new one can be stored To quit the Store function without storing the text press OR hold down and press a For a text file Length Margin Font Width Size Length Margin Font Width Size For an AV label template file Width Size Length Margin Font O Press or until the file number where you wish to store the text is displayed NOTE File numbers that are not flashing already contain a file Q Type in the desired file name STORE 2 FILECOM NAMETAG_ Length Margin Font Width Size STORE 2 TZ ADDRESS _ Length Margin Font Width Size STORE AVI ADDRESS Ti OT Length Margin Font Width Size NOTE The file name can be up to 8 characters long and can contain letters numbers symbol
89. the Add Printer button A list of detected USB printers appears Select PT 9600 3600 from the USB list and then click the Add button The PT 9600 3600 appears in the Printer List Quit Print Center Reading the User s Guide e 0o000000000000090909090909 The P touch Editor User s Guide can be viewed either by inserting the CD ROM into the drive each time you wish to refer to it or by installing it onto your computer so that it is quickly avail able at any time Since the User s Guide is an HTML document a browser is needed to read it On a Computer Running Windows To view the User s Guide from the CD ROM Start up Windows Explorer Select the CD ROM drive Double click the Ptouch folder Double click the Manual folder Double click Main htm To view the User s Guide installed on the hard disk O Click the Start button in the taskbar to dis play the Start menu Point to Programs Point to P touch Editor 3 2 Click The User s Guide P touch Editor 3 2 Ar E b jmd E jmd QD O em E 19 O Q D gt le o mp Dd Im mp D oa Ch 2 Getting Started On a Macintosh Computer To view the User s Guide from the CD ROM O Double click Main htm in the User s Guide folder within the P touch Editor 3 2 folder on the CD ROM To view the User s Guide installed on the hard disk O Double click Main htm in the User s Guide folder
90. the program you must restart Windows or your computer C No will restart my computer later Remove any disks from their drives and then click Finish to complete setup Instalaci n del controlador de Impresora USB Con la funci n Plug and Play se detectan los dispositivos nuevos que se conectan al sistema y sus controladores se instalan autom ticamente Si la P touch 9600 3600 se ha conectado mediante el puerto USB su controlador se instalar mediante Plug and Play Antes de instalar el controlador de la impresora suministrado en el CD ROM lea las instrucciones para instalarlo que encontrar a continuaci n NOTA t No conecte la P touch al PC antes de que se le indique que lo haga porque el controlador de la impresora no se instalar a correctamente Los cuadros de di logo que se muestran en los siguientes son para la procedimientos instalaci n del software en la PT 9600 Si el software se instala en la PT 3600 los cuadros de di logo pueden ser un poco diferentes a stos que se muestran 11 Para instalar el controlador de la O Haga clic en el bot n Finish impresora USB Setup has finished copying files to your computer Before you can use the program you must restart Windows or your computer O En el cuadro de di logo que aparecer que permite seleccionar si la P touch estar conectada mediante un cable USB o un cable RS 232C seleccione USB cable Yes want t
91. the template O For each field type in the text and then When y in hes text for the last field the MENU screen appears in the display press is pressed after typing Ch 3 Functions NOTE NOTE ts If is pressed while the last field is displayed The default setting ORIGINAL can be selected by pressing the space bar last field is displayed the MENU screen o Press zu The MENU screen appears in the appears display again To return to the first field while the MENU To print a label using the selected tem screen is displayed press cance plate Accented characters page 48 symbols Press or until Yv moves beside page 48 barcodes page 49 time stamps PRINT Refer to the Advanced Functions booklet and user defined character images Refer to the Advanced Functions booklet can be entered in Before printing a template selected by pressing Em the fields an AV label cassette of the appropriate type must be installed Before printing a template selected by pressing a TZ tape cassette with the specified tape width must be installed An Auto Format template can be stored in the memory to be recalled and used at a later time For details on storing Auto Format templates refer to page 72 To immediately print the label for the selected template press in 01 04 MENU VPRINT v EXIT Length Margin Font Width Size 01 04 i MENU CENT 9 Press to print the label The me
92. 0 After the P touch is connected to a computer using a USB cable the P touch enters Interface mode when data is sent to it from the computer t To exit Interface mode for a USB connection and return to the text press any key t The P touch cannot enter Interface mode for a USB connection while it is printing feeding tape or in Interface mode for an RS 232C con nection PT 9600 only or while a macro is being assigned to a PF key PT 9600 only Ee INTERFACE ara B Length Margin Font Width Size Ch 2 Getting Started Installing the Software amp Printer Driver e 0o00000000000009090909090999 In order to provide even more illustration and layout features to the label making possibilities available with your P touch three applications are available on the enclosed CD ROM P touch Editor 3 2 P touch Quick Editor and P touch AV Editor for Windows only With all three applications the printer driver must also be installed in order to print labels from the P touch On a Computer Running Windows Before installation Check that your system configuration meets the following requirements Computer IBM PC or compatible Operating system Pre installed with Microsoft Windows 98 98 SE Me 2000 Professional or XP t For installation on Windows 2000 administra tor privileges are required In addition printing requires power user or administrator privileges This software cannot be o
93. 00 Suprimir Brother PT 9600 3600 y haga clic en el bot n Next Aparecer un cuadro de di logo que solicitar la confirmaci n para borrar todos los controladores de impresora PT 9600 3600 E 2 All Brother PT 9600 printers will be deleted OK to delete Q Haga clic en el bot n Yes En el cuadro de di logo que aparecer se indicar que los controladores de impresora se han borrado Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 xi Brother PT 9600 was correctly deleted i S S Click Finish to quit setup Q Haga clic en el bot n Finish Si aparece un cuadro de di logo que explica que debe reiniciarse el PC seleccione la opci n de reiniciar el PC y haga clic en el bot n Finish En un PC Macintosh La desinstalaci n del software P touch Editor 3 2 del software P touch Quick Editor o del controlador de la impresora PT 9600 3600 desde un Macintosh se describe a continuaci n Antes de eliminar el controlador de la impresora la P touch est apagada y compruebe que desconectada del PC Con un Mac OS anterior a OS X Para desinstalar el software y el controlador de la impresora O Arrastre lo siguiente al icono de la Papelera e carpeta P touch Editor 3 2 para borrar el software P touch Editor 3 2 e carpeta P touch Quick Editor para borrar el software P touch Quick Editor En la Carpeta del Sistema abra la carpeta Extensiones O Arrastre lo siguiente al icono de la Pap
94. 0000000000009090909 0900909 m s P touch Quick Editor permite disefiar una composici n de etiqueta sencilla de manera r pida y f cil Adem s de las distintas funciones disponibles con los botones de la barra de herramientas si se hace clic con el bot n derecho del rat n Windows o se mantiene pulsada la tecla de control y se hace clic Macintosh en la vista de etiqueta se mostrar un men emergente que contiene mas comandos C mo iniciar P touch Quick Editor Para iniciar P touch Quick Editor O Si se a adi un acceso directo en el men Startup O P touch Quick Editor se iniciar autom ticamente cuando se inicie el PC A Si se a adi un acceso directo al escritorio O Haga doble clic en el icono P touch Quick Editor del escritorio J Si se a adi un acceso directo a la barra de herramientas Quick Launch 25 O Haga doble clic en el icono P touch Quick Editor de la barra de herramientas Quick Launch Si no se a adieron accesos directos O Haga clic en el bot n Inicio de la barra de tareas para ver el men Inicio Seleccione Programs Programas Q Haga clic en P touch Quick Editor Cuando se inicie P touch Quick Editor se visualizara la ventana siguiente Length 1 03 use Barra de herramientas Vista Label NOTA Para ocultar o visualizar P touch Quick Editor haga clic en su icono de la bandeja del sistema a la derecha de la barra de tareas
95. 09 Para a adir a n m s funciones de creaci n de ilustraciones y dise os a las posibilidades de creaci n de etiquetas disponibles con la P touch en el CD ROM adjunto encontrar tres aplicaciones P touch Editor 3 2 P touch Quick Editor y P touch AV Editor para Windows solamente Con todas estas tres aplicaciones habr que instalar tambi n el controlador de impresora para poder imprimir etiquetas desde la P touch En un PC que ejecute Windows Antes de la instalaci n Compruebe que la configuraci n de su sistema satisface los siguientes requisitos PC PC IBM o compatible Sistema operativo Preinstalado con Microsoft Windows 98 98 SE Me 2000 Professional o XP NOTA ss Para realizar la instalaci n en Windows 2000 se requieren privilegios de administrador Adem s la impresi n requiere usuario avanzado o privilegios de administrador Este software no se puede utilizar en Grupos de usuarios Por otra parte este software no es compatible con el sistema operativo Windows 2000 Server Con Windows XP la impresi n e instalaci n solamente son posibles desde una cuenta con privilegios de administrador Estas operaciones no se pueden realizar desde una cuenta con privilegios limitados Espacio libre en el disco duro Como m nimo 20 MB 100 MB para una instalaci n completa Cuando se impriman etiquetas largas o grandes cantidades de datos podr n requerirse hasta 100 MB de espacio libre en
96. 2 software includes a vari messages that appear System Requirements Computer Macintosh Power Macintosh or iMac Install on E Macintosh HD ety of more complex functions for printing bar codes and images enabling you to design just about any label that you can image Install the P touch Editor 3 2 software onto a Macintosh as described below Installation requires 189 5 MB Operating system Mac OS 8 6 or later Available on volume 1121 5 MB Available memory Minimum 32MB Available hard disk space Minimum 20MB This software is only compatible with Mac OS X classic pple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc Select the installation method To install the P touch Editor 3 2 software O For a basic installation Clicking the Install button immediately With a Mac OS before OS X starts installing all options E o jmd E jmd QD O em E lt b O O With the P touch and the Macintosh turned off connect the P touch to the computer using the enclosed USB interface cable as described on page 9 Be sure to leave the P touch turned off Turn on the Macintosh Insert the enclosed CD ROM into the com puter s CD ROM drive O P touch 18 aX 2 items 4 1 MB available REN About 20 MB of available hard disk space is needed to begin installation In order to install all options about 100 MB of available hard disk space is needed
97. 3600 o Add Brother PT 9600 3600 A adir Brother PT 9600 3600 y haga clic en el bot n Next 14 O Haga clic en el bot n Finish Si aparece un cuadro de di logo que explica que debe reiniciarse el PC seleccione la opci n de reiniciar el PC y haga clic en el bot n Finish Con Windows XP O Aparecer un cuadro de di logo que solicitar que conecte la P touch al PC Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 Preparation for setup is finished Install the printer Connect Brother PT 9600 and then turn it on Wait until it is automatically added When the printer can be added the next Driver Setup page automatically appears GA Conecte la P touch al PC mediante el cable de interfaz USB que se incluye como se describe en la p gina3 y encienda la P touch Aparecer un cuadro de di logo que indica que el controlador de la impresora se ha instalado Aparece el primer cuadro de di logo Found New Hardware Wizard Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for Brother PT 9600 at your hardware came wi 42 or floppy disk insert it now Click Next to continue Seleccione Install the software automatically Recommended Instalar autom ticamente el software recomendado y haga clic en el bot n Next Aparece un cuadro de di logo que advierte de que el software no ha superado la prueba Windows Logo
98. 9600 3600 debe seleccionar PT 9600 3600 Driver Controlador PT 9600 3600 Je instalarlo Si no se instalan determinadas opciones algunas funciones de la P touch Editor no estar n disponibles Q Cuando aparezca el cuadro de di logo que indica que la instalaci n ha terminado haga clic en el bot n Quit A Installation is done Click QUIT to leave the installer Click CONTINUE to perform additional installations O Cuando aparezca el cuadro de di logo que solicita si desea reiniciar el PC haga clic en el bot n Restart 6 Please restart your Macintosh before using any ofthe installed items Con Mac OS X 10 1 a 10 2 3 Con la P touch y el Macintosh apagados conecte la P touch al PC mediante el cable de interfaz USB que se incluye como se describe en la p gina 3 Deje la P touch apagada O Encienda el Macintosh Q Inserte el disco CD ROM que se incluye en la unidad de CD ROM del PC 000 P touch mm MY A Back View Computer Home Favorites Applications Some Mac OS 9 Mac OS X O Haga doble clic en la carpeta Mac OS X para abrirla 000 2 Mac OS X 7 E o msc T Back View Bb 5 Computer Home P touch Quick Editor P touch Editor 3 2 Driver Installer pkg Q Haga doble clic en la carpeta P touch Editor 3 2 para abrirla 000 F P touch Editor 3 2 O e msm M T Back View Computer Home E P touch Editor3 2 Installer User s Guide Read Me rtf
99. Alt 47 Caps 46 Insert 46 Multiple copies 70 N New Block function 47 New line 47 Numbering function 70 O Operating systems 9 Overwriting stored files 73 P PARAMETER menu 50 PC operating systems 9 PC connecting to 8 Picture add to text 48 Pictures 96 Power key 7 Precautions 6 Previewing 68 Print head cleaning 92 Print key 69 Printing 69 Auto format template file from memory 76 Multiple copies 70 Text file from memory 76 Problems amp solutions 90 PROTOCOL parameter 49 P touch AV Editor 15 Starting 33 P touch Editor 10 Starting 28 P touch Quick Editor 12 15 Starting 30 Punctuation marks 47 96 Q Quitting functions 45 R Recalling text file 73 Release button 2 Removing Text 51 Text and formats 51 Text lines 51 Repeat Printing function 70 Replacing tape cassette 7 Return key 45 47 Right alignment 60 Roller cleaning 92 Rotating text 61 RS 232C port PT 9600 2 S Saving text file 72 Shift key 46 Signs 48 96 Size function 54 Software Starting 28 30 Software PT 9600 Specifications 94 Space bar 46 Special characters Barcode 99 Entering 47 Specifications 94 Stamp function 65 Stamp kits 116 Stamp assembling 39 Striking out 58 Style1 function 57 Style2 function 58 Supplies 116 Symbol function 48 Symbol key 48 Symbols 48 96 System configuration 9 20 T Tape Fabric 39 Iron on transfer 38 Laminated 38 Tape cassette Installing 7 Replacing 7 Tape compartment cover 2 T
100. Displaying the Properties Although the screens shown in the following expla nations are for Windows 98 98 SE and Me the operations for Windows 2000 and XP and Macin tosh are the same unless specifically mentioned The desired Properties can be displayed by clicking the icon in the property dock SS A Layout Properties icon e j AB je Page Properties icon Text Properties icon Database Properties icon replaced with the database toolbar on the Mac version of the soft ware Font Properties icon To display the Properties O Click the icon Page Properties Click this button to hide the Properties a um Jy fie Je que y When the P touch 9600 3600 is selected as the printer Entering text Although the screens shown in the following expla 98 98 SE and Me the nations are for Windows operations for Windows 2000 and XP and Macin tosh are the same unless specifically mentioned O Click A Text button on the draw toolbar Text can be typed in and the pointer changes from K selection pointer to I I beam pointer Move the I beam pointer to the position in the layout area where you wish to type in text and then click the left mouse button The cursor flashes in the layout area to indi cate that you can now type in text itor Layoutl IbI loj x Eis Edit View Inset Format Layout Window Help l x Mu 2 T z
101. Editor P touch Editor 3 2 Driver Installer pkg Haga doble clic en la carpeta P touch Quick Editor para abrirla Q O P touch Quick Editor o T Back View i Computer Home Quick Editor Installer Read Me rtf Haga doble clic en el icono del instalador de P touch Quick Editor en la carpeta que aparecer Se iniciar el instalador y aparecer el cuadro de di logo de introducci n P touch Quick Editor Introduction A Introduction InstallAnywhere will guide you through the installation of P touch o Quick Editor 8 It is strongly recommended that you quit all programs before a continuing with this installation Click the Next button to proceed to the next screen If you want to change something on a previous screen click the Previous button You may cancel this installation at any time by clicking the Cancel button Cuando se pulsa el bot n Next aparece un mensaje que avisa de que ya hay instalada una versi n anterior del software Desinstale la versi n anterior del software antes de instalar la nueva Para obtener m s informaci n sobre la desinstalaci n del software consulte Para desinstalar el software P touch Quick Editor en la p gina 33 O Haga clic en el bot n Next Aparecer el cuadro de di logo Choose Alias Folder que permite seleccionar d nde se a adir el alias de P touch Quick Editor P touch Quick Editor Choose Alias Folder A Introduct
102. El P touch Editor 3 2 facilita a cualquier usuario el disefio y la impresi n de etiquetas m s complicadas para casi cualquier necesidad imaginable C mo iniciar P touch Editor 3 2 Para iniciar P touch Editor 3 2 En un PC que ejecute Windows O Haga clic en el bot n Inicio de la barra de tareas para ver el men Inicio Seleccione Programs Programas Q Seleccione P touch Editor 3 2 O Haga clic en P touch Editor 3 2 Cuando se inicie P touch Editor se visualizar la ventana an Barra de t tulo Barra de men E Barra de herramientas pea on Cama est ndar ale Dique Property Area de composici n Area de impresi n Barra de herramientas Draw Dique Object Barra de estado fenes eh En un PC Macintosh O Haga doble clic en el icono P touch Editor 3 2 en la carpeta P touch Editor 3 2 instalada en el PC P Cuando se inicie P touch Editor se visualizar la ventana siguiente Area de composici n Barra de t tulo Barra de herramientas Draw Barra de herramientas Print m is BE Barra de herramientas Database E esla leslie EL Dique Property Dique Object Ao Barra de estado Para ver la ayuda de la versi n Mac de P touch Editor 3 2 haga doble clic en Main htm en la carpeta Help dentro de la carpeta P touch Editor 3 2 instalada
103. Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have Driver will be installed running Click Nextto continue with the Setup program Selecttype of connection cable Connection Cable WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion Serial cable NEN 10101 of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be z c prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law ci C USB cable cium gt Cancel t To install the P touch Editor 3 2 software click the upper button P touch Editor Continue with the procedure in Installing the P touch Edi tor 3 2 software on page 10 Welcome Welcome to the P touch Editor Setup program This program will install P touch Editor on your computer Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Nextto continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law E Cancel To install the P touch AV Ed
104. LM RIGHT ABC DEFGH IJKLM JUSTIFY Adem s si se establece la funci n Text Rotation en OFF el texto se alinear dentro de la longitud establecida con la funci n Block Length Si la funci n Text Rotation se establece en otro ajuste que no sea OFF el texto se alinear dentro de la anchura de la cinta La alineaci n del texto en la posici n actual del cursor se muestra en la parte superior de la pantalla Para cambiar el valor de la funci n Text Alignment Global Block O Mantenga pulsada y pulse O E NOTA Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de formato Pulse O hasta que se visualice ALIGNMENT El ajuste para el texto en la posici n actual del cursor se muestra en el lado izquierdo de la pantalla y en el lado derecho se puede ver una muestra O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado os Sj aparece como el ajuste la funci n Text Alignment ya se ha aplicado a una l nea del bloque de texto actual si se han establecido las funciones Block Format o Global Format o al bloque en el texto actual si se ha establecido la funci n Global Format Si se cambia el aplic ajuste se cancelar el previamente que se Para devolver el valor predeterminado a la funci n LEFT pulse la barra de espacio Para volver al texto sin cambiar el formato pulse O mantenga pulsada y pulse Global Block Line iif jog
105. Mac OS X folder to open it EJ Macintosh HD Installation requires 7 1 MB Operating system Mac OS 8 6 or later Available on volume 1076 1 MB Available memory Minimum 24MB Available hard disk space Minimum 30MB Fi Mac OS X This software is only compatible with AA Mac OS X classic Ejec a T Apple and Macintosh are registered md trademarks of Apple Computer Inc Computer Home 4 E P touch Quick Editor P touch Editor 3 2 Only the options with a check mark beside them are installed Select the options that you wish to install and then click the Install button Q Double click the P touch Quick Editor folder to open it Driver Installer pkg In order to print from the P touch 9600 3600 PT 9600 3600 Driver must be selected for installation 24 5600 gt P touch Quick Editor e Back View Computer Home Quick Editor Installer Read Me rtf Q Double click the P touch Quick Editor Installer icon in the folder that appears The installer starts up and then the Introduction dialog box appears P touch Quick Editor Introduction Introduction InstallAnywhere will guide you through the installation of P touch o Quick Editor It is strongly recommended that you quit all programs before o continuing with this installation Click the Next button to proceed to the next screen If you want to change something on a previous screen click the Previous button Yo
106. O Press or until the desired setting is displayed or use the number keys to type in the desired block margin width t To return the function to its default setting AUTO press the space bar To change the setting in 0 1 1 0 cm steps hold down either or and then release the key when the desired setting is displayed The block margins are displayed in the cur rently selected unit of measurement inches or centimeters The unit of measurement can be changed with the Setup functions Refer to page 80 To return to the text without changing the for matting press OR hold down and Global press Press to apply the setting To apply several format settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function then pressing or to select the desired setting pressing 8 Press only after the necessary functions have been set Block Length function B LENGTH Normally the length of each text block auto matically adjusts to fit the length of the entered text However with the Block Length function you can set each text block to a length between 0 25 and 38 84 0 6 cm and 99 5 cm 64 To change the setting for the Block Length function Global Block O Hold down and press or Press or until B LENGTH is dis played The current setting is shown on the left side of the display 12 13 4 B LENGTH C3 2 AUTO AUTO 1 10 HELSINKI A Length Ma
107. PT 9600 If your hardware came with an installation CD lt 6 or floppy disk insert it now Click Next to continue Select Install the software automatically Recommended and then click the Next button A dialog box appears warning that the software has not passed Windows Logo testing Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware Printers has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows lt P Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now an contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing e E 20 Q Click the Continue Anyway button to con tinue with the installation A Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears indi cating that the Found New Hardware Wiz ard has finished installing the software for the PT 9600 3600 Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for Brother PT 9600 Click Finish to close the wizard O Click the Finish button A Driver Setup dia log box appears indicating that the printer driver has been installed Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 Brother PT 9600 was correctly
108. Q Conecte la P touch al PC mediante el cable de interfaz USB que se incluye como se aoe describe en la pagina 3 y encienda la P touch Aparecer un cuadro de di logo que indica que el controlador de la Haga clic en el bot n Next Aparecer un impresora se ha instalado cuadro de di logo que solicitar que conecte la P touch al PC TE Cancel Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 x river Setup Brother Preparation for setup is finished Brother PT 9600 was correctly added Install the printer Connect Brother PT 9600 and then turn it on Wait until it is automatically added p A E When the printer can be added the next Driver Setup page automatically appears Click Finish to quit setup 12 Conecte la P touch al PC mediante el cable de interfaz USB que se incluye como se describe en la p gina 3 y encienda la P touch Aparece el primer cuadro de di logo Found New Hardware Wizard Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for Brother PT 9600 y If your hardware came with an installation CD lt 6 or floppy disk insert it now o nt the wizard to do O Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue Seleccione Install the software automatically Recommended Instalar autom ticamente el software recomendado y haga clic en el bo
109. Q Haga clic en el bot n Uninstall Cuando el P touch Editor 3 2 se haya eliminado aparecer un cuadro de di logo que indicar que la desinstalaci n ha terminado Q Haga clic en el bot n Quit Para desinstalar el controlador de la impresora O Desconecte el cable USB del puerto USB de la P touch Haga doble clic en la carpeta Applications del Macintosh HD para abrirla Q Haga doble clic en la carpeta Utilities para abrirla O Haga doble clic en el icono de Print Center para iniciar esta aplicaci n Q Compruebe que PT 9600 3600 no aparece en la Printer List Si se enumera selecci nela y despu s haga clic en el bot n Delete para suprimirla Q Salga del Print Center En la carpeta Library abra la carpeta Printers y a continuaci n abra la carpeta Brother Q Arrastre lo siguiente al icono de la Papelera e PT9600 3600PDE plugin e PT9600 3600PM plugin 33 Fijaci n de las etiquetas e 0o000000000090900909 0900909 Cinta laminada La parte posterior de las etiquetas impresas en cintas laminadas se puede extraer f cilmente si se utiliza un ajuste Auto Cut con medio corte 1 3 5 o 7 consulte la p gina 58 Cinta de transferencia con plancha La cinta de transferencia con plancha se utiliza para transferir los textos a la ropa mediante una plancha O Inserte un casete de cinta de transferencia Mirror con plancha y pulse para imprimir el texto y separar la etiqueta Planche la pren
110. ROBLEMAS Problema Soluci n 7 Aparece una l nea horizontal en blanco sobre el texto en la etiqueta impresa Pare la m quina desconecte el adaptador de CA y s lo para PT 9600 extraiga la pila recargable Abra la tapa del compartimento de la cinta y extraiga el casete de cinta si est instalado El cabezal de la impresora y los rodillos est n situados en el compartimento de la cinta Cabezal de la impresora Utilice un tap n de algod n seco y limpie suavemente hacia arriba y hacia abajo el cabezal de la impresora Cabezal de la impresora Rodillos Utilice un tap n de algod n seco y limpie hacia arriba y hacia abajo cada rodillo mientras los va girando Cabezal de la impresora Rodillos Tap n de algod n Instale un casete de cinta cierre la tapa del compartimento de la cinta e intente volver a imprimir Si sigue apareciendo una raya en blanco en la etiqueta impresa repita los pasos a y utilice un tap n de algod n humedecido en alcohol isoprop lico frote Si ninguna de estas soluciones funciona p ngase en contacto con su representante de servicio IS El cabezal de la impresora se limpia m s f cilmente con el casete de limpieza opcional para cabezales de impresora TZ CL6 El cabezal de impresi n tambi n podr limpiarse pulsando s sin casete de cinta instalado 71 SOLUCI N DE PROBLEMAS Problema Soluci n 8 La cinta no se extrae correctamente e Ap
111. ST 55 5 eese e o RENE RA tec A OERS 03 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 iE DNN EQ INEST OI e 90 MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS sai YN RREAE 94 np dee P 95 SYDPOL REC OOO PERE bu O losa Reet nT MCC di eet Seater en ere ee Reet tee 96 Special Darcode Card tens diana 99 PL ger ecos 99 SIZES AMA WIALOS a A ii 100 IDE e iia 102 Framing and shading patterns occccooconncnnnccncnonnnnncnnonanannnnnnnnannnncnnnnnannnncnnnnananos 104 PICO RIDE tone cessat SEEMS Sca ME 105 TOImDIGUO TOXE STYLO sai tot itn hao ech A E aste eA oai 110 INDEX aa coucasauanen E A O R 112 ACCESSORIES For USA Only 5 3 6 eoe eaa sea e sees ro are ereas 116 PT 9600 3600 CONTACT INFORMATION For USA Only 118 Brother 90 Days One Year Limited Warranty and Replacement Service For USA Only Who is covered e This limited warranty warranty is given only to the original end use retail purchaser referred to in this warranty as Original Purchaser of the accompanying product consumables and accessories collectively referred to in this warranty as this Product e f you purchased a product from someone other than an authorized Brother reseller in the United States or if the roduct was used including but not limited to floor models or refurbished product prior to your purchase you are not the Original Purchaser and the product that you purchased is not covered by this warranty What is covered e This Product includes a Machine and Consumable and Ac
112. Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law E Cancel 15 E o jmd E jmd QD O em E lt b O Ch 2 Getting Started Q Carefully read the contents of the Welcome dialog box and then click the Next button to continue The User Information dialog box appears User Information x Type your name below You must also type the name ofthe company you work for Company Brother Co Ltd O Type the necessary information into the appropriate boxes If the information has already been registered in Windows it will automatically appear and then click the Next button A dialog box appears ask ing for confirmation of the entered informa tion Q D gt le o mp Dd Im mp D oa Registration Confirmation You have provided the following registration information Name M Smith Company Brother Co Ltd Is this registration information correct No Q Click the Yes button to register the entered information To change the registration information click the No button and then return to step The Choose Destination Location dialog box appears Choose Destination Location x Setup will inst
113. T This printer driver has passed compatibility tests If your hardware wizard i i please select Continue Anyway ti lisplays a warning message o complete the software installation Aparecer el primer cuadro de di logo de Driver Setup que le permitir seleccionar si la P touch estar conectada en el puerto USB o en el puerto RS 232C Contin e con el procedimiento en Instalaci n del controlador de impresora USB en la p gina 11 Para instalar el controlador de impresora en serie consulte para instalar el controlador de impresora en serie consulte el manual de Funciones avanzadas Driver will be installed Selecttype of connection cable m Connection Cable SS Serial cable gt 10101 Eb C USB cable a 2 gt eu Cancel Para instalar el software P touch Quick Editor haga clic sobre P touch Quick Editor Continue con el procedimiento en Instalaci n del software P touch Quick Editor en la p gina 7 Wweicome x Welcome to the P touch Quick Editor Setup program This program will install Ptouch Quick Editor on your computer Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Nextto continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any po
114. Windows XP haga clic en My Computer Mi PC en el men Inicio y a continuaci n haga doble clic en la unidad de CD ROM que contiene el CD ROM Despu s haga doble clic en Setup exe para visualizar el cuadro de di logo Haga clic en el bot n superior P touch Editor Se iniciar el Asistente de InstallShield para instalar el software P touch Editor y aparecer el cuadro de di logo de bienvenida Welcome x Welcome to the P touch Editor Setup program This f program will install P touch Editor on your computer Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Nextto continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law E Cancel NOTA t Para instalar s lo el controlador de la impresora haga clic en el bot n inferior Driver Con Windows XP aparecer un mensaje inform ndole de que el controlador de impresora ha pasado las pruebas de compatibilidad y que debe hacer clic sobre el bot n Continue Anyway si aparece un mensaje de aviso Haga clic sobre el bot n OK Confirmation IMPORTAN
115. a COPIES Eine 1 1 Length Margin Font Width x Feed amp Cut key amp Press this key to feed out any leftover printed tape after pressing to quit printing t Only TZ tape can be fed out and cut using this function If an AV label cassette is installed when A Cut is held down and amp is pressed the error message CAN T FEED AV LABELS appears cs After printing with the Auto Cut function set to 5 6 7 or 8 press amp to feed the tape then cut it To feed out 1 26 mm of tape and auto matically cut it A Cut e Press The message FEED appears Repeat Printing function Coe e D This function allows you to print up to 999 cop ies of the same text To print multiple copies of a label s O Hold down and press COPIES l Length Margin Font Width Size Press or until the desired setting is displayed or use the number keys to type in the desired number of copies 70 NOTE t To select the default setting 1 press the space bar t To change the setting in steps of 5 hold down either fe or and then release the key when the desired setting is displayed t To quit the Repeat Printing function press OR hold down and press O Press to begin printing the set number of copies The number of each copy is dis played while it is being printed After ded with the Auto Cut function set to 5 6 7 or 8 press 5 to feed the
116. a pulsada y emory pulse 3 O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el n mero de archivo que contiene el texto que desea imprimir El nombre de archivo se muestra junto al n mero de archivo y el texto almacenado bajo el n mero de archivo seleccionado se muestra en la l nea inferior Para ver otras partes del archivo de texto seleccionado pulse 7 o Q Pulse la barra de espacio para que v aparezca a la derecha del nombre de archivo O Repita los pasos Q y O hasta que Y aparezca a la derecha de todos los archivos que se quieran imprimir Los archivos marcados con Y se imprimir n ts Si tiene que imprimir varios archivos siga los pasos y Q para marcarlos con Y Si s lo tiene que imprimir un archivo puede omitir los pasos y O Para quitar un archivo del grupo de los que se van a imprimir seleccione el archivo y a continuaci n pulse la barra de espacio para quitar Y de la derecha del nombre de archivo Pulse w El texto almacenado bajo los n meros de archivo seleccionados se imprimen Para imprimir los archivos de plantilla Auto Format almacenados O Mantenga pulsada y pulse fgn O 5 Memory Mantenga pulsada y pulse 5 Aparecer la pantalla MEMORY e Q Pulse O hasta que Y se desplace junto a PRINT O Pulse y La pantalla PRINT aparece en el visor con el n mero de archivo actualmente seleccionado NOTA Para salir de la funci n Memory Print sin impri
117. a que se empiecen a instalar inmediatamente todas las opciones Se necesitan unas 20 MB de espacio de disco duro disponible para empezar la instalaci n Para instalar todas las opciones son necesarias unas 100 MB de espacio de disco duro disponible O Para una instalaci n m nima Seleccione Minimal M nima en la lista Feature Set y haga clic en el bot n Next para que empiece la instalaci n s lo de la aplicaci n P touch Editor 3 2 P touch Editor 3 2 Choose Product Components Choose Product Features o FA P touch Editor 3 2 a 3 Fonts US o Auto Format Templates a Clip Art Introduction Description RM ona S HA Cancel Previous Si no se instalan determinadas opciones como las plantillas de Auto Format y Clip Art algunas funciones de P touch Editor no estar n disponibles 18 O Para una instalaci n personalizada Seleccione Custom Personalizada en la lista Feature Set para ver la lista de opciones que se pueden seleccionar para la instalaci n P touch Editor 3 2 Choose Product Components M Choose Product Features o M P touch Editor 3 2 e M Fonts US o M Auto Format Templates m Clip Art Introduction Description qum ET Cancel Previous S lo se instalar n las opciones con una marca de verificaci n Seleccione las opciones que desea instalar y haga clic en el bot n Next Aparecer el cuadro de di lo
118. able and Accessory ltems that expired in accordance with a rated life and 5b Problems arising from other than defects in materials or workmanship This limited warranty is VOID if this Product has been altered or modified in any way including but not limited to attempted warranty repair without authorization from Brother and or alteration removal of the serial number What to do if you think your Product is eligible for warranty service Report your issue to either our Customer Service Hotline at 1 877 478 6824 or a Brother Authorized Service Center within the applicable warranty period Supply Brother or the Brother Authorized Service Center with a copy of your dated bill of sale showing that this Product was purchased within the U S For the name of local Brother Authorized Service Center s call 1 800 521 2846 What Brother will ask you to do After contacting Brother or a Brother Authorized Service Center you may be required to deliver by hand if you prefer or send the Product properly packaged freight prepaid to the Authorized Service Center together with a photocopy of your bill of sale You are responsible for the cost of shipping packing product and insurance if you desire You are also responsible for loss or damage to this Product in shipping What Brother will do First 90 Days If the problem reported concerning your Machine and or accompanying Consumable and Accessory Item s is covered by thi
119. actual si se han establecido las funciones Block Format o Global Format o al bloque en el texto actual si se ha establecido la funci n Global Format Si se cambia el ajuste se cancelar el que se aplic previamente ts Para devolver a la funci n su ajuste predeteminado NORMAL pulse la barra de espacio t Para volver al texto sin cambiar el formato pulse O mantenga pulsada y pulse a Block os Pulse d para aplicar la configuraci n Para aplicar varios ajustes de formato al mismo contin e pulsando O tiempo para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse o para seleccionar el ajuste que desee Pulse Jz s lo despu s de configurar las funciones necesarias Funci n Line Effects LINE EFFECTS La funci n Line Effects permite subrayar o tachar determinadas partes del texto 12 34 56 UNDERLINE STRIKEOUT Si se ha seleccionado otro ajuste que no sea OFF para el texto en la posici n actual del cursor aparecer el indicador Line Effects en la parte superior de la pantalla Para cambiar el valor de la funci n Line Effects O Mantenga pulsada 3 ce bal o y pulse O NOTA Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de formato 49 Pulse o hasta que se visualice LINE Para cambiar el ajuste de la funci n Frame EFFECTS El ajuste para el texto en la Goba Block O Mantenga pulsada y puls
120. ada y pulse Global Para aplicar varios ajustes de formato al mismo tiempo contin e pulsando O para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse t o Home para seleccionar el ajuste que desee Pulse m s lo despu s de configurar las funciones necesarias Para cambiar el ajuste de la funci n Block Length Global Block Mantenga pulsada y pulse Jo Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de formato Pulse O hasta que se visualice B LENGTH El ajuste actual se muestra en el lado izquierdo de la pantalla Pulse O hasta que se visualice el ajuste que desee o utilice las teclas num ricas para escribir la longitud de bloque que prefiera ts Para volver la funci n a su ajuste predeterminado AUTO pulse la barra de espacio Para cambiar el ajuste en pasos de 0 1 pulgadas 1 0 cm pasos mantenga pulsada O y a continuaci n suelte la tecla cuando se visualice el valor que desee La longitud de bloque se visualiza en la unidad de medida seleccionada actualmente pulgadas o cent metros La unidad de medida se puede cambiar con las funciones de Configuraci n Consulte la p gina 65 Para volver al texto sin cambiar el formato pulse O mantenga pulsada y pulse Global Block of Pulse Je para aplicar la configuraci n Para aplicar varios ajustes de formato al mismo tiempo contin e pulsando O para seleccionar la fu
121. ages 105 through 109 After the text is entered a different style for the text can easily be selected For samples of the available style formats refer to pages 110 To select a pre formatted template Hold down and press w OF Saz For Tape the PT 3600 press Ores The template that was last used appears first Selecting this template displays the text that was entered in it at that time t The label sizes are displayed in the currently selected unit of measurement inches or centi meters The unit of measurement can be changed with the Setup functions Refer to page 80 t An Auto Format template that has been stored in the memory can be recalled and used again For details on recalling stored Auto Format tem plates refer to page 73 66 X BDRESS 1 IAB 2 Width Size Length Margin Font 2e gt 1 AV2067 ADDRESS 1 4 5x2 5 8 Length Margin Font Width Size Press or until the name of the desired template is displayed NOTE To select the default setting ADDRESS 1 press the space bar wo The first field for the selected template is displayed Q Press NOTE t To select a different field press Or until the desired field is displayed t To select a different template press caca press or ka until d moves CANCEL EDITING and then press A gt AUTO FORMAT NAME AUTO 0 04 Length Margin Font HELSINKI Width To enter text in
122. ague la m quina abra la tapa del despu s del corte autom tico compartimento de la cinta y extraiga el casete de cinta si est instalado Con un algod n limpie la pieza met lica de la ranura de salida a la izquierda de la cizalla Tap n de algod n Pieza met lica Area que debe limpiarse 9 La cizalla no corta correctamente e Cambie el valor HALF CUTTER Consulte la p gina 67 e Puede que la cizalla haya perdido filo P ngase en contacto con su representante de servicio pL ESPECIFICACIONES DE LA M QUINA ESPECIFICACIONES DE LA M QUINA Cabezal de la Impresora Cizalla de cinta Dimensiones Peso SOFTWARE Fuentes de Caracteres Tama os de los Caracteres Estilos de los Caracteres Tama o del b ffer Tama o de la memoria HARDWARE Suministro 24 VCC 1 5 A Adaptador de CA AD9000 el ctrico s lo PT 9600 pila recargable de Ni MH Dispositivo de Teclado PT 9600 68 teclas PT 3600 58 teclas entrada LCD 24 x 119 puntos May s Alt y otros indicadores con luz de fondo de la pantalla s lo PT 9600 Cinta de La cinta TZ est disponible en los seis anchos siguientes impresi n 1 4 pulgadas 6 mm 3 8 pulgadas 9 mm 1 2 pulgadas 12 mm 3 4 pulgadas 18 mm 1 pulgadas 24 mm 1 1 2 pulgadas 36 mm Las etiquetas AV est n disponibles en los tres tipos siguientes Etiquetas de direcciones AV2067 3 4 x 2 5 8 pulgadas 20 mm x 67 mm Etiquetas
123. ailable 1 518 555 136 bytes CI n rl Cancel Previous sta Check that the installation will be per formed as desired and then click the Install button After P touch Quick Editor is installed a dialog box appears indicating that the installation is finished P touch Quick Editor Install Complete Introduction Congratulations P touch Quick Editor has been successfully Choose Alias Folder installed to A Pre Installation Summary Installing Click Done to quit the installer Install Complete 9 Click the Done button and then restart the computer Installing the printer driver MAC OS X 10 1 to 10 2 3 To install the printer driver O With the P touch and the Macintosh turned off connect the P touch to the computer using the enclosed USB interface cable as described on page 9 Be sure to leave the P touch turned off Turn on the Macintosh Insert the enclosed CD ROM into the com puter s CD ROM drive P touch m 6 w A Computer Home Favorites Applications 3 Mac OS 9 Mac OS X 25 E o jmd E jmd QD O em E lt b O Q D gt le o mp Dd Im e D oa Ch 2 Getting Started e 26 Q Double click the Mac OS X folder to open it 000 Mac OS X lt gt m Sm M f Back View Computer Home e e P touch Quick Editor P touch Editor 3 2 Driver Installer pkg Double click the Driver Installer
124. all P touch AV Editor in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder You can choose notto install P touch AV Editor by clicking Cancel to exit Setup Destination Folder ee Files Brother AV Editor Browse To change the location where P touch AV Editor will be installed click the Browse button and then select the installation folder in the Choose Folder dialog box that appears Then click the OK button 16 After P touch AV Editor is installed a dialog box appears allowing you to select where shortcuts to P touch AV Editor will be added Add shortcut F x Startup menu Y Quick launch bar Cancel Select the desired locations for the short cuts and then click the Next button A dia log box appears allowing you to select whether or not to install the printer driver CE 2 OK to install the printer driver To install the printer driver click the Yes button Windows XP only A message appears informing you that the printer driver has passed compatibility tests and that the Continue Anyway button should be pressed if a warning message appears Click the OK button IMPORTANT This printer driver has passed compatibility tests IF your hi lease select Conti ardware wizard displays a warning message pl ntinue Anyway to complete the software installation The fir
125. allation A Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears indi cating that the Found New Hardware Wiz ard has finished installing the software for the PT 9600 3600 Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for A Brother PT 3600 E Click Finish to close the wizard Click the Finish button Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 Brother PT 9600 was correctly added Click Finish to quit setup If a Driver Setup dialog box appears indicating that the printer driver has been installed click the Finish button A dialog box appears indicating that the installation is finished Setup Complete Setup has finished copying files to your computer Before you can use the program you must restart Windows or your computer Yes want to restart my computer now C No will restart my computer later Remove any disks from their drives and then click Finish to complete setup Select Yes want to restart my computer now or Yes restart immediately if the printer driver was installed separately click the Finish button to restart the computer and then remove the CD ROM from the computer Replacing or adding a USB printer driver To replace or add a USB printer driver Turn off the P touch and then disconnect it from the computer Insert the enclosed CD ROM into the com puter s CD ROM drive A dialog box auto
126. already entered in the layout Adding a symbol A symbol from the various installed symbol fonts can be added at the left side of the label text To add a symbol to the text 31 E b jmd E jmd QD O em E 19 O peuejs unen Ch 2 Getting Started O Windows Right click in the label view or text box select Symbols in the menu that appears and then click Insert Changel The Input Symbol dialog box appears Macintosh Hold down the Control key and click in the label view or text box select Symbols in the menu that appears and then click Insert Change A dialog box dis playing symbols appears x Symbol Eont Symbol List In the Symbol Font list select the desired symbol font Q In the Symbol List view select the desired symbol O Click the OK button The selected symbol is added at the left of the text Changing the background color The background color of the layout can be changed to suit your preference To change the background color O Windows Right click in the label view or text box select Background Color in the menu that appears and then click the desired color from the list Macintosh Hold down the Control key and click in the label view or text box select Background Color in the menu that appears and then click the desired color from the list To select a color other than those listed select User Settings Windows or
127. and press bese ONCE Line Out Each time is pressed while is held down one line of text is deleted Clear function cs When clearing the display before entering new text the Clear function can be used to choose whether all of the text is erased and all format ting functions Font Size Width Style1 Style2 Line Effects Frame Alignment Text Rotation Tape Margin Tape Length Block Margin Block Length and Mirror Printing are returned to their default settings or whether just the text is erased To erase all of the text and formats O Hold down and press Cs To return to the text without erasing anything press OR hold down and press Cs p OK TO CLEAR TEXT amp FORMAT TEXT ONLY Length Margin Font Width Size 51 Ch 3 Functions Since v is already beside TEXT amp FORMAT press f g the formatting functions are reset to their default settings To erase only the text O Hold down and press Cs To return to the text without erasing anything press OR hold down and press Cs Press Or to move V beside TEXT ONLY OK TO CLEAR TEXT amp FORMAT a YTEXT ONLY Length Margin Font Width Size Q Press as The text is erased but the format ting functions remain unchanged 52 Formatting A variety of formatting functions are available for making more decorative and customized labels The appearance of characters can be changed using the text formatt
128. ape exit slot 2 Tape Length function 63 Tape Margin function 62 Tapes 116 Template text Editing 67 Entering 66 Printing 67 78 Style 67 77 Text Alignment function 60 Text formats 52 Text Rotation function 61 Transferring Text to fabric 38 Troubleshooting 90 Turning power on off 7 Typing text 46 U UNDER parameter 49 Underlining 58 Uppercase letters 46 USB port 2 9 V Vertical text style 58 W Washing garments with labels 38 Width function 56 WIDTH parameter 49 115 The following supplies and accessories are available for your P touch machine and can be ordered ACCESSORIES For USA Only directly from Brother should your retailer not stock them StockNo Description INDUSTRIAL SERIES Extra Strength Adhesive Tapes Super Adhesive Strength laminated tapes with twice the adhesive strength ideal for textured surfaces and harsh environments TZ S111 Black on Clear 1 4 6mm 15 99 TZ S121 Black on Clear 3 8 9mm 17 99 TZ S131 Black on Clear 1 2 12mm 18 99 TZ S135 White on Clear 1 2 12mm 18 99 TZ S141 Black on Clear 3 4 18mm 21 99 TZ S145 White on Clear 3 4 18mm 21 99 TZ S151 Black on Clear 1 24mm 25 99 TZ S155 White on Clear 1 24mm 25 99 TZ S161 Black on Clear 11 2 36mm 32 99 TZ S211 Black on White 1 4 6mm 15 99 TZ S221 17 99 TZ S231
129. ar con el idioma ingl s Si se introducen datos en otro idioma el c digo de barras no se leer correctamente Bases de datos Tenga presentes los puntos siguientes cuando utilice las funciones de base de datos de P touch Editor 3 2 Para averiguar los detalles generales consulte el Manual del usuario suministrado en el CD ROM de P touch Editor La funci n de base de datos del P touch Editor 3 2 Versi n para Windows utiliza unos archivos de base de datos compatibles con Microsoft Access 97 Si actualiza su versi n del P touch Editor 3 2 utilizando un programa disponible en el CD ROM P touch Editor ser compatible con Access 2000 Si el P touch Editor 3 2 no se actualiza para Access 2000 durante la instalaci n v ase el archivo Readme situado en Ptouch Editor Ac2k en el CD ROM y ejecute el programa En un PC que ejecute Windows O Adem s de los archivos mdb P touch Editor 3 2 puede importar archivos de otros tipos como csv Los archivos guardados como archivos csv con una aplicaci n como Microsoft Excel se pueden usar con P touch Editor Consulte el Manual del usuario suministrado en el CD ROM de P touch Editor 3 2 para obtener informaci n O Mediante la funci n disponible en Microsoft Access 97 los archivos de Excel se pueden vincular a archivos mdb Con esta funci n los datos que se cambien en Excel se actualizar n autom ticamente en P touch Editor Uso de P touch Quick Editor 0 00 00
130. ars if an AV label cassette i is installed when you try press This message appears if the tape cassette was changed while the computer was sending data to the P touch This message appears if a an extremely high voltage or extremely low voltage adaptor is being used e Limit te imirthenumberonlines number of lines in a text block to 16 Adjust the number of lines so that the block will not have more than 16 lines Limit the number of text blocks to 50 Recharge the battery or use the AC adaptor Type in some text before trying to perform any of these operations Delete some existing text before trying to add any more Install a tape cassette other than an AV label cassette before pressing Change the tape cassette before sending the data to the P touch Disconnect the adaptor and connect the adaptor designed exclusively for this machine 83 ERROR MESSAGE LIST ERROR MESSAGE CAUSE SOLUTION CHARGE BATTERIES e This message appears when the e Recharge the battery or rechargeable Ni MH battery has use the AC adaptor PT 9600 only reached a low voltage e This message appears if the tape e Close the compartment compartment cover is open cover CUTTER ERROR e This message appears if the cut Turn off the P touch and ter did not operate correctly then turn the P touch on again CLOSE CASSETTE COVER If the problem cannot be corrected contact your serv
131. as finished copying files to your computer Before you can use the program you must restart Windows or your computer Yes want to restart my computer now C No will restart my computer later Remove any disks from their drives and then click Finish to complete setup Seleccione Yes want to restart my computer now S deseo reiniciar mi equipo ahora o Yes restart immediately S reiniciar inmediatamente si el controlador de la impresora se ha instalado por separado haga clic en el bot n Finish para reiniciar el PC y extraiga el CD ROM del PC C mo sustituir o a adir un controlador de impresora USB Para sustituir o a adir un controlador de impresora USB Apague la unidad P touch y descon ctela del PC Inserte el disco CD ROM que se incluye en la unidad de CD ROM del PC Aparecer autom ticamente un cuadro de di logo que le permitir seleccionar lo que quiera instalar 13 Brother Setup Selectthe components that you wantto install N OTA m P touch Editor P touch Editor Ver 3 2 the printer driver and the manual will a be installed ER A t Sise selecciona Replace with new Brother PT 9600 3600 Sustituir por la nueva Brother PT 9600 3600 se borra el controlador de la impresora previamente instalado y se sustituye por el nuevo Seleccione esta opci n cuando actualice el P touch Quick Editor P touch Quick Editor and the printer driver will be in
132. automatically turn off O Press 3 to turn on or turn off the P touch Installing replacing a tape cassette e 0o0000000000000909090900909 TZ tape cassettes are available for this machine in a wide variety of types colors and sizes enabling you to make distinctive color coded and stylized labels AV label cassettes are also available for expanded addressing and filing capabilities This machine has been designed to allow you to change the cassettes quickly and easily O Press the cover release button and then lift open the tape compartment cover P touch 9600 E b jmd E jmd QD O em E 19 O Q D gt le o r Dd m 1 o B Ch 2 Getting Started P touch 3600 If a tape cassette is already installed and you wish to replace it remove it by pulling it straight up If the ink ribbon is loose in the tape cassette to be installed use your finger to wind the toothed wheel in the direction of the arrow on the cassette until there is no slack in the ribbon Also make sure that the end of the tape feeds under the tape guides t For stamp and AV label cassettes the tightening of the ink ribbon does not apply since they are not equipped with ink ribbons If you are using a new tape cassette provided with a stopper be sure to remove the stopper Insert the tape cassette firmly into the tape compartment making sure that the entire back of the cassette touches the bot
133. ay again fe Ch 3 Functions To print more stored Auto Format template files QQ Press MORE or until Y moves beside PRINT 03 04 EXIT i MENUYPRINT MORE CHANGE STYLE Width Size Length Margin Font B Press The PRINT screen appears in the display m the currently selected file num ber For a TZ tape template file PRINT TZ 00 VIDEO P FAVORITE SONGS Length Margin Font Width Size PRINT AV2067 T AV OO ADDRESS1 Y R Becker ABC Impo Length Margin Font Width Size Press Or until the file number con taining the text that you wish to print is dis played The file name is shown beside the file number and the text stored under the selected file number is shown in the bottom line NOTE t To see other parts of the selected text file press or t Auto Format template files of the same tape width are displayed grouped together Press the space bar so that Y appears to the right of the file name 78 For a TZ tape template file PRINT TZ 00 VIDEO D FAVORITE SONGS Length Margin Font Width Size PRINT AV2067 T AV 00O ADDRESSI1 V R Becker JABC Impo Length Margin Font Width Size Repeat steps and Y until Y appears to the right of all files to be printed Files marked with v will be printed If multiple files are to be printed follow steps and B to mark them with Y If only one file is to be printed step
134. bloque nuevo e Mantenga pulsada y pulse m La marca de bloque nuevo MJ aparecer al final del bloque Symbol Tecla 330 Adem s de las letras los s mbolos y los n meros de las teclas hay m s de 440 s mbolos e im genes adicionales disponibles con la funci n Symbol Despu s de a adir estos s mbolos o im genes en el texto se pueden borrar como cualquier otro car cter y a algunos se les puede aplicar formato mediante determinadas funciones de formato de texto consulte las p ginas 45 hasta 51 Para a adir un s mbolo o una imagen en el texto O Pulse 3 Una fila de s mbolos aparecer en la pantalla Para volver al texto en cualquier momento pulse O pulse Pulse o para seleccionar la categor a de s mbolos que desee y a continuaci n pulse O hasta que el s mbolo se visualice ampliado dentro del marco del centro de la pantalla Q Pulse El s mbolo se a ade al texto t Para escribir una serie de s mbolos mantenga pulsada antes de pulsar al Despu s para continuar afiadiendo s mbolos selecci nelos como se explica en el paso y mantenga pulsada mientras pulsa Pulse e despu s de seleccionar el ltimo s mbolo de la serie Para seleccionar un s mbolo tambi n se puede escribir el c digo correspondiente seg n se indica en la tabla de s mbolos disponibles Por ejemplo si se pulsa T se visualiza la categor a GARDENING y si a continuaci n se pulsa
135. c digos de barras con el par metro WIDTH de c digo de barras establecido como m nimo en SMALL porque de otra manera resultar dif cil leer los c digos ts El par metro CHECK DIGIT s lo esta disponible con los tipos CODE 39 y 1 2 5 Para introducir los datos del c digo de barras O Mantenga pulsada y pulse rz t Para cambiar los datos o los par metros de un c digo de barras que ya se ha a adido al texto sit e el cursor debajo de una mitad de la marca del c digo de barras II antes de mantener pulsada y pulsar tz Para salir de la funci n Barcode sin a adir un c digo de barras O pulse en cualquier momento mantenga pulsada y pulse gs Escriba los datos nuevos del c digo de barras o edite los antiguos Para cambiar la configuraci n del par metro de un c digo de barras Pulse O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el par metro que quiere cambiar t Para seleccionar el ajuste predeterminado pulse la barra de espacio t Para volver a los datos del c digo de barras sin cambiar los par metros pulse O mantenga pulsada y pulse zz Q Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado Q Repita los pasos Q y hasta que todos los par metros est n configurados como desee Pulse ZR Para a adir caracteres especiales a los c digos de barras s lo para los protocolos CODE39 o CODE128 Q Pulse O hasta que el cursor est debajo del car cter inmediatamente a la derecha de
136. cambiar el formato pulse Global O mantenga pulsada y pulse Funciones de formato de bloque code S La aplicaci n del formato con las funciones de Block Format permite cambiar la apariencia de cada bloque de texto de la etiqueta creado con la funci n New Block La etiqueta siguiente muestra c mo se pueden usar esas funciones todas juntas Los distintos bloques de esta etiqueta se crearon mediante la funci n New Block y el primer bloque de este texto conten a s lo una l nea el segundo 2 l neas y el tercero 1 l nea A continuaci n se aplicaron por separado ajustes diferentes a cada bloque mediante las funciones de Block Format Font Size Width Style1 Style2 Line Effects subrayado tachado Frame Text Alignment Block Length o Text Rotation Jazz Concert 10 12 02 S lo los ajustes de marco cuadrado 1 y marco redondo 2 se pueden seleccionar para la funci n Frame en el formato de bloque Para cambiar las funciones de Block Format Q Pulse O para situar el cursor en el bloque al que se va a dar un formato diferente Mantenga pulsada y pulse e Q Seleccione FONT SIZE WIDTH STYLE1 STYLE2 LINE EFFECTS FRAME ALIGNMENT B LENGTH o ROTATE y el ajuste que desee como se describe en las p ginas 45 a 54 El ajuste seleccionado s lo se aplica al bloque de texto en el que est situado el cursor 4 Home NOTA Para volver al texto sin cambiar
137. cance En estos campos se pueden escribir caracteres acentuados p gina 41 s mbolos p gina 41 c digos de barras p gina 42 sellos con la fecha consulte el manual de Funciones avanzadas e im genes de car cter definidas por el usuario consulte el manual de Funciones avanzadas Las plantillas Auto Format se pueden almacenar en la memoria para abrirlas y usarlas en otro momento Para obtener m s detalles sobre c mo se almacenan las plantillas Auto Format consulte la p gina 61 Para imprimir inmediatamente la etiqueta de la Mirror plantilla seleccionada pulse in Para cambiar el estilo del texto O Pulse O hasta que Y se desplace junto a CHANGE STYLE 4 New Block Pulse O hasta que se visualice el nombre del estilo de formato que desee En el lado derecho de la pantalla se puede ver una muestra Pulse la barra de espacio para seleccionar el ajuste predeteminado ORIGINAL O Pulse La pantalla MENU volver a aparecer en el visor Para imprimir una etiqueta mediante la plantilla seleccionada O Pulse O hasta que Y se desplace junto a PRINT Antes de imprimir la plantilla que se ha seleccionado al pulsar instale un casete de etiquetas AV del tipo adecuado Antes de imprimir la plantilla que se ha seleccionado al pulsar instale un casete de cinta TZ con la anchura de cinta especificada Pulse para imprimir la etiqueta En la pantalla apare
138. car el ajuste seleccionado o Pulse New Cancel Tecla cance La tecla Cancel se puede usar para salir de la mayoria de funciones y volver a la pantalla anterior sin cambiar el texto En la pantalla LCD pueden aparecer preguntas que solicitar n que confirme un comando especialmente cuando la funci n seleccionada vaya a borrar o afectar a los archivos En esos casos si se pulsa es como responder no Weill Para responder s Return m s arriba w Consulte tecla pulse Para salir de una funci n sin aplicar los cambios e Pulse Cancel Introducci n de texto Escribir texto para las etiquetas es casi lo mismo que utilizar una m quina de escribir o un PC Tecla Insert Normalmente se escribe el texto con el modo Insert es decir el texto que se escribe se inserta en un texto existente en la posici n del cursor No obstante al salir del modo Insert el texto que se haya escrito sustituir cualquier texto existente en la posici n del cursor Cuando la P touch est en modo Insert aparece el indicador Ins en el lado izquierdo de la pantalla Para entrar en el modo Insert e Pulse Aparecer el indicador Ins Para salir del modo Insert e Pulse El indicador Ins desaparece Barra de espacio La barra de espacio permite a adir espacios en blanco entre los caracteres del texto Es diferente de la tecla de flecha derecha gt que s lo desplaza el cursor
139. caracteres utilizan cantidades de espacio diferentes Para cambiar el ajuste de la funci n Font Block O Mantenga pulsada y pulse m O EMI 3 45 Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo Como el tama o del texto que se puede tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de formato imprimir depende de la anchura de la cinta la E tabla siguiente muestra el tama o m ximo del Pulse e hasta que se visualice texto que se puede usar con cada anchura de FONT El ajuste para el texto en la posici n ants actual del cursor se muestra en el lado Los tamafios de texto siguientes no se aplican al izquierdo de la pantalla y en el lado texto si se ha establecido la funci n Text derecho se puede ver una muestra Rotation Q Pulse O hasta que se visualice el Paral intas TZ valor deseado ara las cintas Tamafio de texto m ximo Anchura de la cinta en puntos os Sj aparece como el ajuste la funci n Font 1 4 pulgadas 6 mm ya se ha aplicado a una parte del texto actual a 3 8 pulgadas 9 mm una l nea del bloque actual si se han establecido las funciones Block Format o Global Format o a un bloque del texto si se ha establecido la funci n 3 4 pulgadas 18 mm Global Format Si se cambia el ajuste se 1 pulgada 24 mm cancelar el que se aplic previamente 1 2 pulgadas 12 mm Para devolver la funci n a su ajuste predeterminado HELSINKI pulse la barra de espacio Para etiquetas AV Tama
140. cer el mensaje COPIES 1 1 mientras la etiqueta se imprime La pantalla MENU volver a aparecer en el visor Para cambiar el texto que se ha introducido en la plantilla Pulse O hasta que Y se desplace junto a EDIT MORE Q Pulse y En la pantalla aparece el primer campo de la plantilla seleccionada B Repita el paso hasta que el texto est editado como desee La pantalla MENU volver a aparecer cuando se pulse f x tras la edici n del ltimo campo de la plantilla Para terminar la funci n Auto Format Pulse O hasta que Y se desplace junto a EXIT J 9 Pulse El mensaje OK TO EXIT AUTO FORMAT aparece en la pantalla 9 Pulse a El texto que se estuviera visualizando antes de usar la funci n Auto Format volver a aparecer en el visor t La plantilla que se utiliz por primera vez Si se selecciona esta plantilla se visualiza el texto que se escribi en ella en su momento Los tama os de las etiquetas se indican en la unidad de medida seleccionada actualmente pulgadas o cent metros La unidad de medida se puede cambiar con las funciones de Configuraci n Consulte la p gina 65 Una plantilla Auto Format almacenada en la memoria se puede abrir y volver a usar Para obtener m s informaci n sobre la recuperaci n de las plantillas de Auto Format almacenadas consulte la p gina 62 Para salir de la funci n Auto Format sin usar la plantilla mantenga pulsada y pulse
141. cessory Items Consumable and Accessory Items include but are not limited to label cassettes cutters stamps power adapters cases and batteries e Except as otherwise provided herein Brother warrants that the Machine and the accompanying Consumable and Accessory ltems will be free from defects in materials and workmanship when used under normal conditions This warranty applies only to products purchased and used in the United States For products purchased in but used outside the United States this warranty covers only warranty service within the United States and does not include shipping outside the United States What is the length of the Warranty Period s e Machines have a two stage warranty 90 days from the original purchase date and an additional warranty up to one year from the original purchase date e Consumable and Accessories Items accompanying the Machine have a one stage warranty 90 Days from the original purchase date What is NOT covered This warranty does not cover 1 Physical damage to this Product 2 Damage caused by improper installation improper or abnormal use misuse neglect or accident including but not limited to transporting this Product without the proper preparation and or packaging 3 Damage caused by another device or software used with this Product including but not limited to damage resulting from use of non Brother brand parts and Consumable and Accessory Items 4 Consum
142. ci n vertical con el sello mirando hacia abajo No deje el sello de lado o inclinado t Guarde los soportes de la pel cula de sello y los casetes de pel cula de sello en una ubicaci n donde no est n expuestos a altas temperaturas humedad alta o luz solar directa Fijaci n de la etiqueta de identificaci n O Inserte un casete de cinta TZ en el compartimento de la cinta Use cinta de 1 2 pulgada 12 mm de ancho para crear etiquetas de identificaci n para un sello de tama o M y use cinta de 3 4 de pulgada 18 mm de ancho para crear etiquetas para un sello de tama o L Mirror O Pulse para imprimir la etiqueta de identificaci n Q Despu s de separar la etiqueta f jela al extremo del soporte de manera que el borde inferior est en el mismo lado del soporte del sello como el logotipo gemelo obtenido Sellado Puesto que la duraci n y la cantidad de presi n con la que se debe apretar el soporte del sello depende de la cantidad de tinta en el soporte primero practique el sellado sobre un trozo de papel que no sirva 36 Podr usar un soporte de pel cula de sello aproximadamente de 300 a 500 veces aunque se pierde un poco de tinta cuando se cambia la pel cula del sello La vida til del soporte de pel cula de sello variar en funci n del tama o y el grosor de los caracteres de si se usa un patr n de sombreado etc t Despu s de sellar espere hasta que la tinta se seque totalmente antes
143. ci n del controlador de la impresora MAC OS X 10 1 a 10 2 3 Para instalar el controlador de la impresora Con la P touch y el Macintosh apagados conecte la P touch al PC mediante el cable de interfaz USB que se incluye como se describe en la p gina 3 Deje la P touch apagada Encienda el Macintosh Inserte el disco CD ROM que se incluye en la unidad de CD ROM del PC m w A Computer Home Favorites Applications 3 Mac OS 9 Mac OS X Haga doble clic en la carpeta Mac OS X para abrirla 600 Mac OS X m T Computer Home 3 P touch Quick Editor P touch Editor 3 2 Driver Installer pkg Haga doble clic en el icono Driver Installer en la carpeta que aparecer Se iniciar el insta lador y aparecer un cuadro de di logo comunic ndole que para instalar software se requiere contrase a de administrador Install PT 9600 Driver Authorization You need an Administrator password to install the software O Click the lock to make changes j rem 2 Q Haga clic en 8 Aparecer el cuadro de di logo de autenticaci n Install PT 9600 Driver Authorization You need an Administrator password to install the software Authenticate You need an administrator name and password F or phrase to make changes in Installer j Name user Password or phrase CTA SS l caps loc Click the lock to make changes OQ Teclee el n
144. cionado Para quitar el s mbolo que haya sido a adido haga clic sobre la flecha al lado del bot n de s mbolos y a continuaci n haga clic sobre Delete en el men desplegable que aparece 30 Introducci n de texto Al teclear el texto su tama o de ajustar auto m ticamente para que el texto entero entre en el rea de impresi n O Haga clic en la vista de etiqueta y a conti nuaci n teclee el texto a oM EON d ere e m B ed S av 9 as Ani pale E X J REA E CM Qs AV1957 Return Addre vir Ke x dad d Lu Para crear una nueva l nea de texto presione la tecla Enter en el teclado Para importar texto desde una aplicaci n diferente seleccione el texto deseado en la otra aplicaci n y a continuaci n o bien presione las teclas de acceso directo designadas o bien arrastre el texto desde la otra aplicaci n Las teclas de acceso directo para importar texto pueden especificarse haciendo clic con el bot n derecho del rat n sobre la ventana del P touch AV Editor y haciendo clic despu s sobre Options en el men que aparece Los diez textos impresos m s recientemente son guardados autom ticamente para uso posterior Para utilizar texto de la lista Text History haga clic sobre bot n de historial de texto y a continuaci n haga clic sobre el texto deseado Para formatear el texto Se puede formatear todo el texto f cilmente cambiando la fuente el estilo y la
145. clicking Win dows or holding down the Control key and click ing Macintosh in the label view Length 1 03 Width 1 la le Q In the Text Settings Properties select the desired text formats Ch 2 Getting Started O Click in the label view and then type or import the text Typing in the label view shows the text as it will appear when it is printed However by clicking the Change View button the text is displayed in the text box giving you a clearer view of the entered text Importing text Text that has already been typed in another appli cation can easily be imported into the label To import text O Select the desired text in the other applica tion Import the text into the label layout either by pressing the designated shortcut keys Windows only or by dragging it from the other application Windows9 only To specify the shortcut keys used to import text right click in the label view or text box and then click Options in the menu that appears In the Options dialog box that appears select the desired shortcut keys for importing text Using the Text History list The 10 most recently printed texts are automati cally stored for future use To use text from the Text History list O Click the Text History button f w to dis l play the Text History list O Click the desired text NOTE Text selected from the Text History list replaces all text
146. d qo Choose Alias Folder A Pre Installation Summary e Click Done to quit the installer Installing Install Complete Haga clic en el bot n Done y reinicie el ordenador Instalaci n del software P touch Quick Editor El software P touch Quick Editor ofrece un acceso r pido a las opciones de dise o de etiquetas m s sencillas para facilitar la introducci n de los textos y la impresi n instant nea de las etiquetas Instale el software P touch Quick Editor en el Macintosh como se indica a continuaci n Con un Mac OS anterior a OS X Q Con la P touch y el Macintosh apagados conecte la P touch al PC mediante el cable de interfaz USB que se incluye como se describe en la p gina 3 Deje la P touch apagada Encienda el Macintosh Inserte el disco CD ROM que se incluye en la unidad de CD ROM del PC O 5 P touch HE Al Mac 05 9 Mac QS X O Haga doble clic en la carpeta Mac OS 9 para abrirla P touch Quick Editor Installer P touch Editor 3 2 Q Haga doble clic en el icono del instalador de P touch Quick Editor en la carpeta que aparecer El instalador se iniciar FEE HE PE HE RRR RH RRR RH RE RH HRT P touch Quick Editor EE FE HE HE HE PE HE HE FE FE HE AT RAH RHETT P touch Quick Editor is an application that allows you to create labels quickly and easily Installation Start up the installer and then follow the messages that ap
147. da para que quede bien lisa antes de transferir el texto Q Coloque la etiqueta sobre la prenda en el lugar donde desee que se transfiera el texto O Ajuste la plancha en algod n de 302 a 356 F de 150 a 180 C y a continuaci n presione sobre la etiqueta con la plancha unos 15 segundos Q Espera a que la transferencia planchada se enfr e unos 60 segundos y a continuaci n extraiga con cuidado el papel posterior 34 NOTA t El tejido blanco de algod n 100 con una superficie lisa plana es el mejor para las transferencias de plancha Tambi n se pueden hacer transferencias en tejidos de lino 100 o mezclas de algod n poli ster mientras la superficie sea lisa plana La etiqueta no se adherir correctamente sobre un tejido con una superficie rugosa como pelo o denim o sobre una superficie impermeable Los materiales sensibles al calor como el nailon el acetato o fibras similares tampoco son adecuados porque se pueden estropear cuando se presione con la plancha a alta temperatura No mueva la plancha cuando presione porque la etiqueta se podr a desplazar fuera de la posici n deseada Presione la plancha directamente sobre el tejido Despu s de extraer la cinta posterior la etiqueta transferida puede tener un aspecto brillante Adem s pueden aparecer manchas blancas sobre la etiqueta si se toc mientras se extra a la cinta posterior Estas manchas se eliminan planchando la etiqueta con un trozo
148. de E M ak la PT 3600 Las teclas de funci n Auto Format w y 5 hacen que la creaci n de etiquetas y sellos sea r pida y f cil Despu s de seleccionar una de las varias plantillas preformateadas y escribir el texto en cada uno de sus campos el estilo general de la etiqueta se puede cambiar f cilmente seleccionando uno de los seis formatos de estilo disponibles y la etiqueta ya estar lista para imprimir TZ La bes Tape c en 55 Los dos juegos de plantillas disponibles le permitir n crear etiquetas y sellos para cubrir una amplia gama de opciones desde sobres con direcciones hasta la identificaci n de disquetes o cintas de audio y v deo Las 15 plantillas disponibles al pulsar Bem en la PT 3600 se han dise ado para las etiquetas AV de tama o espec fico que le permiten crear varias copias de etiquetas de direcciones y archivado TZ Tape r pida y f cilmente Al pulsar en la PT 3600 quedar disponible una gama m s amplia de plantillas 39 con la PT 9600 31 con la PT 3600 para usarlas con cinta TZ La anchura y la longitud de cada etiqueta o sello impresos desde una plantilla est n preestablecidas Despu s de escribir el texto es muy f cil seleccionar un estilo diferente Para seleccionar una plantilla preformateada O Mantenga pulsada e Y pulse Del Tape Para la PT 3600 pulse o t a plantilla que se utiliz por primera vez Si s
149. de desee fijarla y de manera que el texto impreso se lea correctamente Cubra la etiqueta con otro trozo de tela y ajuste la plancha a una temperatura media alta de 320 a 356 F de 160 a 180 C para presionar con fuerza de 10 a 30 segundos Para obtener m s detalles consulte las instrucciones que se incluyen con el casete de cinta de tela Montaje de sellos e 0o00000000000009009 0900909 Adem s de etiquetas la P touch se puede utilizar para crear sellos personales y pre tintados para varios usos se necesita el kit de sello opcional Disefie sus sellos personalizados mediante una de las plantillas de sello preformateadas y despu s fije la matriz del sello impreso en un soporte de pel cula de sello autotintada O Instale un casete de pel cula de sello y despu s d formato al texto del sello de una de las maneras siguientes a Seleccione una plantilla de sello preformateada entre las que se encuentran disponibles con la funci n Auto Format consulte la p gina 55 b Escriba el texto y ajuste la funci n Stamp en ON consulte la p gina 55 NOTA Si se utiliza una plantilla de sello de Auto Format no es necesario ajustar la funci n Stamp en ON Q Imprima la matriz del sello y extraiga el papel posterior O Extraiga el marco de alrededor del tamp n de la tinta del soporte del sello un extremo cada vez y extraiga el protector que cubre el tamp n de la tinta t Si el soporte del sello ya c
150. de direcciones de remitente AV1957 3 4 x 2 1 4 pulgadas 19 mm x 57 mm Etiquetas de carpetas de archivos AV1789 5 8 x 3 1 2 pulgadas 17 mm x 89 mm 384 puntos altura 360 ppp resoluci n Corte completo autom tico Medio corte autom tico 9 1 3 An x 11 15 16 Pr x 4 Al pulgadas 237 An x 302 Pr x 101 Al mm 4 41 lbs 2 kg 10 fuentes integradas Helsinki Brussels US San Diego Florida Brunei Bold Los Angeles Bermuda Script Istanbul y Letter Gothic AUTO m s 24 tama os en puntos 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 28 32 36 40 48 56 64 72 y 76 puntos Normal Bold Outline Solid Shadow Inverted Italic y Vertical M ximo l nea de texto de 4 1 0 metros M ximo 16 l neas M ximo 50 bloques Aproximadamente 10 000 caracteres 2 9 Printed in China LA8622001
151. de tocarlo para evitar los borrones Si el soporte del sello no se presiona recto hacia abajo el sello puede quedar borroso No presione el soporte del sello con fuerza excesiva No selle sobre superficies h medas pegajosas irregulares o desiguales Selle s lo sobre papel La tinta no se secar sobre transparencias de pl stico para proyector y otros objetos impermeables a la tinta Si un sello creado con una pel cula de sello nueva queda desva do o incompleto incluso despu s de presionar con fuerza el soporte del sello durante 30 segundos sustituya el soporte del sello por uno nuevo No intente rellenar el soporte del sello Ejecuci n de operaciones b sicas Las teclas siguientes son necesarias para utilizar la mayor a de funciones Teclas de flecha La pantalla LCD de la m quina puede mostrar tres filas de 19 caracteres no obstante el texto que se puede crear puede tener hasta 1000 caracteres Podr revisar y modificar el texto mediante las cuatro teclas de flecha Ed Ems y i para desplazar el cursor y ver las distintas partes del texto en la pantalla Las teclas de flecha tambi n se usan para seleccionar varias funciones y ajustes tecla de flecha izquierda Para desplazar el cursor un car cter a la izquierda O Pulse una vez Si se pulsa esta tecla cuando el cursor esta al principio de una linea que sigue a otra el cursor se desplazara hasta el extremo de la linea anterior
152. dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help The enclosed interface cable should be used in order to ensure compliance with the limits for a Class B digital device Changes or modi cations not expressly approved by Brother Industries Ltd could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Patent numbers and patent publication numbers which are related to this product are as below USP4839742 USP4976558 USP5009530 USP5120147 USP4927278 USP4983058 USP5069557 QUICK REFERENCE Entering text Entering Exiting Insert mode E Adding an uppercase letter i PP sit OF S Desired character Adding a series of uppercase letters enter Type character ing Caps mode Adding a lowercase let s OF desired character ter in Caps mode Adding an accented Type character character OR Code Symbol Ue letter OR cg gt Accent or to select gt m P he OF fa fO select category gt or to select symbol gt to select letter gt m A Adding a symbol Block Ang seeing E Adding a new block Adding a barcode code e Type barcode data gt ed Adding a special char me smol t or to select special character gt acter to the barcode be p se Changing a barcode Code inset z ori to select parameter gt or to select parameter setting gt Editing text
153. djusted for stamps Mirror Q Press to cut print resolution out of the stamp stencil film Q After the stamp stencil film is cut off remove the backing paper from the stamp stencil film and affix it to the ink pad of a stamp film holder Refer to Assembling stamps on page 39 65 Ch 3 Functions Auto Format function eas ai G 6 AV 7 Tz the PT 3600 The Auto Format function keys and 5 make creating labels and stamps quick and easy After simply selecting one of the various pre formatted templates and typing text into each of its fields the overall style of the label can easily be changed by selecting one of the six available style formats and then the label is ready to be printed AV Labels Tap pe a c on The two sets of templates available allow you to create labels and stamps for a variety of needs from addressing envelopes to identifying floppy disks or audio and video cassettes The 15 tem plates available by pressing lt on the PT 3600 are designed specifically hee the pre sized AV labels which allow you to quickly and eas ily create multiple copies of address and filing labels By pressing on the PT 3600 a wider variety of templates 39 with the PT 9600 31 with the PT 3600 are available for use with TZ tape The width and length of each label or stamp printed from a template is preset For samples of the available templates refer to p
154. do del texto de la etiqueta un s mbolo elegido entre las varias fuentes de s mbolo instaladas Para a adir un s mbolo en el texto O Windows Haga clic con el bot n derecho en la vista de etiqueta o un cuadro de texto seleccione Symbols en el men que aparecer y haga clic en Insert Change Aparecer el cuadro de di logo Input Symbol Macintosh Mantenga pulsada la tecla de control y haga clic en la vista de etiqueta o en el cuadro de texto seleccione Symbols en el men que aparecer y haga clic en Insert Changel Aparecer un cuadro de di logo que mostrar los s mbolos Symbol Font Symbol List En la lista Symbol Font seleccione la fuente de s mbolo que desee O En la vista Symbol List seleccione el s mbolo que desee Q Haga clic en el bot n OK El s mbolo seleccionado se afiade a la izquierda del texto Kg Si ya se ha a adido un s mbolo en el texto se s mbolo que se acaba de sustituir por el seleccionar Cambio del color del fondo El color del fondo de la composici n se puede cambiar seg n sus preferencias Para cambiar el color del fondo Windows Haga clic con el bot n derecho en la vista de etiqueta o en el cuadro de texto seleccione Background Color en el men que aparecer y haga clic en el color que desee de la lista Macintosh Mantenga pulsada la tecla de control y haga clic en la vista de etiqueta o en el cuadro de texto s
155. dth Size O Press or until the desired setting is displayed NOTE To return the function to its default setting 000000001 press the space bar O Press to apply the setting To apply several Setup settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function then pressing t or to select the desired setting Press r only after the necessary functions have been set ERROR MESSAGE LIST ERROR MESSAGE LIST ERRORMESSAGE CAUSE SOLUTION This message appears if 16 lines 16 LINE LIMIT OE 50 LINE LIMIT REACHED BATTERIES WEAK PT 9600 only BUFFER EMPTY BUFFER FULL E CAN T FEED AV LABELS CASSETTE CHANGED CHANGE ADAPTOR have already been entered in a text s of text when you This message appears if you delete text causing the number of lines in a block to exceed the 16 line limit This message appears if 50 text blocks have already been entered when you hold down and press e This message appears when the installed Ni MH battery has become weak This message appears if no text has been typed in when you try to print or use the Numbering function Repeat Printing func tion or Layout Preview function This message appears if you try to add a character a space a new line a new block a sym bol an accented character or a barcode after the maximum number of characters has already been entered This message appe
156. e O EN posici n actual del cursor se muestra en el lado izquierdo de la pantalla y en el lado derecho se puede ver una muestra O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de formato Pulse O hasta que se visualice FRAME El ajuste para el texto en la ye Sj aparece como el ajuste la funci n Line Effects ya se ha aplicado a una l nea del bloque de texto actual si se han establecido las funciones Block Format o Global Format o al bloque en el texto actual si se ha establecido la funci n Global Format Si se cambia el ajuste se cancelar el que se aplic previamente Para devolver el valor predeterminado a la funci n OFF pulse la barra de espacio Para volver al texto sin cambiar el formato pulse O mantenga pulsada y pulse Global Block Line iif 6 jols O Pulse para aplicar la configuraci n Para aplicar varios ajustes de formato al mismo tiempo contin e pulsando O para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse Home da para seleccionar el ajuste que desee Pulse S lo despu s de configurar las funciones necesarias Funci n Frame FRAME Con la funci n Frame podr elegir entre una variedad de marcos y marcadores para destacar determinadas partes o todo el texto de la etiqueta Si se selecciona otro ajuste que no sea OFF para el text
157. e selecciona esta plantilla se visualiza el texto que se escribi en ella en su momento t Los tama os de las etiquetas se indican en la unidad de medida seleccionada actualmente pulgadas o cent metros La unidad de medida se puede cambiar con las funciones de Configuraci n Consulte la p gina 65 t plantilla Auto Format Para obtener m s informaci n sobre la recuperaci n de las plantillas p gina 62 de Auto Format almacenadas consulte la p gina 62 O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el nombre de la plantilla que desee NOTA Para seleccionar el ajuste predeteminado ADDRESS 1 pulse la barra de espacio 56 t Para seleccionar un campo diferente pulse Q Pulse Q Pulse d Se visualizar el primer campo de la plantilla seleccionada Home o hasta que se visualice el campo deseado ts Para seleccionar otra plantilla pulse cama pulse O hasta que Y se desplace a CANCEL EDITING y a continuaci n pulse J New Block Para escribir texto en la plantilla O Para cada campo escriba el texto y a 4 continuaci n pulse y Cuando se pulse sw tras escribir el texto del ltimo campo aparecer la pantalla MENU en el visor ts Si se pulsa mientras se visualiza el ltimo campo aparecer el primer campo Si se pulsa mientras se visualiza el ltimo campo aparecer la pantalla MENU Para volver al primer campo mientras se visualiza la pantalla MENU pulse
158. e 54 Character styles 57 58 CHECK DIGIT parameter 49 Cleaning Print head 92 Rollers 92 Clear function 51 Clear key 51 Clearing display 51 CODABAR special characters 99 Code key 45 CODE 128 special characters 99 CODE39 special characters 99 Computer connecting to 8 Connecting AC adaptor 7 To computer 8 Copies 70 Cover release button 2 Creating New block 47 New line 47 Stamps 65 Cursor 44 Custom stamps 39 Customized stamps 65 Cutting tape 68 70 D Default settings Auto Cut 69 Auto Format 66 Block Length 64 Block Margin 64 Font 54 Frame 60 Line Effects 59 Mirror Printing 65 Numbering 71 Repeat Printing 70 Size 56 Stamp 65 Style 2 58 Style1 57 Tape Length 63 Tape Margin 62 Text Alignment 61 Text Rotation 61 Width 57 Delete key 51 Deleting File from memory 74 Text 51 Text and formats 51 Text lines 51 Description of machine 2 Display clearing 51 Displaying text 44 Drying garments with labels 38 E EAN128 special characters 99 Editing Text 51 Emphasizing 59 Ending line of text 47 Entering Accented characters 47 48 Barcodes 49 Blank space 46 Capital letters 46 Special characters 47 Symbols or pictures 48 Text 46 Uppercase letters 46 Erasing File from memory 74 Text 51 Text and formats 51 Text lines 51 Error messages 83 F Fabric tape 39 Feed amp Cut key 70 Font function 54 Format functions Block 53 Global 52 Format templates 66 Formatting Entire text 52 Text
159. e separar despu s de la impresi n Si la casilla de verificaci n Auto Cut est desmarcada la cadena de etiquetas s lo se separar cuando se hayan impreso todas las etiquetas Mirror Printing s lo para cinta TZ Esta opci n permite imprimir el texto en sentido inverso y es perfecta para fijarlo en el interior de ventanas Copies Esta opci n permite especificar el n mero de copias que se imprimir n O Windows Haga clic en el bot n OK para iniciar la impresi n Macintosh Haga clic en el bot n Print La composici n se imprimir Si quiere empezar a imprimir sin cambiar las opciones de impresi n haga clic en el bot n Print Ed gt o haga clic en la flecha junto al bot n Print y despu s en Print C mo ocultar mostrar P touch Quick Editor s lo Windows Para ocultar P touch Quick Editor haga clic en el bot n Hide 4 Para volver a mostrar P touch Quick Editor haga clic en su icono de la bandeja del sistema a la derecha de la barra de tareas C mo salir de P touch Quick Editor Para salir de P touch Quick Editor En un PC que ejecute Windows Lleve a cabo una de las acciones siguientes O Haga clic con el bot n derecho en el icono P touch Quick Editor de la bandeja del sistema y haga clic en Exit en el men que aparecer O Haga clic con el bot n derecho en la vista de etiqueta o en el cuadro de texto y haga clic en Exit en el men que aparece En un PC Macin
160. e to the P touch AY Editor Setup program This f program will install P touch AV Editor on your computer Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Nextto continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law Ch 2 Getting Started t To install just the printer driver click the lower button Driver With Windows XP a message appears informing you that the printer driver has passed compatibility tests and that the Continue Anyway button should be clicked if a warning message appears Click the OK button IMPORTANT This printer driver has passed compatibility tests If your hardware wizard displays a warning message please select Continue Anyway to complete the software installation The first Driver Setup dialog box appears allowing you to select whether the P touch will be connected through the USB port or the RS 232C port Continue with the procedure in Installing the USB printer driver on page 17 To install the serial printer driver refer to the Advanced Functions booklet Driver will be installed Sel
161. e visualice el valor deseado NOTA Para devolver el valor predeterminado a la funci n 000000001 pulse la barra de espacio 67 O Pulse para aplicar la configuraci n Para aplicar varios ajustes de Configuraci n al mismo tiempo contin e pulsando O para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse f o para seleccionar el ajuste que se desee Pulse ue s lo despu s de configurar las funciones necesarias 66 SOLUCI N DE PROBLEMAS SOLUCI N DE PROBLEMAS Problema Soluci n 1 Despu s de poner en marcha la m quina Compruebe que el adaptador de CA est la pantalla sigue en blanco o muestra conectado caracteres extrafios e Compruebe que la pila recargable NI MH est insertada correctamente S lo PT 9600 e Para reiniciar la m quina PT 3600 desenchufe el adaptador de CA d jelo desenchufado un minuto y a continuaci n ench felo otra vez s lo PT 9600 pulse el bot n de reinicio que est en el compartimento de las pilas en la parte inferior de la m quina x Se borrar n el texto y los formatos de la pantalla reinicio 2 La m quina no imprime o imprime Compruebe que el casete de cinta se ha caracteres difuminados insertado correctamente Si el casete de cinta est vac o sustit yalo por uno nuevo Compruebe que la tapa del compartimento de la cinta est cerrada Compruebe que el cable de interfaz se ha conectado correctamente
162. ead can be cleaned more easily if the optional print head cleaning cassette TZ CL6 is used The print head can also be cleaned by pressing amp with no tape cassette installed 92 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 The tape is not ejected correctly after Turn off the machine open the tape com being automatically cut partment cover and remove the tape cas sette if one is installed Using a cotton swab clean off the metal piece in the exit slot to the left of cutter Cotton swab Metal piece Area to be cleaned 9 The cutter does not cut correctly Change the HALF CUTTER setting Refer to page 82 The cutter may be dull Contact your ser vice representative 95 MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS HARDWARE Power supply 24VDC 1 5A AC adapter AD9000 PT 9600 only Rechargeable Ni MH battery Input device Keyboard PT 9600 68 keys PT 3600 58 keys LCD 24 x 119 dots Caps Alt and other indicators with screen backlight PT 9600 only Print tape TZ tape is available in the following six widths 1 4 6 mm 3 8 9 mm 1 2 12 mm 3 4 18 mm I 24 mm 11 2 36 mm AV labels are available in the following three types AV 2067 Address labels 3 4 x 2 5 8 20 mm x 67 mm AV1957 Return address labels 3 4 x 2 1 4 19 mm x 57 mm AV1789 File folder labels 5 8 x 3 1 2 17 mm x 89 mm Print head 384 dots height 360 dpi resolution Tape cutter Automatic full cut Auto
163. ears allow ing you to select whether to replace add or delete the PT 9600 3600 printer driver Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 x Brother PT 9600 is currently installed Replace wit T 3600 pla C Add Brother PT 9600 a IN C Delete Brother PT 9600 Warning Do not connect or turn on the Brother PT 9600 until you are directed to Make your selection and then click Next Setup will begin 36 appears asking for confirmation to delete all PT 9600 3600 printer drivers Confirmation x 2 All Brother PT 9600 printers will be deleted OK to delete Q Click the Yes button A dialog box appears indicating that the printer drivers have been deleted Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 xi Brother PT 9600 was correctly deleted Click Finish to quit setup Q Click the Finish button If a dialog box appears explaining that the computer should be restarted select the option for restarting the computer and then click the Finish button On a Macintosh Computer Uninstall the P touch Editor 3 2 software the P touch Quick Editor software or the PT 9600 3600 printer driver from a Macintosh as described below Before deleting the printer driver be sure that the P touch is turned off and disconnected from the computer With a Mac OS before OS X To uninstall the software and printer driver O Drag the following to the Trash icon e P touch Edito
164. ecte la P touch al ordenador utilizando el cable de interfaz USB incluido como se describe en la p gina 3 y despu s encienda la P touch 22 Selecci n de la PT 9600 3600 como Impresora Para seleccionar la impresora Con un Mac OS anterior a OS X O Encienda la P touch 9600 3600 Despliegue el men Apple y seleccione Chooser Selector para ver la ventana del selector Chooser Connect to AdobePS E FaxPrint LaserWriter 3 PSPrinter PT 9600 amp Active AppleTalk Q Inactive Q En la lista de la izquierda haga clic en el icono de PT 9600 3600 A continuaci n seleccione la impresora adecuada en la lista de la derecha O Cierre la ventana del confirmar la configuraci n Chooser para Con Mac OS X 10 1 a 10 2 3 O Encienda la P touch 9600 3600 Haga doble clic en la carpeta Applications del Macintosh HD para abrirla e Q Haga doble clic en la carpeta Utilities para abrirla o Haga doble clic en Print Center Centro de impresi n para iniciarlo Si no se han afiadido impresoras aparecer un mensaje que permite a adir impresoras a la lista Haga clic en el bot n Add 5600 Printer List o Name atus T Kind PT 9600 Delete Add Printer Q Haga clic en el bot n Add Printer Aparecer una lista de las impresoras USB detectadas Q Seleccione PT 9600 3600 en la lista de USB y haga clic en el bot
165. ecttype of connection cable Connection Cable Serial cable SS SS ee i Cancel C USB cable t To install the P touch Editor 3 2 software click the upper button P touch Editor Continue with the procedure in Installing the P touch Edi tor 3 2 software on page 10 Welcome Welcome to the P touch Editor Setup program This program will install P touch Editor on your computer Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Nextto continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law j Cancel To install the P touch Quick Editor software click the second button from the top P touch Quick Editor Continue with the procedure in Installing the P touch Quick Editor software on page 12 Welcome x Welcome to the P touch Quick Editor Setup program f This program will install P touch Quick Editor on your computer Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Nextto continue with the
166. ed letter in the accented character and then press or until the desired accented character is displayed enlarged within the frame in the middle of the display O Press Js The accented character is added to the text To type in a series of accented characters hold down before pressing adding accented characters by selecting them as explained in step and holding down while pressing M Press just after selecting the last accented character in the series Ch 3 Functions Barcode key cose 5 The Barcode function which enables barcodes to be printed as part of labels is one of this machine s most advanced features L 30mm 30mm ii NOTE t This section will explain how to enter a barcode into your text It is not intended as a compre hensive introduction to the concept of barcod ing For more detailed information please consult one of the many reference books avail able t Since this machine is not specifically designed for special barcode label making some bar code readers may not be able to read the labels t Barcodes should be printed on white labels with black ink The various barcode parameters enable you to create more customized barcodes CODE 39 1 2 5 EAN13 EAN8 UPC A UPC E CODABAR EAN128 CODE128 WIDTH LARGE MEDIUM SMALL bar width EXTRA SMALL UNDER numbers printed below barcode PROTOCOL ON OFF OFF ON The defa
167. eing applied at the same time Press or until UNITS is already dis played 01 07 9 UNITS 2 inch To apply several Setup settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function then pressing t or to select the desired setting p 8 8 only after the necessary functions have Length Margin Font Width Size Press f w O Press or until the desired setting is displayed been set NOTE To return the function to its default setting inch press the space bar O Press to apply the setting NOTE To change the CONTRAST setting The CONTRAST function enables you to make the LCD display lighter or darker O Hold down and press 5 O 2 D gt 2 c o pe 3 D p o To apply several Setup settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function then pressing f or to select the desired setting Only after the necessary functions have Press been set To change the LANGUAGE setting The LANGUAGE function allows you to select whether the menus settings and messages will appear in English or French 80 This step may be skipped if settings for several Setup functions are being applied at the same time Press or until CONTRAST is dis played 03 07 4 CONTRAST Ins 2 0 Length Margin Font Width Size O Press or until the desired setting is displayed NOTE To return the function to its defa
168. eleccione Background Color en el men que aparecer y haga clic en el color que desee de la lista NOTA Para seleccionar un color que no est entre los que se enumeran seleccione User Settings Windows o User Settings Macintosh desde el subment Background Color cree el color que desee en el cuadro de dialogo que aparecera y haga clic en el bot n OK Visualizaci n del texto Las composiciones que son demasiado largas para encajar en la pantalla se pueden ver haciendo clic en el bot n Arrange amp para desplazarse al lado izquierdo central y derecho de la composici n con cada clic del bot n Si la vista de etiqueta o el cuadro de texto se ha desplazado de la barra de herramientas se acoplar antes de desplazar la visualizaci n 28 Impresi n Antes de imprimir las etiquetas se pueden seleccionar ciertas opciones de impresi n Para imprimir una etiqueta O Haga clic en la flecha junto al bot n Print 5H para ver el men desplegable Haga clic en Print Options Aparecer el cuadro de di logo Print A x Options Mirror Printing Number 1 T Copies owes Q Seleccione los ajustes de impresi n que desee Auto Cut Esta opci n permite seleccionar si la etiqueta se separa autom ticamente o no despu s de la impresi n Cuando imprima varias copias de etiquetas AV con la casilla de verificaci n Auto Cut seleccionada cada etiqueta s
169. elera e Icono PT 9600 3600 para borrar el controlador de la impresora e Icono de extensi n USB PT 9600 3600 para borrar el controlador de la impresora O En la Carpeta del Sistema abra la carpeta Preferences Q Arrastre lo siguiente al icono de la Papelera e Icono de P touch Editor 3 2 Prefs para el software P touch Editor 3 2 e Icono de P touch Quick Editor Prefs para el software P touch Quick Editor e Icono PT 9600 3600 Prefs controlador de la impresora para el Con Mac OS X 10 1 a 10 2 3 Para desinstalar el software P touch Editor 3 2 O Haga doble clic en la carpeta Applications del Macintosh HD para abrirla Haga doble clic en la carpeta P touch Editor 3 2 para abrirla O Haga doble clic en la carpeta Uninstall P touch Q Haga doble clic en el icono Uninstall P touch en la carpeta que aparecer Se iniciar el desinstalador O Haga clic en el bot n Uninstall Cuando el P touch Editor 3 2 se haya eliminado aparecer un cuadro de di logo que indicar que la desinstalaci n ha terminado Haga clic en el bot n Quit Para desinstalar el software P touch Quick Editor O Haga doble clic en la carpeta Applications del Macintosh HD para abrirla Haga doble clic en la carpeta P touch Quick Editor para abrirla P touch Haga doble clic en el icono Uninstall P touch en la carpeta que aparecer Se iniciar el desinstalador e O Haga doble clic en la carpeta Uninstall o
170. en el bot n izquierdo del rat n El cursor parpadea en el rea de composici n para indicar que ya se puede escribir el texto 2 P touch Editor Layoutl Ibl E Eile Edit View Insert Format Layout Window Help oela se el ol TRAR DA Date Time E Eile Edit View Insert Format Layout Window Help peaa amp lra Aale e e TIE oos a s Date Time For Help press Fl O Para crear una l nea nueva de texto pulse la tecla Intro del teclado NOTA t Con P touch Editor 3 2 el texto siempre se escribe en modo Insert El modo de sobreescribir no se puede utilizar para escribir texto Para cambiar la fuente y el tama o del texto haga clic en el icono adecuado en el dique de propiedades y seleccione los ajustes que desee en el Properties que aparecer Para obtener m s informaci n consulte Lectura del Manual del usuario en la p gina 23 Notas sobre el uso C digos de barras Tenga presentes los puntos siguientes cuando utilice P touch Editor 3 2 para imprimir c digos de barras O Los c digos de barras deben imprimirse sobre cinta blanca Si se utilizan otros colores de cinta los lectores de c digos de barras quiz no puedan leer el c digo correctamente O Pruebe el lector de c digos de barras para asegurarse de que podr leer los c digos de barras que se impriman en el entorno en el que se van a utilizar O El protocolo QR Code s lo se puede us
171. en el PC Visualizaci n de Properties Aunque las pantallas que se muestran en las explicaciones siguientes son para Windows9 98 98 SE y Me las operaciones para Windows 2000 y XP y para Macintosh son las mismas excepto donde se indique espec ficamente Puede visualizar las Properties que prefiera haciendo clic en el icono del dique de propiedades AB ln Icono Page Properties Icono Text Properties ef A Icono Layout Properties I Icono Database Properties en la versi n Mac del software se sustituye por la barra de herramientas de la base de datos Icono Font Properties Para visualizar las propiedades O Haga clic en el icono Page Properties Haga clic en este bot n 66 Normal Format para ocultar Properties ES pe Ja aw Di AE fe 3 Si la P touch 9600 3600 se ha seleccionado como impresora 24 Introducci n de texto Aunque las pantallas que se muestran en las explicaciones siguientes son para Windows 98 98 SE y Me las operaciones para Windows 2000 y XP y para Macintosh son las mismas excepto donde se indique espec ficamente O Haga clic en A bot n Text en la barra de herramientas de dibujo Podr escribir el texto y el puntero cambiar de K puntero de selecci n a I puntero en forma de Desplace el puntero en forma de a la posici n en el rea de composici n donde desee escribir el texto y haga clic
172. ena El sin cortes completos o medios t Despu s de imprimir una etiqueta en cinta TZ con la funci n Auto Cut establecida en 5 6 7 o 8 Cut pulse s para alimentar la cinta y despu s cortarla t Esta funci n tambi n se puede especificar con el software P touch Editor 3 2 Para cambiar el ajuste de la funci n Auto Cut A Cut O Mantenga pulsada y pulse O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado El ajuste actual se muestra en el lado izquierdo de la pantalla y se puede ver una muestra en el lado derecho ts Para devolver el valor predeterminado a la funci n 1 pulse la barra de espacio t Para volver al texto sin cambiar el ajuste de la funci n Auto Cut pulse exa O mantenga pus gt pulsada y pulse ES Q Pulse Je para aplicar la configuraci n Mirror Print Tecla C Una vez se haya escrito el texto y seleccionado todos los ajustes de formato necesarios ya se podr imprimir En funci n del ajuste seleccionado para la funci n Auto Cut las etiquetas TZ se cortar n autom ticamente despu s de la impresi n Las etiquetas AV se cortan siempre despu s de imprimirse Para imprimir una etiqueta Mirror e Pulse i Aparecer el mensaje COPIES seguido por el n mero de la etiqueta que se imprime NOTA Para salir de la impresi n en cualquier momento pulse cx Feed amp Cut Tecla Pulse este tecla para alimentar la cinta impr
173. end the information to any fax machine not just the one you are calling from Please call 1 800 521 2846 and follow the voice prompts to receive faxed instructions on how to use the system and an index of Fax Back subjects Save Time Register On Line Don t stand in line at the post office or worry about lost mail Visit us on line at www registermybrother com Your product will immediately be registered in our database and you can be on your way Also while you re there look for contests and other exciting information 118 P TOUCH ACCESSORY ORDER FORM ctor usa only Dear Customer This order form is provided for your convenience should your retailer not stock the item s needed To order by mail send this completed form along with proper payment to the address below OR credit card holders call toll free 1 888 879 3232 fax completed order form to 1 800 947 1445 or visit our web site at http www brothermall com Please refer to the Accessories listing in your User s Guide for stock no and price To complete the Order Form 1 2 3s Review the reverse side of this form and select the desired items Complete the form above indicating the quantity of each item Total the columns and enter the total on the Supply Accessory Subtotal line Add the appropriate Sales Tax and Shipping Handling Charge Clearly print your name and address in the space below Place your order a Call toll
174. er Locations If you need a local service center please call 1 800 284 HELP 4357 to locate the authorized service center closest to you Note Be sure to call the Service Center before your visit Service centers do not provide operational assistance See Operational Assistance Operational Assistance For technical and operational assistance you may call Brother Customer Service at Voice 1 877 4 PTouch or Fax 1 901 379 1210 Assistance on the Internet For product information and downloading the latest drivers http www brother com For purchasing accessories and certain Brother products http www brothermall com Accessories and Supplies To order Brother accessories or supplies by Visa MasterCard Discover or American Express you may call toll tree 1 888 879 3232 or complete the order form in your user s guide and fax both sides of the form to 1 800 947 1445 For purchasing accessories on the Internet http www brothermall com To order by mail or pay by check please complete the accessory order form and mail it along with payment to Brother International Corporation Attn Consumer Accessory Division P O Box 341332 Bartlett TN 38133 1332 Fax Back System Brother Customer Service has installed an easy to use Fax Back System so you can get instant answers to common technical questions and product information for all Brother products This system is available 24 hours a day 7 days a week You can use the system to s
175. es are shown below CHAR style ORIGINAL ITALIC DYNAMIC CUTE FORMAL ELEGANT NATURAL 110 Bill Reynolds ABC INTERNATIONAL INC Bill Reynolds ABC INTERNATIONAL INC Bill Reynolds ABC INTERNATIONAL INC 3000 Reynolds AEC uBaxeuebN EG Bill Reynolds ABC INTERNATIONAL INC Bill Reynolds ABC INTERNATIONAL INC Bill Reynolds ABC INTERNATIONAL INC Template default ISTANBUL Appendix xipuaddy 111 INDEX A AC adaptor 7 AC adaptor connector 2 Accent function 48 Accented characters 48 Accessories 116 Adaptor 7 Aligning text 60 Alt indicator 47 Alt key 47 Alt mode 47 Appendix 95 Arrow keys 44 Attaching labels 38 Auto Cut function 68 Auto Format function 66 B Backing removal 38 Backspace key 51 Barcode function 49 Barcode key 49 Barcode parameters 49 Barcode special characters 99 Basic functions 43 Battery compartment PT 9600 2 Blank space 46 Block Format functions 53 Block Length function 64 Block Margin function 63 Blocks 47 C Cancel key 45 Capital letters 46 Caps indicator 46 Caps key 46 Caps mode 46 Center alignment 60 Changing Block format 53 Block length 64 Block margins 63 Character size 54 56 Character style 57 58 Character width 56 Font 54 112 Framing 59 Global format 52 Label length 63 Line effect 59 Line format 53 Margins 62 Text alignment 60 Text in template 67 Text rotation 61 Character siz
176. esa restante despu s de pulsar para salir de la Impresi n t S lo la cinta TZ se puede alimentar y cortar con est instalado un casete de etiquetas AV y se mantiene pulsada y se pulsa aparece el mensaje de error CAN T FEED AV LABELS esta funci n Si rz Despu s de imprimir con la funci n Auto Cut A Cut establecida en 5 6 7 o 8 pulse para alimentar la cinta y cortarla Para alimentar cinta de 1 pulgada 26 mm y cortarla autom ticamente A Cut e Pulse 3 Aparece el mensaje FEED Funci n Repeat Printing code ti Esta funci n permite imprimir hasta 999 copias del mismo texto Para imprimir varias copias de una etiqueta Repeat O Mantenga pulsada y pulse 5 O Pulse o hasta que se visualice el valor deseado o utilice las teclas num ricas para escribir el n mero de copias que desee ts Para seleccionar el ajuste predeterminado 1 pulse la barra de espacio t Para cambiar el valor de 5 en 5 pasos mantenga pulsada O y suelte la tecla cuando se visualice el valor deseado t Para salir de la funci n Repeat Printing pulse O mantenga pulsada y pulse 1 Q Pulse m para empezar a imprimir el n mero de copias establecido El n mero de cada copia se visualiza mientras se imprime Despu s de imprimir con la funci n Auto Cut A Cut establecida en 5 6 7 o 8 pulse amp para alimentar la cinta y cortarla 59 Number Funci
177. escent Orange 16 4ft tape length 24 99 TZ M41 Black on Clear Matte Finish 20 99 TZ WB41 Black on Bugs Bunny Pattern 23 99 TZ WS41 Black on Sylvester amp Tweety Pattern 23 99 TZ WT41 Black on Tazmanian Devil Pattern 23 99 1 2 12mm wide laminated tapes TZ 131 Black on Clear 16 99 TZ 135 White on Clear 17 99 TZ 231 Black on White 17 99 TZ 232 Red on White 17 99 TZ 334 Gold on Black 20 99 TZ 335 White on Black 20 99 TZ 631 Black on Yellow 17 99 3 8 9mm wide laminated tapes TZ 121 Black on Clear 14 99 TZ 221 Black on White 16 99 TZ 325 White on Black 18 99 TZ 421 Black on Red 16 99 1 4 6mm wide laminated tapes TZ 111 Black on Clear 12 99 TZ 211 Black on White 14 99 TZ 315 White on Black 17 99 all tapes are 26 2 long unless otherwise noted StockNo Description Price Options BA9000 Rechargeable Battery PT 9600 only 64 99 CC9000 Carrying Case 64 99 There are 4 easy ways to order directly from Brother 1 Call us Toll Free at 1 888 879 3232 and use a major credit card 2 Visit us on line at www brothermall com and use a major credit card 3 Complete the order form on the reverse side and fax it to us at 1 800 947 1445 4 Complete the order form on the reverse side and mail it to us as directed If you haven t already returned your machine warranty card take a few minutes to register at www registermybrother com 117 PT 9600 3600 CONTACT INFORMATION For USA Only Service Cent
178. essage appears explaining that the computer must be restarted after the printer driver is installed Click the Continue Installation button After the printer driver is installed a dialog box appears indicating that the installation is finished Click the Restart button to restart the computer After the computer has started up again con nect the P touch to the computer using the enclosed USB interface cable as described on page 9 and then turn on the P touch Selecting the PT 9600 3600 as the printer To select the printer With a Mac OS before OS X Turn on the P touch 9600 3600 Pull down the Apple menu and select Chooser to display the Chooser window Chooser Connect to PT 9600 amp Active 9 Inactive 7 6 2 AppleTalk Q In the list on the left click the PT 9600 3600 icon Then select the appropriate printer from the list on the right O Close the Chooser window to confirm your settings With Mac OS X 10 1 to 10 2 3 O Turn on the P touch 9600 3600 Double click the Applications folder on the Macintosh HD to open it Q Double click the Utilities folder to open it Double click Print Center to start it up If no printers have been added a message appears allowing you to add to your list of printers Click the Add button Ch 2 Getting Started Printer List Delete Add Printer Q Click
179. et Corporate Boulevard Bridgewater NJ 08807 0911 USA TEL 908 704 1700 declares that the product Product Name Brother Label Printer P touch 9600 3600 Model Number PT 9600 3600 complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no mane that interference will not occur in a particular u installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interfer ence by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the
180. explained in step and holding down while pressing ae Press just os after selecting the last symbol in the series A symbol can also be selected by typing in the corresponding code indicated in the table of available symbols For example pressing displays the GARDENING category and then pressing displays the third symbol of the GARDENING category Accent function ce 7 The Accent function can be used to add accented characters to your text Many of these characters can also be found on the keys and typed in using refer to page 47 The accented characters are grouped according to the uppercase or lowercase letter that they are combined with The following table shows the available characters TU Accented Letter Accented Characters Characters To add an accented character to the text O Hold down and press 25 The mes sage ACCENT a u A U PRESS THE REQUIRED CHARACTER appears on the display ACCENT a u A U PRESS THE REQUIRED C CHARACTER Length Margin Font Width Size To return to the text at any time press OR hold down and press ym Q Press the key of the letter in the desired accented character OR press us A Block To type an uppercase accented character hold down OR press to enter Caps mode before pressing the letter key ay Fe 7 444 HELSINKI A Width AUTO 1 10 Length Margin Font gt c 4 o Q Press Or to select the desir
181. ext Mirror O Hold down and press in Length Margin Font Width Size Q Press or until the desired setting is displayed ts To return the function to its default setting OFF press the space bar t To return to the text without changing the for matting press OR hold down and Mirror press int Q Press to apply the setting Ch 3 Functions Stamp Stencil function code S The Stamp Stencil function allows you to quickly and easily create your own stamp sten cil films for chemical etching After inserting a stamp film cassette select this function to adjust the text to a perfect thickness for the pre inked stamp film holders Since the stamp holder is reusable just make a new stamp stencil film and replace the one in the holder To make a stamp O Type in the text and then insert a medium 3 4 18 mm wide or large 1 24 mm wide stamp film cassette Hold down and press STAMP MODE gt OFF Length Margin Font Width Size If a stamp is created using this function be sure to use the Tape Length function to select left and right label margins of 1 25 mm Q Press Or until the desired setting is displayed ts To return the function to its default setting OFF press the space bar To return to the text without changing the set ting for the Stamp function press OR hold down and press O Press If ON was selected the text is automate ally a
182. files are to be printed follow steps O and to mark them with Y If only one file is to be printed steps and Q can be skipped To remove a file from those that are to be printed select the file and then press the space bar to remove the Y from the right side of the file name Press Le The text stored under the Block selected file numbers is printed To print stored Auto Format template files Hold down and press w Or 5 Hold down and press a The MEM ORY screen appears Press or until Y moves beside PRINT 04 04 CLEAR MEMORY VPRINT Length Margin Font Width Size O Press a The PRINT screen appears in the display with the currently selected file num ber To quit the Memory Print function without printing any text press OR hold down and press E For a TZ tape template file PRINT 3 4 TZ OO VIDEO FAVORITE SONGS Length Margin Font Width Size PRINT AV2067 gt AVLOO ADDRESS1 R BeckerJABC Impo Length Margin Font Width Size O Press j or until the file number con taining the text that you wish to print is dis played The file name is shown beside the file number and the text stored under the selected file number is shown in the bottom line t To see other parts of the selected text file press or t Auto Format template files of the same tape width are displayed grouped together Q Press the space bar so that Y appears to the
183. firmation You have provided the following registration information Name M Smith Company Brother Co Ltd Is this registration information correct No Q Click the Yes button to register the entered information To change the registration information click the No button and then return to step The Choose Destination Location dialog box appears Choose Destination Location x Setup will install P touch Quick Editor in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder You can choose notto install P touch Quick Editor by clicking Cancel to exit Setup Destination Folder ee Files Brother Quick Editor Browse To change the location where P touch Quick Editor will be installed click the Browse button and then select the installation folder in the Choose Folder dialog box that appears Then click the OK button 14 After P touch Quick Editor is installed a dialog box appears allowing you to select where short cuts to P touch Quick Editor will be added Add shortcut x Specify where to add the shortcut to P touch Quick Editor Startup menu v Quick launch bar Cancel Select the desired locations for the short cuts and then click the Next button A dia log box appears allowing you to select whether or not to install the printer driver CE 1 OK to
184. free anytime 1 888 879 3232 b Order on line at www brothermall com c Fax completed form to 1 800 947 1445 d Mail completed form along with proper payment to BROTHER INTERNATIONAL CORP Attn Consumer Accessory Div P O Box 341332 Bartlett TN 38184 1332 Supply Accessory Subtotal AZ CA CO CT FL GA IL LA MA MD MI MN MO NC NJ NV NY OH PA TN TX VA WA WI residents add applicable sales tax Shipping and Handling Options Please choose one e Standard Freight e Continental U S 5 75 Alaska and Hawaii 8 75 GU PR VI 15 75 e 2nd Day Air Freight Continental U S only 8 75 e Overnight Delivery Continental U S only 14 75 TOTAL DUE No C O D orders Method of Payment check one Name Visa Master Card Discover Address Check Money Order American Express City State Account Number Zip Expiration Date Daytime Phone Daytime Fax Email Your Model Number Prices subject to change without notice All prices quoted in US Dollars Signature Billing Address if different from shipping address at left PT 9600 3600 CONTACT INFORMATION For USA Only Service Center Locations If you need a local service center please call 1 800 284 HELP 4357 to locate the authorized service center closest to you Note Be sure to call the Service Center before your visit Service centers do not provide operational assistance See Operational Assistance
185. g it unplugged for about one minute then and plugging it in again PT 9600 only pressing the reset button in the battery compartment at the bottom of the machine ts The text and formats in the display and all text files stored in the memory will be erased Before installing or removing the tape cas sette be sure that the P touch has been reset 6 The half cut is either too deep or not deep e Follow the procedure on pages 82 to enough adjust how deep laminated tape is cut 9 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem 7 A blank horizontal line appears through Turn off the machine and then disconnect the text in the printed label the AC adaptor and for the PT 9600 only remove the rechargeable battery Open the tape compartment cover then remove the tape cassette if one is installed The print head and rollers are located in the tape compartment Print head Use a dry cotton swab to gently wipe up and down along the print head Print head Rollers Use a dry cotton swab to wipe up and down along each roller while rotating them with your finger Print head Rollers Cotton swab O Install a tape cassette close the tape com partment cover and then try printing again O Ifa blank streak still appears in the printed label repeat steps through using a cotton swab dipped in isopropyl rubbing alcohol If none of the above works contact your service representative ts The print h
186. gital de clase B conforme a la Parte 15 de la normativa de la FCC Estos l mites se han disefiado para proporcionar una protecci n razonable contra las interferencias indeseables en una instalaci n dom stica Este equipo genera utiliza y puede emitir enn de radiofrecuencia y si no se instala y se usa seg n las instrucciones puede causar interferencias perjudiciales a las comunicaciones de radio No obstante no se garantiza que no se roducir n interferencias en una instalaci n espec fica Si este equipo causara interferencias perjudiciales en a recepci n de radio o de televisi n lo cual se puede comprobar apagando y encendiendo el dispositivo el usuario puede corregir la interferencia llevando a cabo una o m s de las medidas siguientes Volver a orientar o cambiar de sitio la antena de recepci n Aumentar la separaci n entre el equipo y el receptor Conectar el equipo a una toma o a un circuito diferente del que est conectado el receptor Consultar con el distribuidor o con un t cnico experto en radio y TV Debe usarse el cable de interfaz que se incluye para garantizar la conformidad con los l mites para un dispositivo digital de Clase B Los cambios o las modificaciones no expresamente aprobados por Brother Industries Ltd anulan la autorizaci n del usuario para utilizar el equipo Los n meros de patente y los n meros de publicaci n de patente relacionados con este producto se indican a continuaci n
187. go Choose Alias Folder que permite seleccionar d nde se afiadir un alias para P touch Editor 3 2 P touch Editor 3 2 Choose Alias Folder Introduction Where would you like to create aliases Choose Product Features Choose Alias Folder In the Dock On the Desktop In your home folder Other Don t create aliases Cancel Previous RD Seleccione la ubicaci n deseada para el alias y haga clic en el bot n Next Aparecer un cuadro de di logo que permite comprobar la instalaci n P touch Editor 3 2 Pre Installation Summary Introduction Please Review the Following Before Continuing Choose Product Features Product Name P touch Editor 3 2 Choose Alias Folder A Pre Installation Summary Install Folder o P touch Editor 3 2 in the folder Mac OS X on the disk Macintosh HD r ias Folder Desktop in the folder mward on the disk Macintosh HD Disk Space Information for Installation Target Required 58 672 177 bytes Available 1 590 501 376 bytes Toe voasa acom N Previous a Compruebe que la instalaci n se va a realizar como desea y haga clic en el bot n Install Despu s de instalar P touch Editor aparecer un cuadro de di logo que indica que la instalaci n ha terminado P touch Editor 3 2 Install Complete Introduction Congratulations P touch Editor 3 2 has been successfully Choose Product Features installe
188. go no aparece autom ticamente haga doble clic en My Computer Mi PC en el escritorio y despu s haga doble clic en la unidad de CD ROM que contiene el CD ROM Para Windows XP haga clic en My Computer Mi PC en el ment Inicio y a continuaci n haga doble clic en la unidad de CD ROM que contiene el CD ROM Despu s haga doble clic en Setup exe para visualizar el cuadro de di logo 32 Q Haga clic en el bot n inferior Driver Windows XP solamente Aparecer un mensaje inform ndole de que el controlador de impresora ha pasado las pruebas de compatibilidad y que debe hacer clic sobre el bot n Continue Anyway si aparece un mensaje de aviso Haga clic sobre el bot n OK IMPORTANT This printer driver has passed compatibility tests If your hardware wizard displays a warning message please select Continue Anyway to complete the software installation Aparecer un cuadro de di logo Driver Setup que permite seleccionar si se sustituye se a ade o se borra el controlador de la impresora PT 9600 3600 Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 x Brother PT 9600 is currently installed Replace with new Brother PT 9600 C Add Brother PT 9600 C Delete Brother PT 9600 Warning Do not connect or turn on the Brother PT 9600 until you are directed to Make your selection and then click Next Setup will begin Cancel Seleccione Delete Brother PT 9600 36
189. he operations for Windows 2000 and XP and Macin tosh are the same unless specifically mentioned To specify the label size Click the arrow beside the Properties button Ay y to display a drop down menu Click Tape Settings to display various label format settings NOTE The Tape Settings can also be displayed by select ing View Properties then clicking Tape Settings in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking Windows or holding down the Control key and clicking Macintosh in the label view Length 1 03 Width 1 la le Q Inthe Format list click the desired label for mat t The size of the label layout can also be set by specifying the Length and Width settings or by dragging the edges of the label view until the layout is the desired size Three preset label formats for AV labels are available allowing you to easily create address or file folder labels by simply selecting the for mat then entering the text Entering text The entire text can quickly be formatted by specifying the font size style and alignment In addition a frame can be drawn around the text To enter text Q Click the arrow beside the Properties button Ay y to display a drop down menu Click Text Settings to display various text format settings The Text Settings can also be displayed by selecting View Properties then clicking Text Settings in the pop up menu displayed by right
190. he P touch Editor 3 2 folder to open it O P touch Editor 3 2 HB 3 items 1 10 GB available ts f certain options are not installed some P touch Editor functions may not be available P touch Editor 3 2 Installer User s Guide 21 Ch 2 Getting Started Q When the dialog box appears indicating Double click the P touch Editor 3 2 Installer icon that the installation is finished click the in the folder that appears The installer starts up Quit button and then the Introduction dialog box appears P touch Editor 3 2 Installation is done Click QUIT to leave the installer Click CONTINUE to Introduction A El A Introduction InstallAnywhere will guide you through the installation of P touch perform additional installations n Editor 3 2 It is strongly recommended that you quit all programs before continuing with this installation Click the Next button to proceed to the next screen If you want to change something on a previous screen click the Previous Q When the dialog box appears asking if you A A You may cancel this installation at any time by clicking the Cancel wish to restart the computer click the burion Restart button to restart the computer T Please restart your Macintosh before using any ofthe installed items P mure gehe ea N NOTE When the Next button is pressed a message may With Mac OS X 10 1 to 10 2 3 appear warning that an older ver
191. he credit card account number that you provide until Brother receives your original Product and determines that your original Product is entitled to warranty coverage Your credit card will be charged up to the cost of a new Product only if i you do not return your original Product to Brother within five 5 business days ii the problems of your original Product are not covered by the limited warranty iii the proper packaging instructions are not followed and has caused damage to the product or iv the warranty period on your original Product has expired or has not been sufficiently validated with a copy of the proof of purchase bill of sale The replacement Machine you receive even if refurbished or remanufactured will be covered by the balance of the limited warranty period remaining on the original Product plus an additional thirty 30 days You will keep the replacement Machine that is sent to you and your original Machine shall become the property of Brother Retain your original accessory items and a copy of the return air bill signed by the courier Limitations Brother is not responsible for damage to or loss of any equipment media programs or data related to the use of this Product Except for that repair or replacement as described above Brother shall not be liable for any direct indirect incidental or consequential damages or specific relief Because some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of co
192. he previous block 44 right arrow key To move the cursor one character to the right e Press once If this key is pressed when the cursor is at the end of a line followed by another line the cursor moves to the beginning of the next line To move the cursor several characters to the right e Hold down until the cursor moves to the desired position To move the cursor to the end of the cur rent line of text e Hold down and press To move the cursor to the beginning of the next text block e Hold down and press If the cursor is already at the beginning of the last text block when these keys are pressed the cursor moves to the end of the text up arrow key To move the cursor up to the previous line e Press once If this key is pressed when the cursor is in the first line of text the cursor moves to the beginning of the line To move the cursor up several lines e Hold down until the cursor moves to the desired position To move the cursor to the beginning of the entire text e Hold down and press fn down arrow key To move the cursor down to the following line e Press once NOTE If this key is pressed when the cursor is in the last line of text the cursor moves to the end of the line To move the cursor down several lines e Hold down until the cursor moves to the desired position To move the cursor to the end of the entire text e Hold do
193. iba o hacia abajo en la cinta NOTA Esta funci n no se puede establecer si se imprime con cinta de 1 1 2 pulgadas 36 mm de ancho O Mantenga pulsada y pulse A Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de Configuraci n O Pulse o gt hasta que se visualice HEAD ADJUSTMENT O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado es Para devolver el valor predeterminado a la funci n 0 pulse la barra de espacio Para desplazar la impresi n hacia abajo seleccione un valor inferior Para desplazar la impresi n hacia arriba seleccione un valor superior Para aplicar varios ajustes de Configuraci n al mismo tiempo contin e pulsando O para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse o para seleccionar el ajuste que se desee Pulse Jz s lo despu s de configurar las funciones necesarias Para cambiar el ajuste HALF CUTTER Esta funci n permite ajustar la profundidad del medio corte en cinta laminada por ejemplo si la cinta se corta en exceso o no lo suficiente Normalmente s lo es necesario cambiar el valor en uno Si el medio corte todav a es demasiado profundo o no lo suficiente vuelva a cambiar el valor en uno Si la cinta sigue sin cortarse correctamente incluso despu s de ajustar este valor continuamente quiz la causa sea que la cizalla est roma P ngase en contacto con su representante de servicio O Mantenga pulsada y pu
194. ice representative EEPROM ERROR e This message appears if a Contact your service rep checksum error occurred when resentative the P touch was turned on or if the keyword was damaged and failed to initialize FEED ERROR e This message appears if the AV Replace the AV label cas label sensor cannot detect the sette with one that is not labels empty If this error message appears even after a new AV label cassette is installed the sensor may be damaged Contact your service representative INPUT WHOLE CODE e This message appears if the set Input the correct number number of digits is not entered of digits or change the in the barcode data number of digits set in the barcode parameters 64 INVALID CHARACTERS LENGTH LIMIT e This message appears if the Windows wrong port is selected for a USB connection This message appears if the wrong port is selected for a serial RS 232C connection This message appears if a time stamp or user defined character image is selected when you try to use the Numbering function This message appears if you try to print or use the Layout Pre view function when the length of the text is greater than the 3 1 3 1 m limit ERROR MESSAGE LIST ERROR MESSAGE CAUSE SOLUTION INTERFACE ERROR Under Print to the following port in the printer Properties dialog box select PTUSB for the USB connection For Windows 98 and Me we f t
195. ick Agree to continue or click Disagree to cancel the installation f Agree gt nstal 4 Disagree tal maun nY arc rcyrstercu saucia Y App O Computer Inc c Brother Industries Ltd 1993 2002 All rights reserved m T m f Prnt Y f Save f Go Back Continue Silo acepta haga clic en el bot n Agree Aparecer un cuadro de di logo permiti ndole seleccionar el volu men donde ser instalado el controlador de impresora Si hace clic en el bot n Disagree se cancelar la instalaci n B Seleccione el volumen deseado y despu s haga clic en el bot n Continue Aparecer un cuadro de di logo describiendo c mo va a ser instalado el controlador de impresora e Install PT 9600 Driver Easy Install Introduction 8 Read Me G License Click Install to perform a basic installation of this O Select Destination software package 8 Installation Type GoBack Install gt 9 Haga clic en el bot n Install Aparecer un mensaje explicando que el ordenador tiene que ser reiniciado des pu s de haberse instalado el controlador de impresora Haga clic en el bot n Continue Installation Des pu s de haberse instalado el controlador de impresora aparecer un cuadro de di logo indi cando que la instalaci n ha finalizado Haga clic en el bot n Restart para reiniciar el ordenador ee Despu s de que el ordenador se haya iniciado otra vez con
196. ilice las teclas num ricas para escribie la anchura del margen que quiera t Para devolver el valor predeterminado a la funci n 0 16 pulgadas 0 4 cm pulse la barra de espacio Para cambiar el ajuste en pasos de 0 1 pulgadas 1 0 cm pasos mantenga pulsada fe O 1 y a continuaci n suelte la tecla cuando se visualice el valor que desee Los m rgenes de cinta se muestran en la unidad de medida seleccionada actualmente pulgadas o cent metros La unidad de medida se puede cambiar con las funciones de Configuraci n Consulte la p gina 65 Para volver al texto sin cambiar el formato pulse O mantenga pulsada y pulse Global m Pulse Je para aplicar la configuraci n Para aplicar varios ajustes de formato al mismo tiempo contin e pulsando O para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse O sd para seleccionar el ajuste que desee Pulse s lo despu s de configurar las funciones necesarias Funci n Tape Length T LENGTH Aunque la longitud de la etiqueta impresa se ajusta autom ticamente para que la longitud el del texto encaje en ocasiones querr crear una etiqueta con una longitud espec fica La funci n Tape Length permite definir la longitud de la etiqueta entre 0 25 y 38 84 pulgadas 0 6 cm y 99 5 cm El ajuste actual de Tape Length se muestra en la esquina inferior izquierda de la pantalla El ajuste Tape Length solamente se aplica a etiquetas impresas en cin
197. illa est seleccionada mientras se escribe el texto o mientras se visualiza la pantalla MENU Para guardar la plantilla con un texto y un estilo de caracteres espec fico escriba el texto de cada campo y seleccione el estilo del texto antes de guardar la plantilla Almacenamiento de texto y plantillas de Auto Format Para guardar un archivo de texto Memory O Mantenga pulsada y pulse 5j Aparecer la pantalla MEMORY Pulse O hasta que Y se desplace junto a STORE O Pulse ae Aparecera la pantalla STORE en la pantalla con el n mero de archivo actualmente seleccionado Tambi n se indicar el tipo de archivo FILE para archivos de texto normales TZ para plantillas de cinta TZ o AV para plantillas de etiquetas AV t Si ya se ha almacenado el n mero maximo de caracteres en la pantalla aparecer el mensaje de error MEMORY FULL Si esto ocurre se tendr que borar el archivo de texto existente antes de almacenar el nuevo Para salir de la funci n Store sin almacenar el texto pulse O mantenga pulsada y Memory O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el n mero de archivo donde desee guardar el texto Los n meros de archivo que no parpadean ya contienen un archivo El nombre de archivo puede tener hasta 8 caracteres de largo y contener letras n meros s mbolos espacios y caracteres acentuados Q Pulse 2 El texto se almacena bajo el n mero de archivo seleccionado y en la pa
198. ing 6 full cuts and chain print ing no half cuts seg 7 ERE half cuts and chain print ing no full cuts 8 IN chain printing neither full nor half cuts Ch 3 Functions ts After printing a label on TZ tape with the Auto Cut function set to 5 6 7 or 8 press to feed the tape then cut it t This function can also be specified with the P touch Editor 3 2 software To change the setting for the Auto Cut function A Cut O Hold down and press i Length Margin Font Width Size Press or until the desired setting is displayed The current setting is shown on the left side of the display and a sample can be seen on the right side t To return the function to its default setting 1 press the space bar t To return to the text without changing the set ting for the Auto Cut function press OR A Cut hold down and press ss O Press to apply the setting Mirror Print key Crm After you have typed in your text and chosen all of the desired format settings you are ready to print it Depending on the setting selected for the Auto Cut function TZ labels will automatically be cut after they are printed AV labels are always cut after they are printed To print a label Mirror e Press in The message COPIES followed by the number of the label being printed appears 69 Ch 3 Functions NOTE To quit printing at any time press c
199. ing functions Font Size Width Style1 Style2 Line Effects Frame Align ment and Text Rotation Most text formats can be applied to a single text line a single text block or all of the text However the Text Rotation func tion can only be applied to single text blocks or the entire text When the text format for a line is changed and text is added to the line the format remains applied until it is changed again The label formatting functions Tape Margin Tape Length Block Margin Block Length and Mirror Printing specify the general appearance of the label The label formatting functions will be applied to the entire text In addition the Block Length function can be applied to single blocks Global format functions code fii With the Global Format functions you change the appearance of the entire text by printing it with various settings applied Font Size Width Style1 Style2 Line Effects underline strikeout Frame Text Alignment or Text Rotation In addi tion the appearance of the whole label can be adjusted by changing the Tape Margin Tape Length Block Margin and Block Length settings To change the Global Format functions Global O Hold down and press Select FONT SIZE WIDTH STYLE1 STYLE2 LINE EFFECTS FRAME ALIGN MENT T MARGIN T LENGTH B MAR GIN B LENGTH or ROTATE and the desired setting as described on pages 54 to 64 The selected setting will be applied to the ent
200. install the printer driver To install the printer driver click the Yes button Windows xP only A message appears informing you that the printer driver has passed compatibility tests and that the Continue Anyway button should be pressed if a warning message appears Click the OK button IMPORTANT This printer driver has passed compatibility tests IF your hardware wizard displays a warning message please select Continue Anyway to complete the software installation The first Driver Setup dialog box appears allowing you to select whether the P touch will be connected through the USB port or the RS 232C port Continue with the procedure in Installing the USB printer driver on page 17 To install the serial printer driver refer to the Advanced Functions booklet If the printer driver is already installed click the No but ton A dialog box appears explaining that installation is finished Select Yes want to restart my computer now click the Finish button to restart the computer and then remove the CD ROM from the CD ROM drive Setup Complete Setup has finished copying files to your computer Before you can use the program you must restart Windows or your computer C No will restart my computer later Remove any disks from their drives and then click Finish to complete setup Installing the P touch AV Editor software The P touch AV Editor software enables text to quickly and easily be
201. ion Where would you like to create aliases M Choose Alias Folder In the Dock On the Desktop In your home folder Other Don t create aliases Mmm Cancel f Previous Nec gt Q Seleccione la ubicaci n deseada para el alias y haga clic en el bot n Next Aparecer un cuadro de di logo que permite comprobar la instalaci n P touch Quick Editor Pre Installation Summary Introduction Please Review the Following Before Continuing Choose Alias Folder Product Name P touch Quick Editor A Pre Installation Summary a install Folder o P touch Quick Editor in the folder Mac OS X on the isk Macintosh HD ias Folder Desktop in the folder mward on the disk Macintosh HD Disk Space Information for Installation Target Required 2 631 005 bytes Available 1 518 555 136 bytes Cancel T enr amame vna Y SEED Previous O Compruebe que la instalaci n se va a realizar como desea y haga clic en el bot n Install Cuando P touch Quick Editor ya se haya instalado aparecer un cuadro de di logo que indicar que la instalaci n ha terminado O P touch Quick Editor Install Complete A Introduction Congratulations P touch Quick Editor has been successfully Choose Alias Folder Installed to F Pre Installation Summary A Installing Click Done to quit the installer A Install Complete Haga clic en el bot n Done y reinicie el ordenador Instala
202. ion for setup is finished Install the printer Connect Brother PT 9600 and then turn it on Wait until it is automatically added When the printer can be added the next Driver Setup page automatically appears Connect the P touch to the computer using the enclosed USB interface cable as described on page 9 and then turn on the P touch The first Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for Brother PT 9600 3 If your hardware came with an installation CD lt 6 or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do ok Click Next to continue Select Install the software automatically Recommended and then click the Next button A dialog box appears warning that the software has not passed Windows Logo testing The software you are installing for this hardware Printers has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing STOP instalation Click the Continue Anyway button to con tinue with the inst
203. ire text NOTE To return to the text without changing the format ting press OR hold down and press Global ii Block format functions cw 8 Formatting with the Block Format functions enables you to change the appearance of each of the label s text blocks created using the New Block function The following label shows how these functions can be used together The multiple blocks in this label were created using the New Block function with the first block of this text containing a single line the second containing two lines and the third one line Then different settings were applied to each block separately using the Block Format functions Font Size Width Style1 Style2 Line Effects underline strikeout Frame Text Align ment Block length or Text Rotation Jazz Concert 10 12 02 Only the square frame 1 and rounded frame 2 settings can be selected for the Frame function in block formatting For samples of the frames refer to page 104 To change the Block Format functions O Press 2 or to position the cur sor in the block that will be given a different 4 Home format Hold down and press O Select FONT SIZE WIDTH STYLE1 STYLE2 LINE EFFECTS FRAME ALIGN MENT B LENGTH or ROTATE and the desired setting as described on pages 54 to 64 The selected setting will only be applied to the text block that the cursor is positioned in To return t
204. is longer than the specified block length This message appears if the length of the text is longer than the width of the tape when the Text Rotation function is used A N CAUSE SOLUTION e Inctalkan Pod ade an 1 24 mm wide stamp tape cassette Install an 3 4 18 mm wide stamp tape cassette Replace the tape cassette and then after closing the tape compartment cover press any key Reduce the size of the characters install a tape with a greater width or select the AUTO text size setting Specify the correct setting for the installed tape Press cane and then use the AUTO Size setting to format a label with a spe cific length as described in the example on page 55 ERROR MESSAGE LIST ERROR MESSAGE CAUSE SOLUTION VALUE OUT OF RANGE CHECK VALUE AND RE ENTER This message appears if the e Type ina value that is value entered while setting the within the allowable Tape Margin Tape Length range Block Margin and Block Length function is not within the allow able range This message appears if the specified characters cannot be found in the database This message appears if the val ues for the records to be printed is not within the allowable range 89 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Problem 1 The display stays blank after you have Check that the AC adaptor is connected turned on the machine or abnormal char Check that the rechargeable Ni MH ba
205. is shown on the left side of the display and a sample can be seen on the right side gt s HELSINKI A Width Size 08 13 4 ALIGNMENT gt LEFT AUTO 1 10 Length Margin Font Q Press Or until the desired setting is displayed Ch 3 Functions When any setting other than OFF is selected for NOTE AAA i the text at the cursor s current position the Text Rotation indicator at the top of the display re f appears as a setting the Text Align comes on ment function has already been applied to either a line in the current text block if the Block Format or the Global Format function is being set or a block in the current text if the Global Format function is being set Changing the setting will cancel the setting that was previ ously applied lt lt lt P touch gt gt gt 7 AUTO 1 10 HELSINKI A Length Margin Font Width Size gt 4 o To return the function to its default setting LEFT press the space bar To change the setting for the Text Rotation To return to the text without changing the for matting press OR hold down and function PEE press m Dr f O Hold down and press 5 or To apply several format settings at the same time O Press or until ROTATE is displayed continue pressing or to select the function The setting for the text at the cursor s cur E rent position is shown on the left side of the then pressing or to select the desired
206. itor software click the third button from the top P touch AV Edi tor Continue with the procedure in Installing the P touch AV Editor software on page 15 Welcome x A Welcome to the P touch AV Editor Setup program This program will install P touch AV Editor on your computer Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Nextto continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may resultin severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law E Cancel 13 Ch 2 Getting Started Q Carefully read the contents of the Welcome dialog box and then click the Next button to continue The User Information dialog box appears User Information x Type your name below You must also type the name ofthe company you work for Company Brother Co Ltd O Type the necessary information into the appropriate boxes If the information has already been registered in Windows it will automatically appear and then click the Next button A dialog box appears ask ing for confirmation of the entered informa tion Q D gt le o mp Dd Im mp D oa Registration Con
207. la pantalla y en el lado derecho se puede ver una muestra O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado os Sj aparece como el ajuste la funci n Size ya se ha aplicado a una l nea del bloque de texto actual si se han establecido las funciones Block Format o Global Format o al bloque en el texto actual si se ha establecido la funci n Global Format Si se cambia el ajuste se cancelar el que se aplic previamente Para volver la funci n a su ajuste predeterminado AUTO pulse la barra de espacio Para volver al texto sin cambiar el formato pulse O mantenga pulsada y pulse Global Block Line ii E jog O Pulse para aplicar la configuraci n Para aplicar varios ajustes de formato al mismo tiempo contin e pulsando O para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse o Home para seleccionar el ajuste que desee Pulse ds s lo despu s de configurar las funciones necesarias Funci n Width WIDTH La funci n Width se puede usar con cualquiera de los tama os de texto para que el tama o de los caracteres sea m s ancho o m s estrecho La anchura de texto en la posici n actual del cursor se muestra en la parte inferior de la pantalla 47 Para cambiar el ajuste de la funci n Width O Mantenga pulsada y pulse m O 3 Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de formato Pulse O ha
208. la unidad de CD ROM del PC O 5 P touch EIES aX 2 items 4 1 MB available Mac 05 9 Mac 05 X Q Haga doble clic en la carpeta Mac OS 9 para abrirla O Y Mac OS 9 3 items 1 10 GB available Q Haga doble clic en la carpeta P touch Editor 3 2 para abrirla 16 O P touch Editor 3 2 HB 3 items 1 10 GB available P touch Editor 3 2 Installer User s Guide Q Haga doble clic en el icono del instalador de P touch Editor 3 2 en la carpeta que aparecer El instalador se iniciar RTT RH RRR RH RH RH RH H touch Editor 3 2 LOU E AA AAA RTH P touch Editor is an application that gives u a variety of designing possibilities for creating labels and stamps Installation Start up the installer and then follow the messages that appear Install on System Requirements Computer Macintosh Power Macintosh or Macintosh HD iMac Installation requires 189 5 MB Available on volume 1131 5 MB Operating system Mac OS 8 6 or later Available memory Minimum 32MB Available hard disk space Minimum 20MB This software is only compatible with Mac OS X classic f Eject Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc Seleccione el m todo de instalaci n O Para una instalaci n b sica Si se hace clic en el bot n Install empezar n a instalarse inmediatamente todas las opciones Se necesitan unas 20 MB de espacio
209. lemente haga clic sobre E bot n de impresi n o haga clic sobre la flecha al lado del bot n Print y haga clic sobre Print Para salir del P touch AV Editor Haga uno de los siguientes O Haga clic sobre el bot n Exit O Haga clic con el bot n derecho del rat n sobre la ventana del P touch AV Editor y a continuaci n haga clic sobre Exit en el men que aparece Desinstalaci n del software y del controlador de la impresora e 00000000000000900909 090909 En un PC que ejecute Windows Desinstalaci n del software Desinstale el software P touch Editor 3 2 el P touch Quick Editor o el P touch AV Editor del PC como se describe a continuaci n Para desinstalar el software O Inicie Windows 98 98 SE Me 2000 o XP Haga clic en el bot n Inicio de la barra de tareas seleccione Settings Configuraci n y despu s en Control Panel Panel de control Con Windows XP haga clic en el bot n Inicio de la barra de tareas y haga clic en Control Panel Panel de control O En la ventana Panel de control haga doble clic en Add Remove Programs Agregar o quitar programas el mismo mensaje en Windows9 XP NOTA El cuadro de di logo que aparecer puede diferir en funci n del sistema operativo que se utilice O En el cuadro de di logo Add Remove Programs Properties seleccione P touch Editor 3 2 para eliminar el software P touch Editor 3 2 P touch
210. lgadas 19 mm x 57 mm etiquetas de direcciones de remitente y AV1789 5 8 x 3 1 2 pulgadas 17 mm x 89 mm etiquetas de carpetas de archivos En un momento podr imprimir etiquetas de aspecto profesional La calidad y el rendimiento de la P touch hacen de ella una m quina extraordinariamente pr ctica que cubre todas las necesidades de etiquetado Aunque la P touch es f cil de usar le sugerimos que lea este Manual del usuario atentamente antes de empezar Guarde a mano este manual para futuras consultas NOTA La P touch puede hacer ruido cuando se enciende o cuando imprime no obstante esto no indica un mal funcionamiento Declaraci n de conformidad de la Federal Communications Commission Comisi n federal de comunicaciones FCC s lo para Estados Unidos Parte responsable Brother International Corporation 100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard Bridgewater NJ 08807 0911 USA TEL 908 704 1700 declara que el producto Nombre del producto Impresora de etiquetas P touch 9600 3600 de Brother N mero de modelo PT 9600 3600 cumple con la Parte 15 de las Normas de la FCC El funcionamiento est sujeto a las dos condiciones siguientes 1 este dispositivo no puede causar interferencias perjudiciales y 2 este dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia que reciba que incluye interferencias que puedan causar un funcionamiento no deseado Este equipo se ha comprobado y cumple los l mites establecidos para un dispositivo di
211. lled Replace with new Brother PT 9600 gt Ss Nu i S Warning O Do not connect or turn on the Brother PT 9600 until you are directed to Make your selection and then click Next Setup will begin O Select either Replace with new Brother PT 9600 3600 or Add Brother PT 9600 3600 and then click the Next button Ch 2 Getting Started NOTE gt f Replace with new Brother PT 9600 3600 is selected the previously installed printer driver is deleted and replaced with a new one Select this option when upgrading the printer driver or when running Windows 2000 or XP and changing to a P touch 9600 3600 with a differ ent serial number If Add Brother PT 9600 3600 is selected a new printer driver is added With a USB con nection on Windows 98 or Me only a port is added without adding it as a new printer Select this option when connecting and using multiple P touch 9600 3600s with the same computer To delete the printer driver follow the proce dure in Uninstalling the printer driver on page 35 With Windows 98 98 SE Me or 2000 Q dialog box appears instructing you to connect the P touch to the computer Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 l x Preparation for setup is finished Install the printer Connect Brother PT 9600 and then turn it on Wait until itis automatically added When the printer can be added the next Driver Setup page auto
212. ller starts up Click the Uninstall button After P touch Quick Editor is removed a dialog box appears indicating that the uninstallation is finished Click the Quit button To uninstall the printer driver Disconnect the USB cable from the USB port on the P touch eo Ch 2 Getting Started Double click the Applications folder on the Macintosh HD to open it Double click the Utilities folder to open it Double click the Print Center icon to start up Print Center Check that PT 9600 3600 does not appear in the Printer List If it is listed select it and then click the Delete button to delete it Quit Print Center In the Library folder open the Printers folder and then open the Brother folder Drag the following to the Trash icon e PT9600 3600PDE plugin e PT9600 3600PM plugin 37 E jmd E a jmd dp O em E O Q D gt lo o mes Q m 1 Q Ch 2 Getting Started Attaching labels e 0o000000000000099099 0900909 Laminated tape The backing from labels printed on laminated tapes can easily be removed if an Auto Cut set ting with a half cut 1 3 5 or 7 was used refer to page 68 Iron on transfer tape Iron on transfer tape is used to transfer your text onto garments using an iron O Insert an iron on transfer tape cassette press Mirror to print the text and cut off the label Iron the garment to flatten it before transfer ri
213. lo despu s de configurar las funciones necesarias Style2 Funci n STYLE2 En la funci n Style2 dispone de dos estilos de texto m s ITALIC y VERTICAL Estos estilos se pueden combinar con cada uno de los estilos de texto disponibles en la funci n Style1 Consulte Stylel Funci n STYLE1 m s arriba Los indicadores de estilo en la parte superior de la pantalla muestran el estilo de texto en la posici n actual del cursor cuando se ha seleccionado un ajuste que no es NORMAL El ajuste de estilo VERTICAL que gira cada car cter 90 en el sentido contrario a las agujas del reloj e imprime el texto verticalmente a lo largo de la etiqueta es diferente de la funci n Text Rotation p gina 51 que gira cada bloque de texto 90 en el sentido contrario a las agujas del reloj e imprime el texto horizontalmente a lo largo de la etiqueta Para cambiar el valor de la funci n Style2 O Mantenga pulsada 3 Global Block y pulse O NOTA Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de formato O Pulse hasta que se visualice STYLE2 El ajuste para el texto en la posici n actual del cursor se muestra en el lado izquierdo de la pantalla y en el lado derecho se puede ver una muestra O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado NOTA os Sj aparece como el ajuste la funci n Style2 ya se ha aplicado a una l nea del bloque de texto
214. lse Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo varios ajustes de funciones de tiempo Configuraci n Pulse o hasta que se visualice HALF CUTTER Q Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado ss Para cortar a menos profundidad seleccione un valor inferior Para cortar a m s profundidad seleccione un valor superior re Ajuste el valor en pasos peque os sw Para devolver el valor predeterminado a la funci n 0 pulse la barra de espacio O Pulse para aplicar la configuraci n Para aplicar varios ajustes de Configuraci n al mismo tiempo contin e pulsando O para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse O para seleccionar el ajuste que se desee Pulse S lo despu s de configurar las funciones Block necesarias Para cambiar el ajuste USB ID SELECTION Esta funci n permite especificar un n mero de identificaci n exclusivo a cada P touch conectada al PC para imprimir mediante la conexi n USB Normalmente para facilitar la configuraci n de varias m quinas P touch conectadas a un PC todas las PT 9600 3600 se definen como 000000001 lo cual significa que los datos se imprimir n al mismo tiempo en todas las m quinas P touch conectadas O Mantenga pulsada y pulse Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de Configuraci n O Pulse o hasta que se visualice USB ID SELECTION Q Pulse O hasta que s
215. lse 1 0 hasta que Y se desplace junto a CHANGE STYLE Pulse 4 New Block 64 B Pulse O hasta que se visualice el nombre del estilo de formato que desee En el lado derecho de la pantalla se puede ver una muestra Pulse la barra de espacio para seleccionar el ajuste predeteminado NO CHANGE Pulse La pantalla MENU volver a Block aparecer en el visor Para imprimir m s archivos de plantilla Auto Format almacenados Pulse O hasta que Y se desplace junto a PRINT MORE Q9 Pulse ye La pantalla PRINT aparece en el visor con el n mero de archivo actualmente seleccionado Pulse O hasta que se visualice el n mero de archivo que contiene el texto que desea imprimir El nombre de archivo se muestra junto al n mero de archivo y el texto almacenado bajo el n mero de archivo seleccionado se muestra en la l nea inferior ts Para ver otras partes del archivo de texto seleccionado pulse 7 o t Los archivos de plantilla Auto Format con la misma anchura de cinta se visualizan agrupados Pulse la barra de espacio para que v aparezca a la derecha del nombre de archivo 9 Repita los pasos y Q9 hasta que Y aparezca a la derecha de todos los archivos que se tienen que imprimir Los archivos marcados con Y se imprimir n Si tiene que imprimir varios archivos siga los pasos 9 y para marcarlos con Y Si s lo tiene que imprimir un archivo puede omitir l
216. ly appear double click My Computer on the desktop and then double click the CD ROM drive containing t To install just the printer driver click the lower button Driver With Windows XP a message appears informing you that the printer driver has passed compatibility tests and that the Continue Anyway button should be clicked if a warning message appears Click the OK button Confirmation the CD ROM For Windows XP click My Com puter in the Start menu and then double click the CD ROM drive containing the CD ROM Next double click Setup exe to display the dialog box IMPORTANT This printer driver has passed compatibility tests If your hardware wizard displays a warning message please select Continue Anyway to complete the software installation O Click the middle button P touch Quick Edi j el vA The first Driver Setup dialog box appears tor The InstallShield Wizard for installing voces UR E ee UNI il the P touch Quick Editor software starts up be connected through the USB port or the RS and then the Welcome dialog box appears 232C port Continue with the procedure in Installing the USB printer driver on page 17 To install the serial printer driver refer to the Advanced Functions booklet Welcome x Welcome to the P touch Quick Editor Setup program f This program will install P touch Quick Editor on your computer E o jmd E jmd QD O em E lt b O
217. matic half cut Dimensions 9 1 3 W x11 15 16 D x 4 H 237 W x 302 D x 101 H mm Weight 4 41 Ibs 2 kg SOFTWARE Character fonts 10 built in fonts Helsinki Brussels US San Diego Florida Brunei Bold Los Angeles Bermuda Script Istanbul and Letter Gothic Character sizes AUTO plus 24 point sizes 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 28 32 36 40 48 56 64 72 and 76 points Character styles Normal Bold Outline Solid Shadow Invert Italic and Vertical Buffer size Maximum 4 1 0 meter line of text Maximum 16 lines Maximum 50 blocks Memory size Approximately 10 000 characters 94 Appendix xipuaddy Appendix Symbols gt p 48 The following symbols are available Category Sym bols PUNCTUATION BRACKET BO1 BO08 ARROW CO1 C14 EX UNIT DO1 D26 sv mein uud cm mm n MRHHEERHHPEHE LETTER ww 6 s ajo vjs ju ojojsjep pa o3 fe so 7 aos o as j M NUMBER Lux cT1s 1 3 9 93 913 xq 3 qr poe PICTOGRAPH GO1 G14 ELECTRICAL HO1 H18 96 Appendix XC 101 129 15 16 17 18 19 PPC 23 REESE a HARAR EGEGEGJESXESEZENET SAFETY1 K01 K19 FIER Aa BA JOOS OCW RIZAL pete fs Pe ts Pe Te Pe Ts Po Po Pe Tis EMERGENCY NO1 NO6 E D pes Te SAA lap pel gt ofofofufefopw fea Jun E EA Quse 20008 DEGEN oe nee SAFETY2 001 043 2s o D o o t
218. matically appears Q Connect the P touch to the computer using the enclosed USB interface cable as described on page 9 and then turn on the P touch A dialog box appears indicating that the printer driver has been installed Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 1 xi Brother PT 9600 was correctly added Click Finish to quit setup 19 E o jmd E jmd QD O em E lt b O Q D gt le o r Dd m 1 o B Ch 2 Getting Started Click the Finish button If a dialog box appears explaining that the com puter should be restarted select the option for restarting the computer and then click the Finish button With Windows XP Q dialog box appears instructing you to connect the P touch to the computer Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 Preparation for setup is finished Install the printer Connect Brother PT 9600 and then turn it on Wait until it is automatically added When the printer can be added the next Driver Setup page automatically appears Q Connect the P touch to the computer using the enclosed USB interface cable as described on page 9 and then turn on the P touch A dialog box appears indicating that the printer driver has been installed The first Found New Hardware Wizard dia log box appears Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for Brother
219. mir el texto pulse O mantenga pulsada y Memory pulse 3 63 Q Pulse O hasta que se visualice el n mero de archivo que contiene el texto que desea imprimir El nombre de archivo se muestra junto al n mero de archivo y el texto almacenado bajo el n mero de archivo seleccionado se muestra en la l nea inferior t Para ver otras partes del archivo de texto seleccionado pulse o Los archivos de plantilla Auto Format con la misma anchura de cinta se visualizan agrupados Q Pulse la barra de espacio para que v aparezca a la derecha del nombre de archivo O Repita los pasos G y Q hasta que Y aparezca a la derecha de todos los archivos que se quieran imprimir Los archivos marcados con Y se imprimir n ts Si tiene que imprimir varios archivos siga los pasos y Q para marcarlos con Y Si s lo tiene que imprimir un archivo puede omitir los pasos y O Para seleccionar todos los archivos de la memoria mantenga pulsada y pulse la barra de espacio Para quitar un archivo del grupo de los que se van a imprimir seleccione el archivo y a continuaci n pulse la barra de espacio para quitar Y de la derecha del nombre de archivo Q Pulse et La pantalla MENU aparece en el visor O Compruebe que Y aparece junto a PRINT y pulse El texto almacenado bajo los Block n meros de archivo seleccionados se imprimen Para cambiar el estilo de la plantilla Auto Format almacenada Pu
220. mmm s AC i WIDE NORMAL NARROW NARROWEST AO pr ABO If the 4 point or 5 point text size setting is selected the text will be printed with the BRUSSELS font setting regardless of the font setting that is selected Characters printed using the smaller sizes may be difficult to read if certain style settings are selected Small characters may appear faint when they are printed 101 2s o D o o t gt Ke Lo D gt 2 gt lt Appendix Type styles gt p 57 amp 58 Style1 SE NORMAL BOLD OUTLINE SOLID SHADOW INVERT Style2 e NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL Helink ABC ABC Ar te ABC ABC 5 ABC ABC pur anc ane ioc ame ave Enn jme moe EI cme ate ane th Se ABC ABC Ae ABC A25 END aec nuc 7s awe us m ABC L ABC ADO ABC ABC M i Mx mee mur mac mux nux ABC ABC 450 ABO eee anc ABc 456 ABC 102 Appendix che NORMAL BOLD OUTLINE SOLID SHADOW INVERT ae ITALIC ITALIC ITALIC ITALIC ITALIC ITALIC Setting E em m os am v AK A ts The VERTICAL style setting can be combined with all Style1 text styles NORMAL BOLD OUTLINE SOLID SHADOW and INVERT ts The VERTICAL style setting cannot be combined with the ITALIC style setting 2s o D o o t 103 Appendix Framing and shading patterns gt p 59 The following frame and shading patterns are available Mm BABC ABC ome s ERES
221. mples of the available style settings refer to page 102 The style indicators at the top of the display show the style of the text at the cursor s current position when any setting other than NORMAL is selected P touch gt gt gt gt o 1 10 HELSINKI A Length Margin Font Width Size Each of the text styles available with the Style1 function can be combined with each of the text styles available with the Style2 function See Style2 function STYLE2 on page 58 Ch 3 Functions To change the setting for the Style1 function Global Block Line O Hold down and press or Press or until STYLE1 is displayed The setting for the text at the cursor s cur rent position is shown on the left side of the display and a sample can be seen on the right side 04 13 9 STYLE1 A U3 2 NORMAL AUTO 1 10 HELSINKI Length Margin Font gt E o Width Size O Press or until the desired setting is displayed re f appears as a setting the Stylel func tion has already been applied to either a line in the current text block if the Block Format or the Global Format function is being set or a block in the current text if the Global Format function is being set Changing the setting will cancel the setting that was previously applied t To return the function to its default setting NORMAL press the space bar t To return to the text without changing the for matting
222. n pulse 4 O para seleccionar el ajuste que se desee Pulse ES s lo despu s de configurar las funciones necesarias 66 Para cambiar el ajuste TAPE LENGTH ADJUST Si imprime una etiqueta con una longitud espec fica funci n Tape Length la longitud de la etiqueta impresa puede diferir ligeramente Esta funci n permite ajustar la longitud de la etiqueta impresa Si la longitud de la cinta no se puede ajustar satisfactoriamente mediante esta funci n se pueden hacer peque os ajustes a la longitud mediante la funci n Tape Length O Mantenga pulsada y pulse Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de Configuraci n Pulse O hasta que se visualice TAPE LENGTH ADJUST O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado es Para devolver el valor predeterminado a la funci n 0 pulse la barra de espacio amp Para reducir la longitud de la etiqueta seleccione un valor inferior Para incrementar la longitud de la etiqueta seleccione un valor superior Pulse x para aplicar la configuraci n Para aplicar varios ajustes de Configuraci n al mismo tiempo contin e pulsando O para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse ff o para seleccionar el ajuste que se desee Pulse ds s lo despu s de configurar las funciones necesarias Para cambiar el ajuste HEAD ADJUSTMENT Esta funci n permite desplazar la impresi n hacia arr
223. n of 0 2 inch on both sides specify a O Hold down os and press 1 O Press or z to select T LENGTH 1 2 12 mm and then press Or to select 3 4 18 mm AUTO 1l 24 mm Press Or to select T MARGIN 76 1 1 2 36 mm and then press or to specify a width of 0 2 For AV labels Press Maximum Text Size H Zock old down c and press 2 Label Sizes caia p AV2067 Address labels Press or to select B LENGTH and then press or to specify a length of 3 6 48 36 se ME Press yx 3 4 x 2 5 8 20 mm x 67 mm AV1957 Return address labels 3 4 x 2 1 4 19 mm x 57 mm AV1789 File folder labels 5 8 x 3 1 2 17 mm x 89 mm ts With the AUTO setting selected and the text in a block consisting of just one line of only upper case letters and no accented letters and written horizontally vertically without the BERMUDA font the text is printed slightly larger than the maximum possible for the tape width If the 4 point or 5 point text size setting is selected the text will be printed with the BRUS SELS font setting regardless of the font setting that is selected 55 Ch 3 Functions To change the setting for the Size function Global Block Line Q Hold down and press jor Press or until SIZE is displayed The setting for the text at the cursor s current position is shown on the left side of the dis play and a sample can be seen on the right side
224. n options or sub components are not installed some P touch Editor functions may not be available After selecting the desired sub components click the Continue button 2 Click the Next button to begin installation After P touch Editor is installed a dialog box appears allowing you to select whether or not to install the printer driver Question 2 OK to install the printer driver zz No Windows XP only A message appears informing you that the printer driver has passed compatibility tests and that the Continue Anyway button should be pressed if a warning message appears Click the OK button The first Driver Setup dialog box appears allowing you to select whether the P touch will be connected through the USB port or the RS 232C port Continue with the procedure in Installing the USB printer driver on page 17 To install the serial printer driver refer to the Advanced Functions booklet Q When installation of P touch Editor is fin ished a dialog box appears allowing you to upgrade P touch Editor 3 2 so that it will be compatible with Access 2000 E eee x 9 Update P touch Editor so that it is compatible with Access 2000 Click Yes to make P touch Editor compatible with Access 2000 Click No to leave P touch Editor compatible with Access 97 To upgrade P touch Editor 3 2 for Access 2000 click the Yes button and then follow the instructions that appear If you do not wish to u
225. nci n y a continuaci n pulse Home O para seleccionar el ajuste que desee Pulse J Funcion Block Length a s lo despu s de configurar las funciones B LENGTH necesarias Normalmente la longitud de cada bloque de texto se ajusta autom ticamente para que encaje la longitud del texto No obstante con la funci n Block Length podr ajustar cada bloque de texto a una longitud entre 0 25 y 38 84 pulgadas 0 6 cm y 99 5 cm 54 Funci n Mirror Printing Mirror Cee Esta funci n imprime la etiqueta de manera que el texto se pueda leer desde el lado adhesivo de la cinta Si las etiquetas impresas a la inversa se enganchan en un cristal u otro material transparente se podr n leer correctamente desde el otro lado Cuando se utilice la funci n Mirror Printing el texto deber imprimirse en una cinta incolora OFF ABC VBC Si se selecciona ON aparecer el indicador Mirror Printing en la parte superior de la pantalla ON Para imprimir una imagen reflejada del texto O Mantenga pulsada y pulse rn O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado ts Para devolver el valor predeterminado a la funci n OFF pulse la barra de espacio t Para volver al texto sin cambiar el formato pulse O mantenga pulsada y pulse Mirror Crd O Pulse para aplicar la configuraci n Funci n Stamp Stencil code 5 La funci n Stamp le permite crear r pida y f cilmente
226. nd Replacement Service For USA ONIY M M iii Important Information eM V Chapter 1 Before You Start cccccccssscscscsscscsccscccsccscscccscssccs I GENERAL DESCRIPHO Noni 2 OP SU 2 AS edes a Ltda Hodie mtn lesa tonio tu ta s siqui udd auis cda i ta LOL ted unii aud 3 LCDA P O et eee nates cesta isse tee EUM oneness 3 KeyDOUFd LAA AAA 4 Chapter 2 Gettine Started nissan PRECAUTIONS P 6 Connecting the XC adabtOFr sai oec i t te RH eO M NEC EO et Turning on olt the EUA ee Reve idest bei ies teens 7 Istalling replacing a tape COSSCUC iussi iiai r RU E iiS 7 Connecting the P touch tod COMPU lt lt SER IIR ISIN E S Installing the Software amp Printer Driver ooooococoooonannnncnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnononanacnnnnnnnos 9 Reaame the User s Gulde iege vi RS ER EN ERE E EIER 27 Usm T AOU hE TUO 32 A 28 Using P XIoUcH OMCKEAUOR ai AE 30 USA ETRE Pouch AAV EOHOT ias 39 Uninstalling the Software amp Printer Driver sese 35 ANACRE LADOS bi 38 DAS SCM DA AM e EET 39 Chapter 3 FUNCUONS M 43 Pearormine Dasic OPETI ONS as 44 JU UI Star at 46 ETICO ic 51 ROMANO Oi 22 PPI audeas teo dnce fucks cepe lia E 66 NOTA ma TECOS TIO S AA D sd obe Des AA URP uui ex ius PUE Don eas Z2 Chapter 4 Machine Adjustments ccccccsccsscesccsscesccsscescees 79 Machine ad ustne ALS AS O SO ERROR MESSAGE LI
227. ng the text Place the label on the garment at the loca tion where you wish the text to be trans ferred Set the iron to cotton 302 to 356 F 150 to 180 C and then press down on the label with the iron for about 15 seconds Q Allow the iron on transfer to cool for about 60 seconds and then carefully remove the backing paper 38 t White garments made from 100 cotton with a plain smooth surface are best for iron on trans fers You can also make transfers to garments made from 100 linen or cotton polyester blends as long as they have a plain smooth surface The label will not adhere properly to any cloth with a rough surface such as pile or denim or with a waterproof surface Heat sensitive mate rials such as nylon acetate or other similar fibers are also unsuitable as they may be dam aged when pressing with an iron at a high tem perature Do not move the iron while pressing otherwise the label may move out of the desired position Press the iron straight down onto the cloth After the backing tape has been removed the transferred label may appear glossy In addition some white spots may have appeared on the label if it was touched while the backing tape was peeled off These can be removed by iron ing over the label with a piece of cloth placed between the label and the iron Since the transferred label cannot be removed once it is applied make all transfers with care Washing Ga
228. nsequential or incidental damages the above limitation may not apply to you THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WRITTEN OR ORAL WHETHER EXPRESSED BY AFFIRMATION PROMISE DESCRIPTION DRAWING MODEL OR SAMPLE ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THIS ONE WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED e This Limited Warranty is the only warranty that Brother is giving for this Product It is the final expression and the exclusive and only statement of Brothers obligations to you It replaces all other agreements and understandings that you may have with Brother or its representatives e This warranty gives you certain rights and you may also have other rights that may vary from state to state e This Limited Warranty and Brother s obligation to you may not be changed in any way unless you and Brother sign the same piece of paper in which we 1 refer to this Product and your bill of sale date 2 describe the change to this warranty and 3 agree to make that change Important We recommend that you keep all original packing materials in the event that you ship this product Important Information Should you have questions or need information about your Brother Product we have a variety of support options for you to choose from USA Customer Service Customer Service 877 478 6824 voice Customer Service
229. nt Width Size 4 Home Y Press tuh POF until the first char acter that you wish to include in the num bering field is flashing To quit the Numbering function press OR hold down and press O Press y The message SELECT END POINT appears t f a barcode was selected in step this step is skipped C A numbering field must be located entirely within one line of text of a single block t A maximum of five characters can be selected for the numbering field SELECT END POINT 43 i sTUDIO 101 AUTO 1 10 HELSINKI A Length Margin Font Width Size gt E 4 o Ch 3 Functions O Press ZR The NUMBER screen appears ww Length Margin Font Width Size Q Press Or until the desired setting is displayed or use the number keys to type in the desired number of copies t To select the default setting 1 press the space bar t To change the setting in steps of 5 hold down either te or and then release the key when the desired setting is displayed Q Press to begin printing the set number of labels The number of each copy is dis played while it is being printed After printing with the Auto Cut function set to 5 6 A Cut 7 or 8 press s to feed the tape then cut it Fd Ch 3 Functions Storing and recalling files Memory functions c 7 You can store frequently used text and Auto For mat template tex
230. ntalla vuelve a aparecer el texto que se visualizaba previamente Si ya hay un archivo almacenado bajo el n mero de archivo seleccionado en la pantalla aparecer el mensaje OVERWRITE y tendr que decidir si lo sobreescribe o no lo borra de la memoria y guarda el nuevo 61 Para sobreescribir el archivo almacenado Eliminaci n de un archivo con el nuevo para borrar el archivo Para eliminar un archivo guardado New Block e Pulse Memory previamente almacenado y guarde el nuevo Mantenga pulsada y pulse bajo el numero seleccionado Aparecera la pantalla MEMORY Para retroceder y elegir otro n mero de archivo sin sobreescribir el archivo de texto pulse y seleccione un n mero de archivo diferente Una plantilla Auto Format que se haya almacenado en la memoria se borra manteniendo pulsada coxe ye p y pulsando desde la funci n Auto Format Recuperaci n de texto y plantillas de Pulse o hasta que Y se desplace Auto Format junto a CLEAR Q Pulse f Aparecer la pantalla CLEAR en el visor con el n mero de archivo actualmente Memory seleccionado O Mantenga pulsada y pulse Aparecer la pantalla MEMORY Para recuperar un archivo guardado Para salir de la funci n Memory Clear sin borrar los textos pulse O mantenga pulsada y Memory Se puede recuperar una plantilla Auto Format que se haya almacenado en la memoria cuando se selecciona una plantilla
231. ntiene pulsada cose se eliminar una l nea de texto Clear Clear Funci n code es Cuando se despeja la pantalla antes de entrar un texto nuevo se puede usar la funci n Clear para elegir si se borra todo el texto y si todas las funciones de formato Font Size Width Style1 Style2 Line Effects Frame Alignment Text Rotation Tape Margin Tape Length Block Margin Block Length y Mirror Printing vuelven a sus ajustes predeterminados o si s lo se elimina el texto Para eliminar todo el texto y los formatos O Mantenga pulsada y pulse Cs NOTA Para volver al texto sin borrar nada pulse O Clear mantenga pulsada y pulse ss JJ Como v ya est junto a TEXT amp FORMAT pulse w Se borrar todo el texto y todas las funciones de formato se reiniciar n a sus ajustes predeterminados Para eliminar s lo el texto Clear O Mantenga pulsada y pulse s Para volver al texto sin borrar nada pulse O Clear mantenga pulsada y pulse ss O Pulse O para desplazar Y junto a TEXT ONLY Pulse a El texto se borra pero las funciones cambios de formato permanecen sin 44 Formato Dispone de una amplia variedad de funciones de formato para crear etiquetas m s elegantes y personalizadas La apariencia de los caracteres se puede cambiar mediante las funciones de formato de texto Font Size Width Style1 Style2 Line Effects Frame Alignment y Text Rota
232. o de texto Tama os de etiquetas m ximo pulse O mantenga pulsada y pulse en puntos ous Bc n Etiquetas de direcciones AV2067 iip 3 j 3 4 de pulgada x 2 5 8 pulgadas 20 mm x 67 mm Pulse ara aplicar la configuraci n Em o sj P 5 Ftiquetas de direcciones de remitente AV1957 3 4 de pulgada x 2 1 4 pulgadas Para aplicar varios ajustes de formato al mismo Aan Pal Para volver al texto sin cambiar el formato tiempo contin e pulsando O para Etiquetas de direcciones de remitente AV1789 seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse ff O 5 8 de pulgada x 3 1 2 pulgadas l da 18 mm x 89 mm para seleccionar el ajuste que desee Pulse f s lo despu s de configurar las funciones necesarias t Con el ajuste AUTO seleccionado y el texto en un bloque de una sola l nea s lo con letras ix may sculas y sin letras acentuadas y escrito Size Funci n SIZE horizontalmente verticalmente sin la fuente BERMUDA el texto se imprime ligeramente m s grande que el m ximo posible para la anchura de la cinta El tama o del car cter se puede ajustar mediante la funci n Size Con el ajuste AUTO la m quina compara el texto con la anchura de la cinta instalada y autom ticamente ajusta los caracteres Si se selecciona el ajuste de tama o de texto de al tama o m s grande posible El tama o del 4 0 5 puntos el texto se imprimir con la fuente texto en la posici n actual del cursor
233. o en la posici n actual del cursor aparecer el indicador Frame en la parte superior de la pantalla Las l neas al lado derecho del indicador empezando por la parte superior indican si el ajuste Frame se aplica a todo el texto al bloque o a la l nea 50 posici n actual del cursor se muestra en el lado izquierdo de la pantalla y en el lado derecho se puede ver una muestra Q Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado t Incluso si ya se ha aplicado un ajuste Frame a una l nea del bloque de texto actual si se han establecido las funciones Block Format o Global Format Frame o a un bloque del texto actual si se ha establecido la funci n Global Format Frame todos los marcos se aplicar n y se imprimir n Para devolver el valor predeterminado a la funci n el marco cuadrado OFF pulse la barra de espacio Para volver al texto sin cambiar el formato pulse O mantenga pulsada y pulse Global Block Line fiy Jos p O Pulse para aplicar la configuraci n Para aplicar varios ajustes de formato al mismo tiempo contin e pulsando O para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse Home O para seleccionar el ajuste que desee Pulse da s lo despu s de configurar las funciones necesarias Funci n Text Alignment ALIGNMENT Podr elegir alinear el texto de una de estas cuatro maneras ABC DEFGH IJKLM LEFT ABC DEFGH IJKLM CENTER ABC DEFGH IJK
234. o m from the Featu re Set ist Introduction ae P touch Editor 3 2 has been successfully Choose Product Features Choose Alias Folder to display the list of options that can be a mma A Installing selected for installation B esf comple Click Done to quit the installer Pieuhfdzot3g D Choose Product Components Introduction Feature Set Custom M Choose Product Features m Ww P touch Editor 3 2 Py M Fonts US m wv Auto Format Templates e M Clip Art Description Q Click the Done button and then restart the computer Installing the P touch Quick Editor software The P touch Quick Editor software provides Only the options with a check mark quick access to the more simple label designing beside them are installed Select the features for easy text input and instant printing options that you wish to install and then of labels Install the P touch Quick Editor soft click the Next button ware onto a Macintosh as described below The Choose Alias Folder dialog box appears allowing you to select where an With a Mac OS before OS X alias to P touch Editor 3 2 will be added SER Se With the P touch and the Macintosh turned Chiasa Allas Foldar off connect the P touch to the computer To RD IN using the enclosed USB interface cable as Choose Alias Folder A PRA described on page 9 Be sure to leave the In your home folde
235. o restart my computer now C No will restart my computer later Remove any disks from their drives and then click Finish ta Cable USB y haga clic en el bot n OK El a cuadro de di logo que aparecer le informa de que el controlador de la impresora z PT 9600 3600 se ha instalado EN Si aparece un cuadro de di logo que indica que la instalaci n ha terminado y explica que debe reiniciar el PC seleccione la opci n de reiniciar el PC haga clic en el bot n Finish para reiniciar y A USUS RECEN TIUS extraiga el CD ROM del PC are directed to Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 x The following driver will be setup Brother PT 9600 wa E To continue click Next Setup will begin Con Windows XP Enel cuadro de di logo que aparecer que permite seleccionar si la P touch estar conectada mediante un cable USB o un cable RS 232C seleccione USB cable Haga clic en el bot n Next Aparecer un cuadro de di logo que solicitar que conecte la P touch al PC Driver Setup Brother PT 2600 EE x Cable USB y haga clic en el bot n OK o E Aparecer un cuadro de di logo que a Connect BrtherP 600 and hen tum ton informara de que el controlador de la i ee impresora de la PT 9600 3600 ya se ha instalado a ee SSO The following driver will be set up Brother PT 9600 Warning Do not connect or tum on the Brother PT 9600 until you are directed to
236. o the text without changing the format press OR hold down and press o Ch 3 Functions Line format functions code 8 The Line Format functions allow you to empha size a single line of the text by printing it with a Font Size Width Style1 Style2 Line Effects underline strikeout Frame or Text Alignment setting that is different from the rest of the text Only the square frame setting 1 can be selected for the Frame function in line formatting For a sample of the frame refer to page 104 Robert Becker ABCImport Export Division II To change the Line Format functions O Press l or i to position the cur sor in the line that will be given a different 4 Home format Hold down and press O Select FONT SIZE WIDTH STYLE1 STYLE2 LINE EFFECTS FRAME or ALIGN MENT and the desired setting as described on pages 54 to 60 The selected setting will only be applied to the text line that the cur sor is positioned in To return to the text without changing the format ting press OR hold down and press EMI 53 Ch 3 Functions Font function FONT With the Font function you can change the font of the text to one of the many that are available For samples of the available Font settings refer to page 99 The font of the text at the cursor s current position is shown at the bottom of the display lt lt lt P touch gt gt gt i
237. off reducing the amount of tape that is wasted Chain printing is an economical function designed to help eliminate wasted tape at the beginning of labels Without chain printing the usual leftover tape from the previous printing session is wasted before the first label in the cur rent session is printed However if an Auto Cut setting using chain printing is selected the last label in the previous session remains in the machine is not fed out so that the next label can be printed without wasting tape When the last label is printed press amp to feed the chain of labels and cut it When setting 1 2 3 or 4 is selected the Auto Cut indicator in the upper right corner of the display comes on indicating that the labels will be cut off after the last label in the chain is printed P touch i AUTO 1 10 Length Margin Font HELSINKI A Width Size gt c o NOTE t AV labels are always cut after they are printed regardless of the current Auto Cut setting t When setting 5 6 7 or 8 is selected the Auto Cut indicator does not come on The following Auto Cut settings are available 1 7 o both full and half cuts no chain printing 2 Hsc psc full cuts only no half X cuts and no chain print ing 3 ca E half cuts only no full cuts and no chain print ing 4 D El no full half cuts or chain printing 5 ipd E full half cuts and chain print
238. ogo Haga clic sobre el tercer bot n desde la parte superior P touch AV Editor Se iniciar el Asistente InstallShield para la instalaci n del software P touch AV Editor y aparecer el cuadro de di logo de bienvenida Welcome x Welcome to the P touch AY Editor Setup program This f program will install P touch AW Editor on your computer Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Nextto continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may resultin severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law i Cancel NOTA ts Para instalar s lo el controlador de la impresora haga 10 clic en el bot n inferior Driver Con Windows XP aparecer un mensaje inform ndole de que el controlador de impresora ha pasado las pruebas de compatibilidad y que debe hacer clic sobre el bot n Continue Anyway si aparece un mensaje de aviso Haga clic sobre el bot n OK Confirmation IMPORTANT This printer driver has passed compatibility tests IF your hardware wizard displays a warning message please select Continue Anyway to complete the al software installation
239. ombre y contrase a de adminis trador en las casillas apropiadas y despu s haga clic en el bot n OK Aparecer el cua dro de di logo Introduction e Install PT 9600 Driver Welcome to the PT 9600 Driver Installer ion luem Welcome to the Brother PT 9600 Driver Installation Program You will be guided through the steps necessary to install this software T x ais Cites gt Continue Q Haga clic en el bot n Continue Aparecer un cuadro de di logo describiendo los requi sitos del sistema Cuando se pulse el bot n Continue podr aparecer un men saje advirtiendo que hay instalada una versi n anterior del con trolador de impresora Aseg rese de desinstalar la versi n anterior del controlador de impresora antes de intentar instalar el controlador nuevo Para ver detalles sobre la desinstalaci n del controlador de impresora consulte Para desinstalar el con trolador de la impresora en la p gina 33 21 O Despu s de comprobar que su ordenador satisface los requisitos especificados haga clic en el bot n Continue Aparecer un cuadro de di logo conte niendo el contrato de licencia 9 Despu s de leer el contrato de licencia haga clic en el bot n Continue Aparecer un mensaje pregunt ndole si acepta el contrato de licencia Install PT 9600 Driver To continue installing the software you must agree to the terms of 8 Introt the software license agreement 9 Read 8 Licen Cl
240. on 27 99 Avery Labels for P touch Ideal for printing Avery paper labels one at a time black printing on white labels AN 1789 File Folder Labels 5 8 x 3 1 2 50 labels cassette AM 1957 Return Address Labels 3 4 x 2 1 4 70 labels cassette AV 2067 StockNo Address Labels 3 4 x 2 5 8 65 labels cassette Description Standard Laminated Tapes 11 2 36mm wide laminated tapes TZ 161 Black on Clear TZ 261 Black on White TZ 661 116 Black on Yellow Standard Laminated Tapes cont StockNo Description Price 1 24mm wide laminated tapes TZ 151 Black on Clear 22 99 TZ 251 Black on White 23 99 TZ 252 Red on White 23 99 TZ 354 Gold on Black 26 99 TZ 355 White on Black 26 99 TZ 451 Black on Red 23 99 TZ 651 Black on Yellow 23 99 TZ B51 Black on Fluorescent Orange 16 4ft tape length 28 99 3 4 18mm wide laminated tapes TZ 141 Black on Clear 18 99 TZ 145 White on Clear 20 99 TZ 241 Black on White 20 99 TZ 242 Red on White 20 99 TZ 243 Blue on White 20 99 TZ 344 Gold on Black 23 99 TZ 345 White on Black 23 99 TZ 441 Black on Red 20 99 TZ 541 Black on Blue 20 99 TZ 545 White on Blue 23 99 TZ 641 Black on Yellow 20 99 TZ 741 Black on Green 20 99 TZ B41 Black on Fluor
241. on It um ds Robert Becker FLOPPY 3 omm gt Lamm Division II 10 12 02 3 4 52 BASKETBALL d VCR NO 1 8 mm 1 40 mm Indianapolis 10 12 02 3 4 5 5 A VCR VHS 2 a come pue 3 8 2 9 R 10 12 02 obert VCR 8mm 1 ouw Caan fen Standard 1 2 3 6 VCR 8mm 2 12 mm 92 mm JAZZ 30min i zn Anne amp Robert VCR VHSC is a w vy mm mm o RECEPTION 10 12 02 1 2 8 10 12 02 FLOPPY 1 vara N gt Le Lo D gt e gt lt N N N mi ec YI Appendix Template Tape Label A Name Width Length P 3 8 3 5 45 min i AUDIO 1 ota llas Oldies 3 8 3 57 R Becker 3 8 3 5 mMi 12mm 42 mm A 11 2 7 9 O PRESENTATION 26 36 mm 200 mm CONFERENCE 1 7 04 eee PRESENTATION E 2007 STAMP L 28 STAMP NORMAL L 1 24 mm 4 1 2 115 mm STAMP M 29 STAMP NORMAL M 3 4 18 mm 4 1 8 105 mm E ana RECEIVED 30 STAMP 2LINE L 1 doni 115 mm Date STAMP M 31 STAMP VERTICAL M 3 4 18 mm 4 1 8 105 mm 2s o D o o t 107 Appendix Samples of the available AV label templates are shown below Template AV2067 M r R Becker 20 mm x 67 mm Los Angeles CA 88888 AV2067 M f r R Becker 2067 ADDRESS 2 3 4 x 2 5 8 a nrnians 20 mm x 67 mm Los Angeles CA 88888 AV2067 Mr R Becker 2067 ADDRESS 3 3 4 x 2 5 8 29 South Main St 20 mm x 67 mm Los Angeles CA 88888 AV 20067 Mr R Becker 2067 ADDRESS 4 3 4 x 2 5
242. on to its default setting the square frame OFF press the space bar t To return to the text without changing the for matting press OR hold down and Global Block Line press or O Press to apply the setting To apply several format settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function then pressing 1 or t to select the desired setting Press 4 only after the necessary functions have lew Block been set Text Alignment function ALIGNMENT You can choose to align the text in one of four ways ABC DEFGH IJKLM LEFT ABC DEFGH IJKLM CENTER ABC DEFGH IJKLM RIGHT ABC DEFGH IJKLM JUSTIFY 60 In addition if the Text Rotation function is set to OFF the text will align within the length set with the Block Length function If the Text Rota tion function is set to any setting other than OFF the text will align within the width of the tape The alignment of the text at the cursor s current position is shown at the top of the dis play i AUTO 1 10 HELSINKI Length Margin Font Width Size To change the setting for the Text Align ment function Q Hold down and press Global Block Line iile org NOTE This step may be skipped if settings for several for mat functions are being applied at the same time Press or until ALIGNMENT is dis played The setting for the text at the cur sor s current position
243. on your computer Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Nextto continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law 10 Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Nextto continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion ofit may resultin severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law Q Carefully read the contents of the Welcome dialog box and then click the Next button to continue The User Information dialog box appears User Information x Type your name below You must also type the name of the company you work for Company Brother Co Ltd Type the necessary information into the appropriate boxes If the information has already been registered in Windows i
244. ons are being applied at the same time O Press or until T MARGIN is dis played The current setting is shown on the left side of the display 62 Tape Length function T LENGTH Although the length of the printed label auto matically adjusts to fit the length of the entered text there may be times when you will want to make a label with a specific length The Tape Length function allows you to set the label length between 0 25 and 38 84 0 6 cm and 99 5 cm The current Tape Length setting is shown in the lower left corner of the display lt lt lt P touch gt gt gt 1 10 HELSINKI Length Margin Font gt E o Width Size The Tape Length setting is only applied to labels printed on TZ tape The label length of AV labels cannot be adjusted To change the setting for the Tape Length function O Hold down and press m This step may be skipped if settings for several Glo bal Format functions are being applied at the same time Press or until T LENGTH is dis played The current setting is shown on the left side of the display 1 10 HELSINKI Length Margin Font gt o Width Size O Press or until the desired setting is displayed or use the number keys to type in the desired tape length Ch 3 Functions NOTE t To return the function to its default setting AUTO press the space bar t To change the setting in 0 1 1 0 cm steps hold down either Or E
245. ontiene una pel cula de sello ponga el sello sobre una pieza de papel que no sirva y tire para extraer el marco del sello un extremo cada vez Despu s saque lentamente la pel cula del sello Procure que la tinta no salpique Mantenga el soporte de pel cula de sello fuera del alcance de los ni os Evite que la tinta le entre en los ojos o en la boca Si la tinta le entra en los ojos o en la boca l vese inmediatamente con agua fr a durante varios minutos y consulte a un m dico Procure que la tinta no le manche la piel la ropa o papeles importantes L vese inmediatamente con jab n si la tinta le ha manchado la piel Quiz no se quite toda la tinta al lavarse Q Con la cara brillante de la pel cula de sello mirando hacia arriba alinee un extremo de la pel cula de sello con la hendidura en el lado del soporte del sello 35 Q Sujete el extremo de la pel cula de sello en su lugar con el pulgar y pase la pel cula de sello por las gu as mientras la aprieta Doble el otro extremo de la pel cula de sello en el otro lado del soporte del sello y mant ngala en su lugar con el dedo Q Encaje el marco sobre la pel cula de sello y presione el marco hacia abajo a su lugar O Inserte el soporte del sello directamente en el tap n t Compruebe que el tap n cubre correctamente el sello para prevenir derrames de tinta t Si no va a utilizar el sello t pelo firmemente con el tap n y gu rdelo siempre en posi
246. or 3 2 the P touch Quick Editor or the P touch AV Editor software from a PC as described below To uninstall the software O Start up Windows 98 98 SE Me 2000 or XP O Click the Start button in the taskbar select Settings and then click Control Panel With Windows XP click the Start button in the taskbar and then click Control Panel In the Control Panel window double click Add Remove Programs Add or Remove Programs in Windows XP NOTE The dialog box that appears may differ depending on the operating system being used O In the Add Remove Programs Properties dia log box select P touch Editor 3 2 to delete the P touch Editor 3 2 software P touch Quick Editor to delete the P touch Quick Editor software or P touch AV Editor to delete the P touch AV Editor software and then click the Add Remove button Change Remove button in Windows XP Q A message appears asking if you wish to delete the selected application Click the Yes button to delete the application If you do not wish to delete the application click the No button Inthe dialog box that appears indicating that the application is deleted click the OK button Uninstalling the printer driver Uninstall the PT 9600 3600 printer driver from a PC as described below 35 E b jmd E jmd QD O em E 19 O Ch 2 Getting Started To uninstall the prin
247. or a Typical installation the User s Guide can also be installed Select the components you wantto install clear the components you do not want to install Components m Description This component contains the Editor files Chan Space Required 16353 K Space Available 2808556 K 1 Select which options to install Editor P touch Editor 3 2 software Clip Art Illustrations for the P touch Editor 3 2 Clip Art function Fonts Auto Format Templates Templates for the Auto Format function Help Help files for P touch Editor 3 2 User s Guide HTML User s Guide for P touch Editor 3 2 The User s Guide can also be viewed from the CD ROM 11 E o jmd E jmd QD O c E lt b O Q D gt le o r Dd m 1 o B Ch 2 Getting Started Transfer Manager PT 9600 only not compatible with the software for the PT 3600 Two applications Transfer Manager which allows you to transfer templates a database linked to a tem plate or image data to the P touch from a computer and Backup Manager which allows you to back up P touch data on a PC and transfer it back to the P touch If the Change button can be clicked while an option is selected sub compo nents can be selected Click the Change button to display the Select Sub compo nents dialog box and then select the sub components that you wish to install by putting a check mark beside them If certai
248. ord processor this machine s return key is used to end a line of text and start another one When you have finished entering one line press the return key to make a new line and move the cursor to it A single block of text can only contain a maximum of 16 text lines If the maximum number of text lines has already been entered when e is pressed Block the error message 16 LINE LIMIT will appear The number of text lines that can be printed depends on the width of the tape Ch 3 Functions For TZ tapes Maximum Number of Lines That Can Be Printed Tape Width 1 2 12 mm 112 G6 mm INEA 6 10 Stamp 1 24 mm For AV labels Label Sizes AV2067 Address labels 3 4 x 2 5 8 20 mm x 67 mm AV1957 Return address labels 3 4 x 2 1 4 19 mm x 57 mm AV1789 File folder labels 5 8 x 3 1 2 17 mm x 89 Maximum Number of Lines That Can Be Printed mm To create a new line e Press 2s The return mark J appears at the end of the line New Block function cos J In order for one section of the text to have a dif ferent number of lines than other sections of the text or in order to apply a different format to a section of the text Refer to Block format func tions on page 53 a new text block must be created using the New Block function 47 Ch 3 Functions NOTE t A single label can only contain a maximum of fifty text blocks If the ma
249. ormaci n de registro haga clic en el bot n No y vuelva al paso Q Aparecer el cuadro de di logo Choose Destination Location Choose Destination Location E x Setup will install P touch Quick Editor in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder You can choose notto install P touch Quick Editor by clicking Cancel to exit Setup m Destination Folder Browse C Program Files Brother Quick Editor i Cancel Q Haga clic en el bot n Next para empezar la instalaci n Para cambiar la ubicaci n donde se va a instalar P touch Quick Editor haga clic en el bot n Browse y a continuaci n seleccione la carpeta de instalaci n en el cuadro de di logo Choose Folder que aparecer Haga clic en el bot n OK Cuando P touch Quick Editor ya se ha instalado aparece un cuadro de di logo que permite seleccionar d nde se a adir n los accesos directos de P touch Quick Editor Add shortcut Startup menu v Quick launch bar Seleccione las ubicaciones que desee para los accesos directos y haga clic en el bot n Next Aparecer un cuadro de di logo que permite seleccionar si se instala el controlador de la impresora ouesior A 1 OK to install the printer driver Para instalar el controlador de la impresora haga clic en Yes Windows XP solamente Aparecer un mensaje
250. os pasos Qj y Q Pulse Js La pantalla MENU aparece en el visor Compruebe que Y aparece junto a PRINT y Ajustes de la m quina pulse F lock El texto almacenado bajo los n meros de archivo seleccionados se imprimen Para terminar la funci n Auto Format Pulse O hasta que Y se desplace junto a EXIT Pulse La pantalla de la funci n Auto Format que se visualizaba antes de utilizar la funci n Memory Print reaparecer en el visor Funciones de configuraci n code fA Hay varias funciones disponibles para cambiar el aspecto general de c mo se muestra texto en la pantalla y para ajustar el funcionamiento de la P touch Para cambiar el ajuste UNITS Esta funci n le permite seleccionar las unidades que se usar n para visualizar las mediciones Mantenga pulsada y pulse A NOTA Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de Configuraci n O Pulse O hasta que se visualice UNITS O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado NOTA Para devolver a la funci n su ajuste predeterminado pulgada pulse la barra de espacio 4 O Pulse para aplicar la configuraci n New Block Para aplicar varios ajustes de Configuraci n al mismo tiempo contin e pulsando O para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse fe o para seleccionar el ajuste que se desee Pulse Jz s lo despu s de configurar
251. pear Install on System Requirements co Macintosh HD Installation requires Available on volume Computer Macintosh Power Macintosh or iMac Operating system Mac OS 8 6 or later iil m Available memory Minimum 24MB Available hard disk space Minimum 30MB This software is only compatible with Mac OS X classic Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc Q Seleccione el m todo de instalaci n O Para una instalaci n b sica Si se hace clic en el bot n Install se empezar n a instalar inmediatamente las opciones b sicas Se necesitan unas 20 MB de espacio de disco duro disponible para empezar la instalaci n Si hay suficiente espacio de disco duro disponible haga clic en el bot n Install O Para una instalaci n personalizada Si se hace clic en el bot n Custom Install se visualiza un cuadro de di logo que permite seleccionar las opciones que se van a instalar FEE HE PE HE PE HE RRR RH RRR RH RRR RH RRR P touch Quick Editor HE E HE PE HE PE HE PE HE PE HE RRR RH RE RT RT P touch Quick Editor is an application that allows you to create labels quickly and easily P touch Quick Editor MPT 9600 Driver Installation Start up the installer and then follow the messages that appear System Requirements Computer Macintosh Power Macintosh or iMac Install on EJ Macintosh HD Installation requires Available on volume 7 1 MB 1076 1 MB O
252. perated in Users groups In addition this software is not compat ible with the Windows 2000 Server operating system With Windows XP printing and installation is only possible from an account with administra tor privileges These operations cannot be per formed from an account with limited privileges Hard disk free space At least 20 MB 100 MB for a full installation Up to 100 MB of hard disk free space may be needed when printing long labels or large amounts of data Memory At least 64 MB Monitor VGA or higher graphics card USB port CD ROM drive E b jmd E jmd QD O em E 19 O Ch 2 Getting Started Installing the P touch Editor 3 2 software The P touch Editor 3 2 software includes a variety NOTE of more complex functions for printing barcodes amp To install just the printer driver click the lower and images enabling you to design just about any button Driver With Windows XP a message label that you can image Install the P touch Editor appears informing you that the printer driver has 3 2 software onto a PC as described below passed compatibility tests and that the Continue Anyway button should be clicked if a warning message appears Click the OK button Do not connect the P touch to the computer before n st al n g th e S oftw a r e oth e rw S e it m ay n ot b e UO Erud a message please select Continue Anyway to complete the installed cor
253. perating system Mac OS 8 6 or later Available memory Minimum 24MB Available hard disk space Minimum 30MB This software is only compatible with Mac OS X classic Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc S lo se instalar n las opciones con una marca de verificaci n Seleccione las opciones que desee instalar y haga clic en el bot n Install Para poder imprimir desde la P touch 9600 3600 debe seleccionar PT 9600 3600 Driver Controlador PT 9600 3600 Je instalarlo Cuando aparezca el cuadro de di logo que indica que la instalaci n ha terminado haga clic en el bot n Quit A Installation is done Click QUIT to leave the installer Click CONTINUE to perform additional installations Q Cuando aparezca el cuadro de di logo que solicita si desea reiniciar el PC haga clic en el bot n Restart 6 Please restart your Macintosh before using any ofthe installed items 19 Con Mac OS X 10 1 a 10 2 3 Q Con la P touch y el Macintosh apagados 20 conecte la P touch al PC mediante el cable de interfaz USB que se incluye como se describe en la p gina 3 Deje la P touch apagada Encienda el Macintosh Inserte el disco CD ROM que se incluye en la unidad de CD ROM del PC P touch m T v A i Computer Home Favorites Applications A Haga doble clic en la carpeta Mac OS X para abrirla 000 7 Mac OS X DY Computer Home 3 P touch Quick
254. pgrade P touch Editor 3 2 for Access 2000 click the No button If a dialog box appears indicating that the installa tion is finished and explaining that the computer should be restarted select the option for restarting the computer click the Finish button to restart the computer and then remove the CD ROM from the CD ROM drive Installing the P touch Quick Editor software The P touch Quick Editor software provides quick access to the more simple label designing features for easy text input and instant printing of labels Install the P touch Quick Editor soft ware onto a PC as described below Do not connect the P touch to the computer before installing the software otherwise it may not be installed correctly Be sure to connect the P touch only when you are instructed to do so To install the P touch Quick Editor software O Insert the enclosed CD ROM into the com puter s CD ROM drive A dialog box auto matically appears allowing you to select what to install Selectthe components that you wantto install m P touch Editor P touch Editor Ver 3 2 the printer driver and the manual will be installed P touch Quick Editor P touch Quick Editor and the printer driver will be installed m P touch AV Editor P touch AV Editor and the printer driver will be installed r Driver The printer driver will be installed Ch 2 Getting Started NOTE If the dialog box does not automatical
255. printer driver refer to To uninstall the printer driver on page 37 O After checking that your computer meets the speci fied requirements click the Continue button A dia log box containing the license agreement appears 9 After reading the license agreement click the Continue button A message asking if you agree to the license agreement appears Install PT 9600 Driver To continue installing the software you must agree to the terms of 8 introl the software license agreement 9 Read 8 Licen Click Agree to continue or click Disagree to cancel the installation a Disagree A Agree Y nst 1 gu IAS are reurstereu uaucrnaias Ur pO 000 E Computer Inc c Brother Industries Ltd 1993 2002 All rights reserved f Print Y f Save f Go Back Continue f you agree click the Agree button A dialog box appears allowing you to select the vol ume where the printer driver will be installed If the Disagree button is clicked the installation will be cancelled D Select the desired volume and then click the Continue button A dialog box appears describ ing how the printer driver will be installed e Install PT 9600 Driver Easy Install Introduction Read Me License Click Install to perform a basic installation of this O Select Destination software package 8 Installation Type GoBack Y install 9 Click the Install button A m
256. pulse 1 Aparece el mensaje SELECT START POINT 60 4 Home y End Pulse 2 Oz hasta que parpadee el primer car cter que desea incluir en el campo de numeraci n Para salir de la funci n Numbering pulse cana O Number mantenga pulsada y pulse Q Pulse aa Aparece el mensaje SELECT END POINT t Si se ha seleccionado un c digo de barras en el paso este paso se omite Un campo de numeraci n tiene que estar situado ntegramente dentro de una l nea de texto de un solo bloque Para el campo de numeraci n se pueden seleccionar un m ximo de cinco caracteres Pulse ER Aparece la pantalla NUMBER Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado o utilice las teclas num ricas para escribir el n mero de copias que desee t Para seleccionar el ajuste predeterminado 1 pulse la barra de espacio ts Para cambiar el valor de 5 en 5 pasos mantenga pulsada O y suelte la tecla cuando se visualice el valor deseado Q Pulse E para empezar a imprimir el n mero de etiquetas establecido El n mero de cada copia se visualiza mientras se imprime Despu s de imprimir con la funci n Auto Cut A Cut establecida en 5 6 7 o 8 pulse amp para alimentar la cinta y cortarla Almacenamiento y activaci n de archivos Memory Funciones Memory coe 3 El texto que se usa con frecuencia y el texto de la plantilla Auto Fo
257. r O other ROI P touch turned off O Turn on the Macintosh Q Insert the enclosed CD ROM into the com puter s CD ROM drive P touch E El Don t create aliases Cancel Previous RD O Select the desired location for the alias and then click the Next button A dialog box appears allowing you to check the installation Mac 0S X 23 Ch 2 Getting Started O Double click the Mac OS 9 folder to open it When the dialog box appears indicating Y Mac 05 9 that the installation is finished click the Quit button P touch Quick Editor Installer P touch Editor 3 2 A Installation is done Click QUIT to leave the installer Click CONTINUE to perform additional installations Read Me Q Double click the P touch Quick Editor Installer icon in the folder that appears The installer starts up When the dialog box appears asking if you wish to restart the computer click the Restart button to restart the computer using any ofthe Installed items PHT TTT TTT TTT TTT FE E HE RN P touch Quick Editor FE E HE PE HE TE HE PE HE PE HE RRR HRT RH RR P touch Quick Editor is an application that allows you to create labels quickly and easily Y Installation uick Editor Start up the i installer and then follow the LL messages that appear i Install on Qo Computer Macintosh Power Macintosh or EE ut HD E With Mac OS X 1 0 1 to 1 0 2 3
258. r 3 2 folder to delete the P touch Editor 3 2 software e P touch Quick Editor folder to delete the P touch Quick Editor software In the System Folder open the Extensions folder Drag the following to the Trash icon e PT 9600 3600 icon to delete the printer driver e USB PT 9600 3600 Extension icon to delete the printer driver In the System Folder open the Preferences folder Drag the following to the Trash icon e P touch Editor 3 2 Prefs icon for the P touch Editor 3 2 software e P touch Quick Editor Prefs icon for the P touch Quick Editor software e PT 9600 3600 Prefs icon for the printer driver With Mac OS X 10 1 to 10 2 3 To uninstall the P touch Editor 3 2 software Double click the Applications folder on the Macintosh HD to open it Double click the P touch Editor 3 2 folder to open it Double click the Uninstall P touch folder Double click the Uninstall P touch icon in the folder that appears The uninstaller starts up Click the Uninstall button After P touch Editor 3 2 is removed a dialog box appears indicating that the uninstallation is finished Click the Quit button To uninstall the P touch Quick Editor software Double click the Applications folder on the Macintosh HD to open it Double click the P touch Quick Editor folder to open it Double click the Uninstall P touch folder Double click the Uninstall P touch icon in the folder that appears The uninsta
259. r keys to type in the desired margin width Tape Margin function T MARGIN t To return the function to its default setting 0 16 inch 0 4 cm press the space bar The Tape Margin function allows you to adjust To change the setting in 0 1 1 0 cm steps the size of the margins on the left and right sides a ee ee ee mE NARRA of your text The label margins can be set to a the key when the desired setting is displayed width between 0 08 and 4 00 0 2 cm and 9 9 cm The tape margins are displayed in the currently E selected unit of measurement inches or centi bottom of the display changed with the Setup functions Refer to page 80 To return to the text without changing the for matting press OR hold down and Global press O Press to apply the setting lt lt lt P touch gt gt gt Gi AUTO HELSINKI A Length Margin Font Width Size gt 4 o The Tape Margin setting is only applied to labels To apply several format settings at the same time printed on TZ tape The tape margins of AV labels MEN Vor AAA are fixed at 0 20 0 5 cm and cannot be adjusted P 5 even if this setting is changed then pressing f or to select the desired setting only after the necessary functions have To change the setting for the Tape Margin been set function Global O Hold down and press This step may be skipped if settings for several Glo bal Format functi
260. ra de los m rgenes entre los bloques de texto se puede ajustar entre 0 00 y 12 00 pulgadas 0 0 cm y 30 0 cm Los m rgenes izquierdo y derecho de cada bloque de texto tendr n una anchura que ser la mitad del valor especificado Si se selecciona el ajuste AUTO los m rgenes del bloque se establecer n en 0 00 pulgadas 0 0 cm si s lo se ha creado un bloque de texto y en 0 13 pulgadas 0 3 cm si se han creado varios bloques de texto Para cambiar el valor de la funci n Block Margin Global O Mantenga pulsada y pulse 53 Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de formato O Pulse O hasta que se visualice B MARGIN El ajuste actual se muestra en el lado izquierdo de la pantalla O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el ajuste que desee o utilice las teclas num ricas para escribir la anchura del margen de bloque que prefiera v Para volver la funci n a su ajuste predeterminado AUTO pulse la barra de espacio Para cambiar el ajuste en pasos de 0 1 pulgadas 1 0 cm pasos mantenga pulsada ffel Ot y a continuaci n suelte la tecla cuando se visualice el valor que desee Los m rgenes de bloque se indican en la unidad de medida seleccionada actualmente pulgadas o cent metros La unidad de medida se puede cambiar con las funciones de Configuraci n Consulte la p gina 65 Para volver al texto sin cambiar el formato pulse O mantenga puls
261. rcefully pressing down the stamp holder for up to 30 seconds replace the stamp holder with a new one Do not try to refill the stamp holder 41 Ch 2 Getting Started Q D gt le o mes Q m 1 Q 42 Chapter 3 Functions Ch 3 Functions Performing basic operations The following keys are necessary for using the many functions Arrow keys The machine s LCD display can show three rows of 19 characters however the text that you create can be up to 1000 characters long You can review and edit your text by using the four arrow keys 2 and Em to move the cursor so that different parts of the text are shown in the display 4 Home The arrow keys can also be used to select the various functions and settings left arrow key To move the cursor one character to the left o Press once If this key is pressed when the cursor is at the begin ning of a line following another line the cursor moves to the end of the previous line To move the cursor several characters to the left e Hold down until the cursor moves to the desired position To move the cursor to the beginning of the current line of text e Hold down and press 7 To move the cursor to the beginning of the current text block e Hold down and press 7 If the cursor is already at the beginning of a text block when these keys are pressed the cursor moves to the beginning of t
262. re being applied at the same time Press or until STYLE2 is displayed The setting for the text at the cursor s cur rent position is shown on the left side of the display and a sample can be seen on the right side 05 13 4 STYLE2 A G3 NORMAL HELSINKI A Width Size gt c 4 o AUTO 1 10 Length Margin Font Q Press Or until the desired setting is displayed 58 NOTE re f appears as a setting the Style2 func tion has already been applied to either a line in the current text block if the Block Format or the Global Format function is being set or a block in the current text if the Global Format function is being set Changing the setting will cancel the setting that was previously applied To return the function to its default setting NORMAL press the space bar To return to the text without changing the for matting press OR hold down and Global Block Line E ori O Press to apply the setting To apply several format settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function then pressing t or to select the desired setting pre 8 8 only after the necessary functions have Press been set Line Effects function LINE EFFECTS The Line Effects function enables you to under line or strike out certain parts of your text 12 34 56 UNDERLINE STRIKEOUT When any setting other than OFF is selected for the text at the cur
263. rectly Be sure to connect the P touch only when you are instructed to do so The first Driver Setup dialog box appears allowing you to select whether the P touch will be connected through the USB port or the RS To install the P touch Editor 3 2 software 232C port Continue with the procedure in Installing the USB printer driver on page 17 To O Insert the enclosed CD ROM into the computer s install the serial printer driver refer to the CD ROM drive A dialog box automatically Advanced Functions booklet appears allowing you to select what to install PE Selecttype of connection cable Selectthe components that you wantto install Q D gt le o mp Dd Im mp D oa Connection Cable Serial cable gt 10101 E m P touch Editor P touch Editor Ver 3 2 the printer driver and the manual will be installed ay m P touch Quick Editor P touch Quick Editor and the printer driver will be installed m P touch AV Editor C USB cable uus 2 gt P touch AY Editor and the printer driver will be installed Driver t To install the P touch Quick Editor software click dd the second button from the top P touch Quick Editor Continue with the procedure in Installing mm the P touch Quick Editor software on page 12 Welcome x NOTE If the dialog box does not automatically appear double click My Computer on the desktop and then do
264. rgin Font Width Size Q Press Or until the desired setting is displayed or use the number keys to type in the desired block length t To return the function to its default setting AUTO press the space bar To change the setting in 0 1 1 0 cm steps hold down either or ta and then release the key when the desired setting is displayed The block length is displayed in the currently selected unit of measurement inches or centi meters The unit of measurement can be changed with the Setup functions Refer to page 80 To return to the text without changing the for matting press OR hold down and Global Block press or O Press to apply the setting To apply several format settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function then pressing t or to select the desired setting only after the necessary functions have been set Mirror Printing function Mirror ue 68 This function prints your label so that the text can be read from the adhesive side of the tape If mirror printed labels are attached to glass or some other transparent material they can be read correctly from the opposite side ABC VBC When ON is selected the Mirror Printing indi cator at the top of the display comes on ON lt lt lt P touch gt gt gt i AUTO 1 10 Length Margin Font HELSINKI A Width Size gt c o To print a mirror image of the t
265. right of the file name For a TZ tape template file PRINT TZ OO VIDEO FAVORITE SONGS Length Margin Font Width Size PRINT AV2067 AV O0O ADDRESS1 v R Becker JABC Impo Length Margin Font Width Size Repeat steps and Q until Y appears to the right of all files to be printed Files marked with V will be printed Ch 3 Functions NOTE t f multiple files are to be printed follow steps O and to mark them with Y If only one file is to be printed steps and can be skipped To select all files in the memory hold down and press the space bar To remove a file from those that are to be printed select the file and then press the space bar to remove the Y from the right side of the file name Q Press Le The MENU screen appears in the display O Make sure that v is beside PRINT and then The text stored under the New Block press selected file numbers is printed To change the style of the stored Auto For mat template 9 Press or until Y moves beside CHANGE STYLE 04 04 PRINT MORE P MENU CHANGE STYLE Length Margin Font Width Size CHAR STYLE gt ITALIC Width Size Length Margin Font D Press Or until the name of the desired format style is displayed A sample can be seen on the right side of the display NOTE The default setting NO CHANGE can be selected by pressing the space bar Press Js The MENU screen appears in the displ
266. rmat se puede guardar en la memoria Estos archivos de texto archivos de plantilla para cinta TZ y archivos de plantilla para etiquetas AV continuar n en la memoria incluso si se borran todos los caracteres de la pantalla mediante funci n Clear se mantiene pulsado y se pulsa s Cuando se almacenan los archivos se les da un n mero y tambi n se les puede asignar un nombre de archivo para que sea m s f cil activarlos En la memoria se pueden almacenar hasta 100 archivos o aproximadamente 10 000 caracteres Todas las funciones Global Format Block Format y Line Format Font Size Width Style Line Effects Frame Alignment y Text Rotation Tape Margin Tape Length Block Margin Block Length que se hayan especificado tambi n se guardan con el texto Dado que se abrir una copia del archivo de texto almacenado cuando se use la funci n Recall el texto se puede editar o imprimir sin cambiar el archivo almacenado original No obstante la funci n Store tambi n se puede usar para sustituir el archivo guardado previamente con uno nuevo que se haya editado Si ya no se necesita el archivo o se necesita m s espacio se puede usar la funci n Memory Clear para borrarlo Con la funci n Memory Print se pueden seleccionar r pidamente uno o varios archivos almacenados en la memoria para imprimirlos NOTA Las plantillas para cinta TZ y etiquetas AV de la funci n Auto Format tambi n se pueden almacenar mientras la plant
267. rments with transfer labels can be washed over 20 times if the label has been transferred correctly Normal biological and non biological household detergents may be used The label may become discolor if the garment is placed in bleach for an extended length of time Be careful that hard objects such as buckles or buttons do not come into contact with the label during the wash Do not dry clean garments that have had trans fer labels applied Drying Garments with transfer labels may be dried either inside or outside out Do not tumble dry The transfers will come off and may stick to other items of clothing Ironing Iron garments with transfers using normal tem perature settings Be sure to place a piece of cloth between the iron and the label when you iron over it to pre vent the label from sticking to the iron The labels are non toxic however please main tain the usual precautions such as not placing them in your mouth etc Fabric tape Fabric tape is used to attach a piece of fabric printed with your text onto garments using an iron After printing the text onto fabric tape and cutting off the label using scissors place the label on an ironed garment at the location where you wish to attach it in such a way that the printed text can be read correctly Cover the label with another piece of cloth and use an iron set to a medium high temperature 320 to 356 F 160 to 180 C to press down firmly for 15 to 30
268. rtion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law E Cancel Para instalar el software P touch AV Editor haga clic sobre el tercer bot n desde la parte superior P touch AV Editor Contin e con el procedimiento Instalaci n del software P touch AV Editor de la p gina 9 Welcome j x A Welcome to the P touch AV Editor Setup program This program will install P touch AV Editor on your computer Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Nextto continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law E Cancel Q Lea atentamente el contenido del cuadro de di logo de bienvenida y haga clic en el bot n Next para continuar Aparecer el cuadro de di logo User Information User Information x Type your name below You must also type the name of the company you work for Company Brother Co Ltd Escriba la informaci n requerida en las casillas correspondientes si la informaci n ya se ha registrado en Windows aparecer autom
269. s and 9 can be skipped Press J The MENU screen appears in the display Make sure that Y is beside PRINT and then press The text stored under the Block selected file numbers is printed To finish using the Auto Format function Press 1 or until Y moves beside EXIT 02 04 PRINT A MENU EXIT PRINT MORE Length Margin Font Width Size Press The screen from the Auto Format P displayed before the Memory Print function was used reappears in the display Chapter 4 Machine Adjustments nts stme EA D t o E O G Ch 4 Machine Adjustments Q Hold down and press Machine adjustments Setup functions c Various functions are available for changing the general appearance how text is shown on the display and for adjusting the operation of the P touch This step may be skipped if settings for several Setup functions are being applied at the same time Press or until LANGUAGE is dis played 02 07 4 LANGUAGE To change the UNITS setting UD 2 ENGLISH This function lets you choose the units used for displaying measurements Hold down and press A NOTE Length Margin Font Width Size Q Press or until the desired setting is displayed NOTE To return the function to its default setting ENGLISH press the space bar O Press to apply the setting This step may be skipped if settings for several Setup functions are b
270. s f program will install P touch AV Editor on your computer Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Nextto continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law E Cancel Q Lea atentamente el contenido del cuadro de di logo de bienvenida y haga clic en el bot n Next para continuar Aparecer el cuadro de di logo User Information User Information x Type your name below You must also type the name of the company you work for cmx cancel O Escriba la informaci n requerida en las casillas correspondientes si la informaci n ya se ha registrado en Windows aparecer autom ticamente y haga clic en el bot n Next Aparecer un cuadro de di logo que solicitar confirmaci n de la informaci n que ha especificado Registration Confirmation You have provided the following registration information Name M Smith Company Brother Co Ltd Is this registration information correct No Q Haga clic en el bot n Yes para registrar la informaci n especificada NOTA Para cambiar la inf
271. s spaces and accented characters Q Press Js The text is stored under the selected file number and the text previously shown in the display reappears If a file is already stored under the selected file number the message OVERWRITE appears in the display and you must decide whether or not to overwrite it delete it from the memory and store the new one Ch 3 Functions To overwrite the stored file with the new one e Press to delete the previously stored file and store the new one under the selected number To go back and choose another file number without overwriting the text file press Cancel and then select a different file number Recalling text and Auto Format tem plates To recall a file that has been saved O Hold down and press a The MEM ORY screen appears An Auto Format template that has been stored in the memory can be recalled when you are asked to select a template in the Auto Format function Press or until Y moves beside RECALL 02 04 STORE MEMORY YRECALL a lt CLEAR Length Margin Font Width Size O Press 25 The RECALL screen appears in the display with the currently selected file num ber To quit the Recall function without recalling any text press OR hold down and press Memory 1 For a text file RECALL FILELOO NAMETAG gt R BeckerJABC Tran Length Margin Font Width Size 73 Ch 3 Functions For a TZ
272. s warranty and if you first reported the problem to Brother or an Authorized Service Center within 90 days from the date of original purchase Brother or its Authorized Service Center will repair or replace the Machine and or accompanying Consumable and Accessory Item s at no charge to you for parts or labor The decision as to whether to repair or replace the Machine and or accompanying Consumable and Accessory Item s is made by Brother in its sole discretion Brother reserves the right to supply a refurbished or remanufactured replacement Machine and or accompanying Consumable and Accessory Item s and use refurbished parts provided such replacement products conform to the manufacturers specifications for new product parts The repaired or replacement Machine and or accompanying Consumable and Accessory Item s will be returned to you freight prepaid or made available for you to pick up at a conveniently located Authorized Service Center iii Brother 90 Days One Year Limited Warranty and Replacement Service For USA Only 913 day to 1 year If the problem reported concerning your Machine is covered by this warranty and if you first reported the problem after 90 days but before 1 year from the date of original purchase Brother will furnish free of charge ex cluding labor charges replacement part s for those part s of the Machine determined by Brother or its Autho rized Service Center to be defective You will be respon
273. se instalar n las opciones que lleven la marca de verificaci n Adem s de las opciones b sicas que se han enumerado para la instalaci n Typical tambi n se instalar el Manual del usuario Selectthe components you wantto install clear the components you do not wantto install Components dito ivi Clip Art 2159K v Fonts 1139K Y Auto Format Templates 101 K Y Help 327K r Description This component contains the Editor files Change Space Required 16363 K Space Available 2808656 K 1 Seleccione las opciones que se van a instalar Editor Software P touch Editor 3 2 Clip Art Ilustraciones para la funci n Clip Art de P touch Editor 3 2 Fonts Auto Format Templates Plantillas para la funci n Auto Format Help Archivos de ayuda para P touch Editor 3 2 User s Guide Manual del usuario en HTML para P touch Editor 3 2 el Manual del usuario tambi n se puede abrir desde el CD ROM Transfer Manager s lo PT 9600 no es compatible con el software de PT 3600 Consta de dos aplicaciones Transfer Manager que permite transferir las plantillas una base de datos vinculada a una plantilla o datos de imagen desde el PC hasta la P touch y Backup Manager permite hacer una copia de seguridad de los datos de la P touch en el PC y transferirlos de nuevo a la P touch Si se puede hacer clic en el bot n Change mientras est seleccionada una opci n significa que ha
274. se muestra BRUSSELS sin tener en cuenta el ajuste de la en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla y fuente que se haya seleccionado con el indicador del lado derecho de la pantalla 46 t Para asegurarse de que el texto introducido va a entrar en una etiqueta de un tama o espec fico seleccione el ajuste AUTO Size y especifique una longitud de bloque de texto igual a la longi tud de la etiqueta deseada menos las anchuras de los m rgenes izquierdo y derecho El texto ser impreso en el tamafio de caracteres m s grande posible Ejemplo Para hacer una etiqueta de 4 pulgadas de largo con un margen de 0 2 pulgadas a ambos lados especifique una longitud de blo que de 3 6 pulgadas T O Mantenga pulsado y pulse Pulse O para seleccionar T LENGTH y despu s pulse O tpara seleccionar AUTO Pulse o z y pulse T MARGIN y despu s pulse o para especifi car una anchura de 0 2 O Pulse Block O Mantenga pulsado y pulse Q Pulse O para seleccionar B LENGTH y despu s pulse O para T una longitud de 3 6 Pulse Para cambiar el valor de la funci n Size Global Block Mantenga pulsada y pulse O 3 Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de formato Q Pulse o hasta que se visualice SIZE El ajuste para el texto en la posici n actual del cursor se muestra en el lado izquierdo de
275. seconds For more details refer to the instructions included with the fabric tape cas sette Ch 2 Getting Started Assembling stamps e 00000000000000900909 9090909 In addition to labels your P touch can be used to make custom pre inked stamps for various uses optional stamp kit required Simply design your own customized stamps using one of the pre formatted stamp templates and then affix the printed stamp stencil to a self inking stamp film holder O Install a stamp film cassette and then for mat the stamp text in either of the following ways a Select a pre formatted stamp template from those available with the Auto For mat function refer to page 66 b Type in text and then set the Stamp func tion to ON refer to page 65 NOTE If an Auto Format stamp template is used it is not necessary to set the Stamp function to ON Q Print out the stamp stencil and remove its backing paper Q Remove the frame from around the stamp holder ink pad one end at a time and then remove the protective seal covering the ink pad t f the stamp holder already contains a stamp film hold the stamp over a piece of scrap paper and remove the stamp frame by pulling it off one end at a time Then slowly peel off the stamp film Be careful that the ink does not splatter Keep the stamp film holder out of the reach of children Avoid getting ink in your eyes or mouth If ink gets in your eyes or mouth
276. ses database files that are compatible with Microsoft Access 97 By upgrading P touch Editor 3 2 using a program available on the CD ROM P touch Editor will become compatible with Access 2000 If P touch Editor 3 2 has not been updated to Access 2000 during installation refer to the Readme file located at Ptouch Editor Ac2k on the CD ROM and start up the program Zu E o jmd E jmd QD O em E lt b O Q D gt le o r Dd m 1 o B Ch 2 Getting Started O P touch Editor 3 2 can import files other than mdb files such as csv files Files saved as csv files with an application such as Microsoft Excel can be used with P touch Editor Refer to the User s Guide supplied on the P touch Editor 3 2 CD ROM for more details O Using a function available with Microsoft Access 97 Excel files can be linked to mdb files With this function data changed in Excel is automatically updated with the P touch Editor Using P touch Quick Editor e 00000000000009099099090909 P touch Quick Editor enables you to design a simple label layout quickly and easily In addi tion to the various functions available through the buttons in the toolbar right clicking Win dows9 or holding down the Control key and clicking Macintosh in the label view displays a pop up menu containing more commands Starting up P touch Quick Editor To start up P touch Quick Editor On a computer running Windows Ifa
277. setting P B B a i display and a sample can be seen on the Press y only after the necessary functions have right side been set 13 13 4 ROTATE ABC e e Ins Text Rotation function ROTATE 4B SPEC amem x H Length Margi Font Width Si Any text block with the Text Rotation function engh cam A ize applied is rotated 90 counterclockwise By selecting the amp REPEAT setting the text is repeat amp Press Or until the desired setting is edly printed for the length of the text block displayed vs f appears as a setting the Text Rotation EE OFF function has already been applied to a block in HIJK the current text when the Global Format func tion is being set Changing the setting will can cel the setting that was previously applied E 5x To return the function to its default setting a T ON OFF press the space bar To return to the text without changing the for matting press OR hold down and OOOOOO Global Block BED amp REPEAT press fi or 61 Ch 3 Functions O Press to apply the setting To apply several format settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function 09 13 MARGIN 1 10inch 1 10 HELSINKI Length Margin Font Width Size then pressing t or to select the desired setting pressing 8 Press only after the necessary functions have been set Q Press or until the desired setting is displayed or use the numbe
278. shortcut was added to the Startup menu O P touch Quick Editor automatically starts when the computer is started up Ifa shortcut was added to the desktop O Double click the P touch Quick Editor icon on the desktop Ifa shortcut was added to the Quick Launch toolbar O Double click the P touch Quick Editor icon in the Quick Launch toolbar f no shortcuts were added O Click the Start button in the taskbar to display the Start menu Point to Programs Click P touch Quick Editor 30 When P touch Quick Editor is started the fol lowing window is displayed Length 1 03 gai Toolbar MENS Label view P touch Quick Editor can be hidden or displayed by clicking its icon in the system tray at the right of the taskbar On a Macintosh computer O Double click the P touch Quick Editor icon in the P touch Quick Editor folder installed on the computer When P touch Quick Editor is started the fol lowing window is displayed IA Length 1 1 in Toolbar Label view To view the help for the Mac version of P touch Quick Editor double click Help html in the P touch Quick Editor folder installed on the com puter Specifying a label size Before entering text the label size must be set A selection of preset layout sizes is available for a variety of needs NOTE Although the screens shown in the following expla nations are for Windows 98 98 SE and Me t
279. signed exclusively for this machine Use of any other adaptor will void the warranty Do not try to disassemble the AC adaptor When the machine is not being used for a long period of time disconnect the AC adaptor and for the PT 9600 only remove the rechargeable battery to prevent it from leaking and damaging the machine Use only the Ni MH rechargeable battery designed exclusively for this machine PT 9600 only Never try to disassemble the P touch Use only the enclosed USB interface cable Use of any other USB cable will void the warranty Avery is a registered trademark of AVERY DENNISON CORPORATION IBM and PC DOS are trademarks of International Business Machines Inc Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp in the US and other countries Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc All other software and product names mentioned are trademarks of registered trademarks of their respective companies Portions of graphics filter software are based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG group Connecting the AC adaptor This P touch can be used anywhere a standard electrical outlet is available O Insert the plug on the adaptor cord into the AC adaptor connector on the right side of the P touch Insert the pronged plug on the other end of the adaptor cord into the nearest standard electrical outlet t Only use the AC adaptor designed exclusively for this machine
280. sin a adir espacios en blanco Para a adir un espacio en blanco en el texto e Pulse la barra de espacio Shift Tecla sm O ww Las letras min sculas se escriben pulsando directamente sus teclas correspondientes No obstante como sucede en una m quina de escribir o en un PC para escribir letras may sculas o los s mbolos de la parte superior de algunas teclas debe pulsar la tecla Shift Cuando la P touch est en modo Caps si se mantiene pulsada sit o mientras se pulsa una tecla de letra se escribir una letra min scula Para escribir una letra en may sculas o un s mbolo impreso en la parte superior de determinadas teclas e Mantenga pulsada sr o shit ulse la yp tecla de la letra o el s mbolo que desee Caps Tecla css El modo Caps permite escribir letras may sculas continuamente sin mantener pulsadas O t Para entrar o salir del modo Caps pulse c Cuando la P touch est en modo Caps aparece el indicador Caps en el lado izquierdo de la pantalla t Al pulsar una tecla num rica mientras la P touch est en modo Caps se escribir el n mero no el s mbolo que aparece encima a menos que se pulse sn o t Para escribir letras min sculas mientras la P touch est en modo Caps mantenga pulsada s O mientras pulsa la tecla del car cter que desee Para escribir varias letras may sculas O Pulse cs Aparecer el indicador Caps
281. sion of the software is installed Be sure to uninstall the older version of the O With the P touch and the Macintosh turned software before trying to install the new software For off connect the P touch to the computer details on uninstalling the software refer to To unin using the enclosed USB interface cable as stall the P touch Editor 3 2 software on page 37 described on page 9 Be sure to leave the O P touch turned off Q D gt le o r Dd m 1 o B Click the Next button The Choose Product Components dialog box appears O Turn on the Macintosh oo O Insert the enclosed CD ROM into the com S adl 1 Introduction Feature Set Typical puter s CD ROM drive ON Product Features Na F Fonts US 000 s P touch W Auto Format Templates n fV Clip Art mm m ii Y lt A 3 3 Description Mac OS 9 Mac OS X f Cancel gt Previous Next Q Select the installation method O For a typical installation Click the Next button to immediately start Q Double click the Mac OS X folder to open it installing all options 000 I Mac OS X o fer m i Mek Vim cmt Hop About 20 MB of available hard disk space is needed to L begin installation In order to install all options about P touch Quick Editor P touch Editor 3 2 f 100 MB of available hard disk space is needed Driver Installer pkg y O For a minimal installation Q Double click the P touch Editor 3 2 folder Select
282. sor s current position the Line Effects indicator at the top of the display comes on lt lt lt P touch gt gt gt i AUTO 1 10 HELSINKI A Length Margin Font Width Size gt Cc 4 o To change the setting for the Line Effects function Global Block Line Q Hold down and press i or Press or until LINE EFFECTS is dis played The setting for the text at the cur sor s current position is shown on the left side of the display and a sample can be seen on the right side 06 13 9 LINE EFFECTS A 1 10 HELSINKI Length Margin Font gt c 4 o Width Size O Press or until the desired setting is displayed re f appears as a setting the Line Effects function has already been applied to either a line in the current text block if the Block For mat or the Global Format function is being set or a block in the current text if the Global For mat function is being set Changing the setting will cancel the setting that was previously applied t To return the function to its default setting OFF press the space bar t To return to the text without changing the for matting press OR hold down and Global Block Line press or l To apply several format settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function then pressing or to select the desired setting Only after the necessary functions have been set Ch 3 Functions
283. ssage y EXIT COPIES 1 1 appears in the display while the label is being printed The MENU screen appears in the display again New Block Length Margin Font Width Size To change the style of the text To change the text entered in the template O Press or until moves beside Press or until Y moves beside EDIT CHANGE STYLE MORE 04 04 EDIT MORE 03 04 EXIT MENU CHANGE STYLE MENU JEDIT MORE gt CHANGE STYLE Length Margin Font Width Size Length Margin Font Width Size D Press de The first field for the selected template appears in the display Repeat step until the text is edited as you Jo ir wish The MENU screen appears again C G3 gt ITALIC Length Margin Fok Wiath Sue when y is pressed after editing the last field in the template Press or until the name of the desired format style is displayed A sample can be seen on the right side of the display 67 Ch 3 Functions To finish using the Auto Format function Press or until Y moves beside EXIT 02 04 PRINT EXIT MENU gt EDIT MORE Length Margin Font Width Size 4 BH Press Lal The message OK TO EXIT AUTO FORMAT appears in the display Press Any text displayed before the le Block Auto Format function was used reappears in the display The template that was last used appears first Selecting this template displays the text that was entered in it at tha
284. ssage appears ifa 1 4 le Install a 1 4 6 mm wide 1 4 6 mm wide 6 mm wide tape cassette is not tape cassette installed when printing an Auto Format template created for 1 4 6 mm wide tape This message appears if a 3 8 Install a 3 8 9 mm wide 9 mm wide tape cassette is not tape cassette installed when printing an Auto Format template created for 3 8 9 mm wide tape This message appears if a 1 2 Install a 1 2 12 mm 12 mm wide tape cassette is wide tape cassette not installed when printing an Auto Format template created for 1 2 12 mm wide tape This message appears if a 3 4 Install a 3 4 18 mm 18 mm wide tape cassette is wide tape cassette not installed when printing an Auto Format template created for 3 4 18 mm wide tape This message appears if a 1 Install a 1 24 mm wide 24 mm wide tape cassette is tape cassette not installed when printing an Auto Format template created for 1 24 mm wide tape This message appears if a 1 1 2 Install a 1 1 2 36 mm 36 mm wide tape cassette is wide tape cassette not installed when printing an Auto Format template created for 1 1 2 36 mm wide tape This message appears if an Install an AV1789 File AV1789 File folder label cas folder label cassette sette is not installed when print ing an AV1789 File folder template of the Auto Format function This message appears if an Install an AV1957 Return AV1957 Re
285. st Driver Setup dialog box appears allowing you to select whether the P touch will be connected through the USB port or the RS 232C port Continue with the procedure in Installing the USB printer driver on page 17 To install the serial printer driver refer to the Advanced Functions booklet If the printer driver is already installed click the No but ton A dialog box appears explaining that installation is finished Select Yes want to restart my computer now click the Finish button to restart the computer and then remove the CD ROM from the CD ROM drive Setup Complete Setup has finished copying files to your computer Before you can use the program you must restart Windows or your computer Yes wantto restart my computer now C No will restart my computer later Remove any disks from their drives and then click Finish to complete setup Back Finish Installing the USB printer driver With Plug and Play new devices connected to the system are detected and their drivers are automatically installed If the P touch 9600 3600 is to be connected through the USB port its driver will be installed with Plug and Play Be sure to read the installation instructions described below before installing the printer driver supplied on the CD ROM t Do not connect the P touch to the computer until you are instructed to do so otherwise the printer driver may not be installed correctly t
286. sta que se visualice WIDTH El ajuste para el texto en la posici n actual del cursor se muestra en el lado izquierdo de la pantalla y en el lado derecho se puede ver una muestra O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado os Sj aparece como el ajuste la funci n Width ya se ha aplicado a una l nea del bloque de texto actual si se han establecido las funciones Block Format o Global Format o al bloque en el texto actual si se ha establecido la funci n Global Format Si se cambia el ajuste se cancelar el que se aplic previamente Para devolver a la funci n su ajuste predeteminado NORMAL pulse la barra de espacio Para volver al texto sin cambiar el formato pulse O mantenga pulsada y pulse Global Block Line iif op D Pulse Je para aplicar la configuraci n Para aplicar varios ajustes de formato al mismo tiempo contin e pulsando O para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse Home O para seleccionar el ajuste que desee Pulse Block S lo despu s de configurar las funciones necesarias 46 Style1 Funci n STYLE1 Con la funci n Stylel se encuentran disponibles otros cinco estilos de texto lo cual le permitir crear etiquetas m s personalizadas Los indicadores de estilo en la parte superior de la pantalla muestran el estilo de texto en la posici n actual del cursor cuando se ha seleccionado un ajuste que no es NORMAL
287. stalled m P touch AV Editor P touch AV Editor and the printer driver will be installed controlador de la impresora o si ejecuta Windows 2000 o XP y cambia a una P touch 9600 3600 con un n mero de serie diferente Si selecciona Add Brother PT 9600 3600 A adir Brother PT 9600 3600 se a adir un controlador de impresora nuevo Con una r Driver The printer driver will be installed Cancel conexi n USB en Windows 98 o Me s lo se a ade un puerto sin que se a ada como una impresora nueva Seleccione esta opci n cuando conecte y utilice varias P touch 9600 3600 con el mismo PC Para borrar el controlador de la impresora siga el procedimiento indicado en Desinstalaci n del controlador de la impresora en la p gina 32 Si el cuadro de di logo no aparece autom ticamente haga doble clic en My Computer Mi PC en el escritorio y despu s haga doble clic en la unidad de CD ROM que contiene el CD ROM Para Windows XP haga clic en My Computer Mi PC en el men Inicio y a continuaci n haga doble clic en la unidad de CD ROM que contiene el CD ROM Despu s haga doble clic en Setup exe para visualizar el cuadro de di logo Con Windows 98 98 SE Me o 2000 Q Haga clic en el bot n inferior Driver O Aparecer un cuadro de di logo que A solicitar que conecte la P touch al PC Windows XP solamente Aparecer un mensaje inform ndole de que el con
288. sus propias pel culas de matriz de sello para obtener grabado qu mico Despu s de insertar un casete de pel cula de sello seleccione esta funci n para ajustar el texto al grosor perfecto para los soportes de la pel cula de sello pretintados Como el soporte del sello es reutilizable s lo tiene que crear una pel cula de matriz de sello nueva y sustituir la del soporte Para crear un sello O Escriba el texto e inserte un casete de pel cula de sello mediana 3 4 pulgadas 18 mm de ancho o grande 1 pulgada 24 mm de ancho Mantenga pulsada y pulse i5 Si crea un sello mediante esta funci n tendr que utilizar la funci n Tape Length para seleccionar unos m rgenes izquierdo y derecho de la etiqueta de 1 pulgada 25 mm Q Pulse O hasta que se visualice el valor deseado t Para devolver el valor predeterminado a la funci n OFF pulse la barra de espacio Para volver al texto sin cambiar el valor de la funci n Stamp pulse pulsada y pulse 5 Q Pulse Si se seleccion ON el texto se asiaa autom ticamente para sellos Mirror O mantenga Q Pulse i para recortar la resoluci n de la impresi n de la pel cula de matriz de sello Q Despu s de separar la pel cula de matriz del sello extraiga el papel posterior de la pel cula y f jela en el tamp n de la tinta de un soporte de pel cula de sello Consulte Montaje de sellos en la p gina 35 Funci n Auto Format co
289. t acters are displayed tery is properly charged PT 9600 only e Reset the machine by PT 3600 unplugging the AC adaptor and leaving it unplugged for about one minute then and plugging it in again PT 9600 only pressing the reset button in the battery compartment at the bottom of the machine ts The text and formats in the display will be erased 2 The machine does not print or the printed Check that the tape cassette has been characters are blurred inserted properly If the tape cassette is empty replace it with a new one Make sure that the tape compartment cover has been closed Check that the interface cable is correctly connected 3 The text is printed on striped tape e You have reached the end of the tape in the cassette Replace it with a new one 90 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 The P touch is not working correctly Reset the P touch by turning it off then while holding down and turning the machine back on t All settings will be reset to their defaults and the entire contents of the memory will be cleared If it necessary to keep the cur rent settings and stored files back them up to the computer using the P touch Backup Manager Before installing or removing the tape cas sette be sure that the P touch has been reset 5 The machine has locked up i e noth Reset the machine by ing happens when a key is pressed PT 3600 unplugging the AC adaptor and leavin
290. t gt Type in each line of text then Ed gt Continue with or O or to select PRINT gt d or to select EDIT MORE gt gt Type in each line of text then ai New Block or to select CHANGE STYLE gt gt lt or to select format or to select EXIT gt eB gt Layout Preview code or to scroll A Cu code Et Or 5 to select setting gt Mirror A Cut Feed amp Cut P gt f or t to select number OR type number gt Code 3 AE lp eal OF to select start of numbering field gt ue gt or to select end of numbering field gt t Orl to select or type number gt w Storing recalling deleting amp printing text files Saving a file Recalling a previously saved file Deleting a previously saved file Printing a previously saved text file code cm gt i or to select STORE gt dd gt i or to select file number gt Type file name gt w code al gt or to select RECALL gt gt t or to select file number 3 code cl gt or to select CLEAR gt gt t or to select file number Space bar so Y appears gt gt code ca t or to select PRINT gt gt i or to select file number Space bar so Y appears gt CONTENTS Brother 90 Days One Year Limited Warranty a
291. t n Next Aparece un cuadro de di logo que advierte de que el software no ha superado la prueba Windows Logo Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware Printers has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows lt P Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing e E o Haga clic en el bot n Continue Anyway para continuar con la instalaci n Aparecer el cuadro de di logo Found New Hardware Wizard que indicar que este asistente ha terminado la instalaci n del software para la PT 9600 3600 Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for Brother PT 9600 E Click Finish to close the wizard Finish Haga clic en el bot n Finish Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 Brother PT 9600 was correctly added Click Finish to quit setup Si aparece un cuadro de di logo Driver Setup que indica que el controlador de la impresora ya se ha instalado haga clic en el bot n Finish Aparecer un cuadro de di logo que indica que la instalaci n ha terminado Setup Complete Setup h
292. t in the memory These text files TZ tape template files and AV label tem plate files remain in the memory even after all characters are erased from the display using the Clear function holding down and pressing BS When each file is stored it is given a number and can also be given a file name to make recalling it easier Up to 100 files or approximately 10 000 characters can be stored in the memory All Glo bal Format Block Format and Line Format func tions Font Size Width Style Line Effects Frame Alignment and Text Rotation Tape Mar gin Tape Length Block Margin Block Length specified are also saved with the text Since a copy of the stored text file is recalled when the Recall function is used the text can be edited or printed without changing the origi nally stored file However the Store function can be used to replace the previously saved file with the new edited one When a file is no longer needed or more space is necessary the Memory Clear function can be used to delete it With the Memory Print function either a single file or multiple files stored in the memory can be quickly selected for printing TZ tape and AV label templates from the Auto For mat function can also be stored while the template is being selected while text is being entered or while the MENU screen is displayed To store the template with text and a specific character style type in the text for each field and then select
293. t is printed NOTE If you want to start printing without changing the print options simply click the Print button fi or click the arrow beside the Print button and click Print Hiding displaying P touch Quick Editor Windows only P touch Quick Editor can be hidden by clicking the Hide button Re display P touch Quick Editor by clicking its icon in the system tray at the right of the taskbar Quitting P touch Quick Editor To quit P touch Quick Editor On a computer running Windows Do either of the following O Right click the P touch Quick Editor icon in the system tray and then click Exit in the menu that appears O Right click in the label view or text box and then click Exit in the menu that appears On a Macintosh computer Do either of the following O Click Quit in the File menu O Hold down the Control key and click in the label view or text box and then click Quit in the menu that appears Ch 2 Getting Started Using the P touch AV Editor e 0o000000000000090999 0900909 The P touch AV Editor enables you to quickly and easily enter and format text for an AV label In addition to the various functions available through the buttons in the toolbar right clicking anywhere in the P touch AV Editor window displays a pop up menu containing more commands Starting up P touch AV Editor If a shortcut was added to the Startup menu O P touch AV Editor automatically
294. t time The label sizes are displayed in the currently selected unit of measurement inches or centi meters The unit of measurement can be changed with the Setup functions Refer to page 80 An Auto Format template that has been stored in the memory can be recalled and used again For details on recalling stored Auto format tem plates refer to page 73 To quit the Auto Format function without using a template hold down and press at any time The half cut can only be used to cut laminated tape 66 Printing Layout Preview function Layout Preview code The Layout Preview function allows you to get a general overview of the text within the width of the currently installed tape The length of the current label is indicated in the lower left corner of the display To preview the label Layout Preview e Hold down and press t To scroll the label preview back and forth press lorah t To return to the text at any time press Preview OR hold down and press Length Margin Font Width Size A Cut Auto Cut function cos 2 Each setting of the Auto Cut function consists of settings for three different cut methods full cut which is used to completely cut off the label half cut which is used to cut laminated tape without cutting the label backing making it eas ler to remove the backing paper from labels and chain printing where the last copy is not cut
295. t will automatically appear and then click the Next button A dialog box appears asking for confirmation of the entered information Registration Confirmation You have provided the following registration information Name M Smith Company Brother Co Ltd Is this registration information correct Click the Yes button to register the entered information Typical Program will be installed with the most common wer Pod options Recommended for most users C Compact Program will be installed with minimum required options C Custom You may choose the options you wantto install Recommended for advanced users r Destination Folder C Program Files brother Ptouch32 Browse lt Back cancel Q Select the installation method and then click the Next button For a Typical or Compact installation Selecting Typical or Compact then clicking the Next button immediately starts installation Ch 2 Getting Started Typical All of the basic options P touch Editor 3 2 Clip art Auto Format tem plates Help and fonts are installed Compact Only P touch Editor 3 2 is installed P touch Editor O For a Custom installation Selecting Custom then clicking the Next button displays a dialog box that allows you to select which options to install Only the options with a check mark beside them will be installed In addition to the basic options listed f
296. ta TZ La longitud de etiqueta de etiquetas AV no se puede ajustar Para cambiar el valor de la funci n Tape Length O Mantenga pulsada y pulse Este paso se puede omitir si se aplican al mismo tiempo varios ajustes de funciones de Global Format Pulse O hasta que se visualice T LENGTH El ajuste actual se muestra en el lado izquierdo de la pantalla O Pulse O hasta que se visualice el ajuste que desee o utilice las teclas num ricas para escribir la longitud de cinta que prefiera funci n a su volver la predeterminado AUTO pulse la barra de espacio ts Para ajuste t Para cambiar el ajuste en pasos de 0 1 pulgadas 1 0 cm pasos mantenga pulsada 1 Ot y a continuaci n suelte la tecla cuando se visualice el valor que desee t La longitud de la cinta se indica en la unidad de medida seleccionada actualmente pulgadas o cent metros La unidad de medida se puede cambiar con las funciones de Configuraci n Consulte la p gina 65 t Para volver al texto sin cambiar el formato pulse O mantenga pulsada y pulse Global ii Pulse En para aplicar la configuraci n Para aplicar varios ajustes de formato al mismo tiempo contin e pulsando O para seleccionar la funci n y a continuaci n pulse O para seleccionar el ajuste que desee Pulse sw S lo despu s de configurar las funciones Block necesarias Funci n Block Margin B MARGIN La anchu
297. tape then cut it Numbering function c The Numbering function can be used to print many copies of the same text while increasing certain characters letters numbers or barcode data after each label is printed This type of automatic incrementation is very useful when printing serial number labels production con trol labels or other labels requiring ascending codes Letters and numbers increase as shown below o gt 1 gt 9 gt O0 F A gt B gt 7 gt gt a gt b gt z gt a AO gt A12 A9 gt BO 2 4 n Spaces shown as underlines in the exam ples below can be used to adjust the space between characters or to control the number of digits that are printed Z A gt 2Z2 gt A gt I gt 10 gt 99 gt 0 gt 199 20 gt 99 29 0 gt t Only one numbering field can be selected from any text If you include a non alphanumeric character such as a symbol in the numbering field only the letters and numbers in the numbering field will be increased when the labels are printed or just one label will be printed if the field only contains a non alphanumeric character When a barcode is selected as the numbering field only the numbers in the barcode data are increased To print labels using the Numbering func tion Number O Hold down and press The mes sage SELECT START POINT appears SELECT START POINT 3 1 sTUDIO 101 AUTO 1 10 HELSINKI A Length Margin Fo
298. tape template file Deleting a file To delete a file that has been saved RECALL 3 4 a E Memory T Manon UE SONGS J I O Hold down and press 3 The MEM ORY screen appears Length Margin Font Width Size An Auto Format template that has been stored in the memory can be deleted by holding down and pressing from the Auto Format function RECALL AV2067 R BeckerMABC Impo e ERES O unt oves beside Length Margin Font Width Size t i i 0 Press or until the file number con aaa ENL taining the text that you wish to recall is dis qa MEMORY CLEAR played The file name is shown beside the X FS file number and the text stored in the Length Margin Font Width Size selected file number is shown at the bottom of the display Q Press The CLEAR screen appears in the display with the currently selected file num ber t To see other parts of the selected text file press Fora Auto Format template files of the same tape width are displayed grouped together To quit the Memory Clear function without erasing any text press OR hold down and Memory press For a text file 4 Q Press Le Any text previously entered in the display is erased and the text stored under the selected file number is recalled into the display CLEAR FILE OO NAMETAG gt R Becker IABC Tran Length Margin Font Width Size CLEAR 3 4 TZ 00 VIDEO GS gt FAVORITE SONGS
299. ter driver O Select Delete Brother PT 9600 3600 and O Tum off the P touch 9600 3600 and then then click the Next button A dialog box Q D gt le o r Dd m 1 o B disconnect it from the computer Insert the enclosed CD ROM into the com puter s CD ROM drive A dialog box auto matically appears allowing you to select what to install Brother Setup S Selectthe components that you want to install P touch Editor P touch Editor Ver 3 2 the printer driver and the manual will be installed P touch Quick Editor P touch Quick Editor and the printer driver will be installed m P touch AV Editor P touch Av Editor and the printer driver will be installed r Driver 1 The printer driver will be installed j Cancel NOTE If the dialog box does not automatically appear double click My Computer on the desktop and then double click the CD ROM drive containing the CD ROM For Windows XP click My Com puter in the Start menu and then double click the CD ROM drive containing the CD ROM Next double click Setup exe to display the dialog box Click the lower button Driver Windows XP only A message appears informing you that the printer driver has passed compatibility tests and that the Continue Anyway button should be pressed if a warning message appears Click the OK button Confirmation A Driver Setup dialog box app
300. ticamente y haga clic en el bot n Next Aparecer un cuadro de di logo que solicitar confirmaci n de la informaci n que ha especificado Registration Confirmation You have provided the following registration information Name M Smith Company Brother Co Ltd Is this registration information correct Haga clic en el bot n Yes para registrar la informaci n especificada Setup Type x amp Typical Program will be installed with the most common pen lid options Recommended for most users C Compact Program will be installed with minimum required options C Custom You may choose the options you wantto install Recommended for advanced users m Destination Folder C Program Files brother Ptouch32 Browse teen Q Seleccione el m todo de instalaci n y haga clic en el bot n Next O Para una instalaci n t pica o compacta Seleccione Typical T pica o Compact Compacta y al hacer clic en el bot n Next se iniciar inmediatamente la instalaci n Typical Se instalan todas las opciones b sicas P touch Editor 3 2 Clip art plantillas de Auto Format ayuda y fuentes Compact S lo se instala P touch Editor owe 2 P touch Editor Setup P touch Editor O Para una instalaci n Custom Si selecciona Custom Personalizada al hacer clic en el bot n Next se visualizar el cuadro de di logo que permite elegir las opciones que instalar S lo
301. ting To apply several format settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function then pressing or to select the desired setting Press y only after the necessary functions have been set Size function SIZE The character size can be adjusted using the Size function With the AUTO setting the machine compares your text with the width of the installed tape and automatically adjusts the characters to the largest possible size For sam ples of the available Size settings refer to page 100 The size of the text at the cursor s cur rent position is shown in the lower right corner of the display and with the indicator on the right side of the display lt lt lt P touch gt gt gt Gi AUTO 1 10 HELSINKI Length Margin Font Width Size Ch 3 Functions t Since the text sizes that can be printed depends tS To make sure that the entered text will fit within on the width of the tape the following table a label with a specific length select the AUTO shows the maximum text size that Can be used Size setting and specify a text block length with each tape width equal to the desired label length minus the The following text sizes do no apply to text width of the left and right margins The text will with a Text Rotation setting applied be printed with the largest possible character size For TZ tapes Example To make a label 4 inches long with a Maximum Text Size margi
302. tinuaci n No conecte la P touch al PC antes de instalar el software de lo contrario ste podr a no instalarse correctamente Conecte la P touch s lo cuando se le solicite que lo haga Para instalar el software P touch Quick Editor O Inserte el disco CD ROM que se incluye en la unidad de CD ROM del PC Aparecer autom ticamente un cuadro de di logo que le permitir seleccionar lo que quiera instalar Selectthe components that you wantto install m P touch Editor P touch Editor Ver 3 2 the printer driver and the manual will be installed Es um m P touch Quick Editor E 4 P touch Quick Editor and the printer driver will be installed E r P touch AV Editor P touch AV Editor and the printer driver will be installed Driver The printer driver will be installed Cancel Si el cuadro de dialogo no aparece automaticamente haga doble clic en My Computer Mi PC en el escritorio y despu s haga doble clic en la unidad de CD ROM que contiene el CD ROM Para Windows XP haga clic en My Computer Mi PC en el ment Inicio y a continuaci n haga doble clic en la unidad de CD ROM que contiene el CD ROM Despu s haga doble clic en Setup exe para visualizar el cuadro de di logo Q Haga clic en el bot n del centro P touch Quick Editor Se iniciar el Asistente InstallShield para la instalaci n del software P touch Quick Editor y aparecer
303. tion Los formatos de texto se pueden aplicar a una sola l nea de texto a un solo bloque de texto o a todo el texto No obstante la funci n Text Rotation s lo se puede aplicar a bloques de texto espec ficos o a todo el texto Cuando se cambia el formato de texto de una l nea y se a ade texto el formato se aplica hasta que se vuelva a cambiar Las funciones de formato de etiqueta Tape Margin Tape Length Block Margin Block Length y Mirror Printing especifican la apariencia general de la etiqueta Las funciones de formato de etiqueta se aplicar n a todo el texto Adem s la funci n Block Length se puede aplicar a bloques sueltos Funciones de formato Global code fii Con las funciones de Global Format se puede cambiar la apariencia de todo un bloque de texto al imprimirlo aplicando varios ajustes Font Size Width Style1 Style2 Line Effects subrayado tachado Frame Text Alignment o Text Rotation Adem s se puede modificar la apariencia de toda la etiqueta cambiando los ajustes de Tape Margin Tape Length Block Margin y Block Length Para cambiar las funciones de Global Format Global Mantenga pulsada y pulse Seleccione FONT SIZE WIDTH STYLE1 STYLE2 LINE EFFECTS FRAME ALIGNMENT T MARGIN T LENGTH B MARGIN B LENGTH o ROTATE y el ajuste deseado como se describe en las p ginas 45 a 54 El ajuste seleccionado se aplicar a todo el texto NOTA Para volver al texto sin
304. tion the cur sor below the character immediately to the right of the character that you wish to delete Press once 4 Home Clear Each time is pressed one character is deleted To delete a sequence of characters Q Press 2 or to position the cur sor below the character immediately to the right of the character that you wish to delete Hold down until all of the characters that you wish to delete are removed 4 Home Line Out Delete key feee Line Out The Delete key vee allows you to remove the character above the cursor After the character is deleted the remaining text to the right moves one place to the left Each time is pressed one character is deleted To remove one character Q Press 2 e or to position the cur sor below the character that you wish to delete Line Out Press once 4 Home Ch 3 Functions To delete a sequence of characters O Press 2 or to position the cur sor below the character that you wish to delete O Hold down until all of the characters that you wish to delete are removed 4 Home Line Out Line out function cose With the Line Out function you can easily remove an entire line of text To delete a line of text Q Press 3 fe or to position the cur sor within the line of text that you wish to delete 4 Home Line Out Hold down
305. to select ALIGNMENT gt or ment to select setting gt Global Changing the label mar Code sy or to select T MARGIN gt or to select set gins ting gt Global ae the label ce 1 iz Or 5 toselect T LENGTH gt t or to select set engt ting gt Global Changing the block ce 1 gt z Or to select B MARGIN gt or to select set margins ting gt Block Changing the block Code or gt or to select B LENGTH gt or to length select setting gt f w Printing in reverse mir ror printing Formatting text for a stamp Mirror in tor to select setting gt m code 15 te or to select setting gt Rotating the text Global Block 1i or gt x or 5 to select ROTATE gt or to select setting w Code Using an Auto Format template Creating a label or stamp from an Auto For mat template O Printing an Auto For mat template Editing the Auto For mat template text Q Changing the style of the Auto Format tem plate O Quitting the Auto Format function Printing text Previewing the label Changing how the labels are cut Printing using the cur rent print options Feeding and cutting 1 24 mm of tape Printing many copies Printing many copies while increasing selected text code E OF 842 Or to select template g
306. tom of the compartment When inserting the tape cassette make sure that the inner ribbon does not catch on the corner of the metal guide P touch 9600 P touch 3600 Q Close the compartment cover and then press of to turn on the machine if it is off The width of the currently installed tape is shown by the tape width indicator on the left edge of the display P touch C3 AUTO 1 10 HELSINKI A Length Margin Font Width Size gt E e A Cut Q Press once to remove any slack in the tape and cut off the excess Connecting the P touch to a computer This machine is equipped with a USB port allowing you to use a USB cable to connect the P touch to a computer running Windows or Mac OS and print labels created using the P touch Editor software Do not connect the P touch to the computer before installing the P touch Editor software otherwise it may not be installed correctly Follow the installa tion procedure on pages 9 through 27 to install the P touch Editor software and the printer driver and connect the P touch to the computer when you are instructed to do so To connect a computer to the P touch through the USB port O Insert the flat A connector on the USB cable into the USB port on the computer Insert the square B connector on the USB cable into the USB port on the right side of the P touch Q Turn on the P touch P touch 9600 P touch 360
307. tor El software P touch AV Editor le permite introducir texto para crear etiquetas AV y formatearlo de forma r pida y sencilla Instale el software P touch AV Editor en el PC como se describe a continuaci n No conecte la P touch al PC antes de instalar el software de lo contrario ste podr a no instalarse correctamente Conecte la P touch s lo cuando se le solicite que lo haga Para instalar el software P touch AV Editor O Inserte el disco CD ROM que se incluye en la unidad de CD ROM del PC Aparecer autom ticamente un cuadro de di logo que le permitir seleccionar lo que quiera instalar Selectthe components that you wantto install m P touch Editor P touch Editor Ver 3 2 the printer driver and the manual will be installed 3 m P touch Quick Editor P touch Quick Editor and the printer driver will be installed ze m P touch AV Editor P touch AV Editor and the printer driver will be installed Driver The printer driver will be installed Si el cuadro de di logo no aparece autom ticamente haga doble clic en My Computer Mi PC en el escritorio y despu s haga doble clic en la unidad de CD ROM que contiene el CD ROM Para Windows9 XP haga clic en My Computer Mi PC en el men Inicio y a continuaci n haga doble clic en la unidad de CD ROM que contiene el CD ROM Despu s haga doble clic en Setup exe para visualizar el cuadro de di l
308. tosh Lleve a cabo una de las acciones siguientes O Haga clic en Quit en el men File O Mantenga pulsada la tecla de control y haga clic en la vista de etiqueta o en el cuadro de texto y haga clic en Quit en el men que aparecer Uso de P touch AV Editor e 0000000000000090909090909 El software P touch AV Editor le permite introducir texto para una etiqueta AV y formatearlo de forma r pida y sencilla Adem s de las distintas funciones disponibles con los botones de la barra de herramientas haciendo clic con el bot n derecho del rat n en cualquier sitio de la ventana del P touch AV Editor emerger un men con m s controles Inicio del P touch AV Editor Si ha puesto un acceso directo en el men Startup O El P touch AV Editor se iniciar autom tica mente cuando se encienda el ordenador Si ha puesto un acceso directo en el escritorio O Haga doble clic sobre el icono del P touch AV Editor en el escritorio Si ha puesto un acceso directo en la barra de herramientas Quick Launch O Haga doble clic sobre el icono del P touch AV Editor en la barra de herramientas Quick Launch Si no ha afiadido accesos directos O Haga clic en el bot n Start de la barra de tareas para visualizar el men de inicio Seleccione Programs Q Haga clic sobre P touch AV Editor Cuando se inicie el P touch AV Editor se visua lizar la siguiente ventana Bot n de impresi n Bot n
309. total AZ CA CO CT FL GA IL LA MA MD MI MN MO NC NJ NV NY OH PA TN TX VA WA WI residents add applicable sales tax Shipping and Handling Options Please choose one e Standard Freight e Continental U S 5 75 Alaska and Hawaii 8 75 GU PR VI 15 75 e 2nd Day Air Freight Continental U S only 8 75 e Overnight Delivery Continental U S only 14 75 TOTAL DUE No C O D orders Method of Payment check one Name Visa Master Card Discover Address Check Money Order American Express City State Account Number Zip Expiration Date Daytime Phone Daytime Fax st Email Your Model Number Prices subject to change without notice All prices quoted in US Dollars Signature Billing Address if different from shipping address at left GU A DE USUARIO PR LOGO Gracias por adquirir esta impresora P touch Con la nueva P touch podr crear etiquetas para cualquier prop sito Seleccione entre la variedad de estilos de marcos fuentes y caracteres para dise ar elegantes etiquetas personalizadas Adem s las plantillas preformateadas disponibles hacen que crear etiquetas sea muy r pido y f cil Asimismo se pueden utilizar tres tipos de casetes de etiquetas AV para crear etiquetas de direcciones y de archivado de tama o predefinido f ciles de desprender AV2067 3 4 x 2 5 8 pulgadas 20 mm x 67 mm etiquetas de direcciones AV1957 3 4 x 2 1 4 pu
310. trolador de impresora ha oy eye Preparation for setup is finished pasado las pruebas de compatibilidad y que debe hacer Inst he printer clic sobre el bot n Continue Anyway si aparece un Sonesta anderen mensaje de aviso Haga clic sobre el bot n OK Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 x Wait until itis automatically added p m IMPORTANT This printer driver has passed compatibility tests IF your hard i i ssage please select Continue ware wizard isplays a warning messag Anyway to complete the When the printer can be added the next Driver Setup Dese page automatically appears Aparecer el cuadro de di logo Driver etup que permite seleccionar si se Conecte la P touch al PC mediante el cable sustituye afiade o borra el controlador de la de interfaz USB que se incluye como se impresora PT 9600 3600 describe en la p gina3 y encienda la PRESSE xl P touch Aparecer un cuadro de di logo Brother PT 9600 is currently installed i leads eat que indica que el controlador de la dm ee impresora se ha instalado NS a el aet Driver Setup Brother PT 9600 xi S Warming o Do not connect or turn on the Brother PT 9600 until you Brother PT 9600 was correctly added are directed to Make your selection and then click Next Setup will begin Cancel O Seleccione Replace with new Brother Oik Fis quitas PT 9600 3600 Sustituir por la nueva Brother PT 9600
311. turn address label address label cassette cassette is not installed when printing an AV1957 Return address template of the Auto Format function This message appears if an Install an AV2067 Address AV2067 Address label cassette label cassette is not installed when printing an AV2067 Address template of the Auto Format function 87 ERROR MESSAGE LIST ERROR MESSAGE SET STAMP L SET STAMP M TAPE END TEXT TOO HIGH TEXT TOO LONG 88 le This message appears ifa 1 message appears if a 1 24 mm wide stamp tape cas sette is not installed when print ing an Auto format template created for a STAMP L stamp This message appears if a 3 4 18 mm wide stamp tape cas sette is not installed when print ing an Auto format template created for a STAMP M stamp This message appears if the end of the tape in the cassette has been reached This message appears if the size of the text is larger than the width of the installed tape PT 9600 only This message appears if the Lines of Text set ting for the ESC P interface mode exceeds the maximum possible for the installed tape This message appears if the length of the text is longer than the label length that has been set with the Tape Length func tion This message appears if you try to print a label that is longer than the maximum label length This message appears if you try to print a label that is longer than the maximum label length or
312. u may cancel this installation at any time by clicking the Cancel button cM poro Cancel When the Next button is pressed a message may appear warning that an older version of the soft ware is installed Be sure to uninstall the older ver sion of the software before trying to install the new software For details on uninstalling the software refer to To uninstall the P touch Quick Editor soft ware on page 37 Click the Next button The Choose Alias Folder dialog box appears allowing you to select where an alias to P touch Quick Edi tor will be added P touch Quick Editor Introduction Where would you like to create aliases Choose Alias Folder In the Dock On the Desktop In your home folder O Other Don t create aliases Cmm qu Cancel Previous Nec gt O Select the desired location for the alias and then click the Next button A dialog box appears allowing you to check the installa tion Ch 2 Getting Started P touch Quick Editor Pre Installation Summary Introduction Please Review the Following Before Continuing Choose Alias Folder Product Name i s P touch Quick Editor P Pre Installation Summary Install Folder s P touch Quick Editor in the folder Mac OS X on the isk Macintosh HD ias Folder Desktop in the folder mward on the disk Macintosh HD Disk Space Information for Installation Target Required 2 631 005 bytes Av
313. uble click the CD ROM drive containing the CD ROM For Windows XP click My Com puter in the Start menu and then double click the CD ROM drive containing the CD ROM Next double click Setup exe to display the dialog box Welcome to the P touch Quick Editor Setup program This program will install P touch Quick Editor on your computer Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Nextto continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law 1 Cancel Click the upper button P touch Editor The To install the P touch AV Editor software click wm the third button from the top P touch AV Edi InstallShield Wizard for installing the tor Continue with the procedure in Installing P touch Editor software starts up and then the P touch AV Editor software on page 15 the Welcome dialog box appears mE x Welcome to the P touch AY Editor Setup program This Y program will install P touch AV Editor on your computer Welcome x Welcome to the P touch Editor Setup program This f program will install P touch Editor
314. uch porque el casete de cinta se da ar Evite utilizar la m quina en lugares con mucho polvo Mant ngala alejada tanto de la luz solar directa como de la lluvia No exponga la m quina a temperaturas extraordinariamente altas o a humedad alta Nunca la deje en el salpicadero o en el maletero del coche No almacene los casetes de cinta donde puedan quedar expuestos a luz solar directa humedad alta o polvo No deje goma o vinilo sobre la m quina por un largo per odo de tiempo porque la m quina se puede manchar No limpie la m quina con alcohol o con otro tipo de disolventes org nicos Utilice s lo un pa o seco y suave No introduzca objetos extra os o coloque objetos pesados sobre la m quina Para evitar lesiones no toque el filo de la cizalla Utilice exclusivamente el adaptador de CA dise ado para esta m quina El uso de cualquier otro tipo de adaptador anula la garant a No desmonte el adaptador de CA Cuando no de vaya a usar la m quina durante un largo per odo de tiempo desconecte el adaptador de CA y s lo para la PT 9600 extraiga la pila recargable para prevenir que tenga fugas y da e la m quina Use exclusivamente la pila recargable de Ni MH dise ada para esta m quina S lo PT 9600 No desmonte la P touch Utilice exclusivamente el cable de interfaz USB incluido El uso de cualquier otro tipo de cable USB anula la garant a Avery es una marca comercial registrada de AVERY DENNISON CORPORATION
315. ult setting 0 press the space bar O Press to apply the setting To apply several Setup settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function then pressing f or to select the desired setting Only after the necessary functions have been set To change the TAPE LENGTH ADJUST setting When printing a label with a specified length Tape Length function the length of the printed label may be slightly different This function allows you to adjust the length of the printed label If the tape length cannot be adjusted satisfactorily using this function small adjustments can be made to the tape length using the Tape Length function Q Hold down and press This step may be skipped if settings for several Setup functions are being applied at the same time Press or until TAPE LENGTH ADJUST is displayed 04 07 4 TAPE LENGTH ADJUST 0 Length Margin Font Width Size Q Press or until the desired setting is displayed t To return the function to its default setting 0 press the space bar ts To decrease the label length select a lower value To increase the label length select a higher value Ch 4 Machine Adjustments O Press to apply the setting To apply several Setup settings at the same time continue pressing or to select the function then pressing t or to select the desired setting been set To change the HEAD ADJUSTMENT setting
316. ult settings are CODE 39 PROTOCOL MEDIUM WIDTH UNDER set to ON and CHECK DIGIT set to OFF CHECK DIGIT t t is recommended that barcodes be printed with the barcode WIDTH parameter set to at least SMALL otherwise barcodes may be diffi cult to read t The CHECK DIGIT parameter is only available with the CODE 39 and I 2 5 types 49 Ch 3 Functions To enter the barcode data O Hold down and press rz t To change the data or parameters of a barcode that has already been added to the text position the cursor below the right half of the barcode mark III before holding down and press ing s t To quit the Barcode function without adding a barcode OR press at any time hold down and press ps 2e PARAMETER 4 CODE 39 bux 4 AUTO 1 10 Length Margin Font HELSINKI A Width Size gt 4 o Type in the new barcode data or edit the old data To change the barcode parameter settings O Press tu 01 04 4 PROTOCOL CODE 39 Length Margin Font Width Size O Press or until the parameter that you want to change is displayed t To select the default setting press the space bar t To return to the barcode data without changing any parameters press OR hold down and press ps Q Press or until the desired setting is displayed Q Repeat steps and until all parameters are set as you wish Press aa 50 To add special characters to barcodes
317. volver a ello m s tarde sin tener que volver a escribir el texto Si la PT 9600 funciona con la pila recargable la m quina se apagar autom ticamente si no se pulsa ninguna tecla o no se realiza ninguna operaci n en 5 minutos No desenchufe el adaptador de CA si la P touch est enchufada y encendida si lo hace los datos que se est n editando se borrar n Apague la P touch antes de desenchufar el adaptador de CA Una PT 9600 que est funcionando con la pila recargable se apagar autom ticamente si no se pulsa ning n bot n o no se realiza ninguna operaci n durante 5 minutos Sin embargo si la P 9600 est en el modo Transfer o modo Intarface se apagar autom ticamente si no se realiza ninguna operaci n durante 30 minutos Si la PT 9600 est conectada a un PC mediante un cable de interfaz serie RS 232C o est imprimiendo datos desde un PC no se apagar autom ticamente Si la P touch est conectada a un PC mediante el cable de interfaz USB y est imprimiendo datos desde el PC la P touch no se apagar autom ticamente O Pulse para encender o apagar la P touch Instalaci n sustituci n del casete de cinta Para a adir a n m s funciones de creaci n de ilustraciones y dise os a las posibilidades de creaci n de etiquetas disponibles con la P touch 2600 2610 en el CD ROM adjunto encontrar tres aplicaciones P touch Editor 3 2 P touch Quick Editor y P touch AV Editor para Windows
318. within the P touch Editor 3 2 folder installed on the computer Using P touch Editor 3 2 e 0o000000000000909 0909090900909 P touch Editor 3 2 makes it easy for anyone to design and print more complex labels for almost any need imaginable Starting up P touch Editor 3 2 To start up P touch Editor 3 2 On a computer running Windows Q Click the Start button in the taskbar to dis play the Start menu Point to Programs Q Point to P touch Editor 3 2 Click P touch Editor 3 2 When P touch Editor is started the following window is displayed enu bar EN ana Standard toolbar auial ani el 1 1 sped 2 xl AE A Property dock Ed F ulers Layout area 6 ursor Print area Status bar For Help press Fl On a Macintosh computer O Double click the P touch Editor 3 2 icon in the P touch Editor 3 2 folder installed on the computer When P touch Editor is started the following window is displayed 28 Rulers Layout area Print area Title bar ile Edit View Object Fofmat Layout Database Window Help Menu bar ri 1 12 la 4 I le 7 Draw toolbar Print toolbar n E A o Database toolbar Property dock Object dock RRE atus Dar To view the help for the Mac version of P touch Editor 3 2 double click Main htm in the Help folder within the P touch Editor 3 2 folder installed on the computer
319. wj a a rj 7 Clip Ar Date Time text SEE Edit View Insert Format Layout Window Help Dis pales ela s pel o o TIE 100 el l e Date Time O To create a new line of text press the key board s Enter key Ch 2 Getting Started t With P touch Editor 3 2 text is always typed in using the insert mode The overwrite mode can not be used to type in text To change the font and text size click the appropriate icon in the property dock and then select the desired settings from the Properties that appear For details refer to Reading the User s Guide on page 27 Notes on usage Barcodes Keep the following points in mind when using P touch Editor 3 2 to print barcodes O Barcodes should be printed on white tape If other colors of tape are used the barcode reader may not be able to read the barcode correctly O Be sure to test the barcode reader to make sure that it can read printed barcodes in the environment where you plan to use them O The OR Code protocol can only be used with English If data in any other language is entered the barcode may not be read cor rectly Databases Keep the following points in mind when using the database functions of P touch Editor 3 2 NOTE For general details refer to the User s Guide sup plied on the P touch Editor 3 2 CDROM O The database function of P touch Editor 3 2 Windows version u
320. wn and press Code key cose To use a function printed in color above or on a key e Hold down and press the key for the desired function Return key Ez The return key can be used to select an tem from a list for example when adding a symbol or accented character to the text or to apply a selected setting Some questions asking you to confirm a com mand may appear on the LCD display espe cially when the function that you have chosen will delete or affect files In these cases press se is like answering yes NOTE To answer no press cx Refer to Cancel key below Ch 3 Functions To select an item from a list or to apply the selected setting e Press Ll Cancel key cance The Cancel key can be used to quit most func tions and return to the previous display without changing the text Some questions asking you to confirm a com mand may appear on the LCD display espe cially when the function that you have chosen will delete or affect files In these cases pressing is like answering no J lew 4 Refer to Return key To answer yes press above To quit a function without applying any changes that you may have made e Press cancel 45 Ch 3 Functions Entering text Typing in the text for your labels is almost the same as typing on a typewriter or a computer Insert key 2 Normally text is entered with the Insert
321. wo or more of the same P touch model are con nected through their USB ports instead of PTUSB select PTUSB PT 3600 9600 XXXXXXXXX where XXXXXXXXX is the serial number The serial number is written above the barcode on the silver label attached to the bot tom of the P touch For Windows 2000 and XP ts The P touch can be added as a second printer Macintosh In the Chooser select the PT 3600 9600 as the printer Specify correct settings for the BAUDRATE BIT LENGTH PARITY and BUSY interface parame ters Check that the interface cable is correctly con nected Select text or a barcode before trying to use the Numbering function Delete some of the text 85 ERROR MESSAGE LIST ERROR MESSAGE LINE LIMIT XX LINES MAXIMUM MEMORY FULL MIN 4 DIGITS NO FILES NO TAPE REPLACE BATTERIES PT 9600 only 86 CAUSE SOLUTION e This message appears if you try Reduce the number of to print or use the Layout Pre view function when the number of lines in the text is greater than the maximum possible for the installed tape This message appears if you try to print or use the Layout Pre view function when the number of lines in the text is greater than the maximum possible for the installed tape Since the number of lines possible depends on the width of the tape the message that appears depends on the tape width 16 LINES MAXIMUM on 36 mm tape
322. ximum number of text blocks has ae been entered when is held down and is pressed the error mes sage 50 LINE LIMIT REACHED will appear To split a text block into two position the cur sor under the character that you want to start the next peer and then hold down and To create a new block Hold down and press Js The new block mark BM appears at the end of the block Symbol key zx In addition to the letters symbols and numerals on the key tops there are over 440 additional symbols and pictures available with the Symbol function After these symbols or pictures are added to the text they can be deleted like any other character and some can be formatted using certain text formatting functions see pages 54 through 61 A table of the available symbols can be found on pages 96 through 98 To add a symbol or picture to the text Press za A row of symbols appears in the display gt PUNCTUATION 4 r 1 e L at x AUTO 1 10 HELSINKI A Length Margin Font Width Size NOTE To return to the text at any time press O press ym 48 Press or to select the desired cate gory of symbols and then press or until the desired symbol is displayed enlarged within the frame in the middle of the al Q Press The symbol is added to the text ts To type in a series of symbols hold down before pressing Then continue adding symbols by selecting them as
323. y m s componentes secundarios que se pueden seleccionar Haga clic en el bot n Change para ver el cuadro de di logo Select Sub components y ponga una marca de verificaci n junto a los componentes secundarios que desee seleccionar para que se instalen Si no se han instalado determinadas opciones o componentes secundarios puede que no est n disponibles algunas funciones de P touch Editor Despu s de seleccionar los componentes secundarios que desee haga clic en el bot n Continue 2 Haga clic en el bot n Next para que empiece la instalaci n Cuando P touch Editor se haya instalado aparecer un cuadro de di logo que permite seleccionar si se instala el controlador de la impresora Question 2 OK to install the printer driver i No Para instalar el controlador de la impresora haga clic en Yes Windows XP solamente Aparecer un mensaje inform ndole de que el controlador de impresora ha pasado las pruebas de compatibilidad y que debe hacer clic sobre el bot n Continue Anyway si aparece un mensaje de aviso Haga clic sobre el bot n OK IMPORTANT is pri s ias passed compatibility tests IF your hardware wizard iessage please select Continue Anyway to complete the Aparecer el primer cuadro de di logo de Driver Setup que le permitir seleccionar si la P touch estar conectada en el puerto USB o en el puerto RS 232C Contin e con el procedimiento en Instalaci

Brother PT-3600 Printer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents